Chapter 2 Literature Review
5
CHAPTER 2
LITERATURE REVIEW
The challenges associated with matured oilfields as well as different polymer gel systems
are reviewed with particular emphasis on their application to improve sweep efficiency
through profile modification during enhanced oil recovery processes The cross-linked
polymer gels have great potential for the use in permeability reduction fluid control and
profile modification This review includes gel formation and gelation mechanism models
for rheological and gelation behavior for polymer gel systems development of different gel
systems using different cross-linkers selection criteria of wells for gel treatment and
designing of job for oil field application
21 CHALLENGES ASSOCIATED WITH MATURED OIL FIELDS AND THEIR
CONTROL
The enhanced oil recovery processes like water flooding polymer flooding (Needham and
Doe 1987 Sohn et al 1990 El-Hadidi et al 1997 Norris et al 2013) foam flooding
(Miller et al 1994) alkaline-surfactant-polymer and alkali flooding etc are used for the
mature oil fields (Baojun et al 2004 Ma et al 2007 Benson et al 2007 Thorne et al
2010) In these processes some kind of fluid is injected to push the oil from the injection
well toward the producer Water and gases are the most commonly used displacing fluids in
this process Water flood is the most common practice of secondary oil recovery techniques
(Dalrymple et al 1994 Zheng et al 2002 Tang et al 2004) Injection of carbon dioxide
or other gases is also a common practice to improve oil recovery efficiency (Sydansk and
Reichman 1996) Regardless of the type of the fluid used to displace the oil the displacing
fluid could bypass the oil and early breakthrough could occur In the case of water flood
the water oil ratio could become so high that the process ceases to be economical any more
(Jordan et al 1982) For injection of CO2 or other gases the high gasoil ratio renders the
process uneconomical (Modesto et al 2009)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
6
The major problem associated with matured oil fields during enhanced oil oil recovery
process is channelling of injected fluid (gas and water) through high permeability zones
fractures and fracture network in the reservoir In this situation injected fluid starts to move
towards producing well and oil along with injected fluid or sometimes only injected fluid is
produced (Albonico et al 1994 Glenat et al 1996 Chauveteau et al 1997 Al-Anazi et
al 2011 Elsharafi and Bai 2012) This causes pressure energy of injected fluid being
wasted without producing the oil in the permeability zones (Krilov et al 1998 Larson et
al 1999) The breakthrough of injected fluid and production of injected fluid in the
producer well makes the enhanced oil recovery process uneconomical (Scott et al 1987
Bryant et al 1997 Thomas et al 1998 Seright et al 2001 Parez et al 2001 Sakissian et
al 2005 Ye et al 2005 2010 Chung et al 2011 Elsharafi and Bai 2012)
The above problem will be remedied if the already swept high permeable zones andor
layers could be somehow plugged so that the injected fluid is forced to re-direct itself into
the unswept regions andor unswept layers causing additional oil recovery and improving
volumetric sweep efficiency (Stavland et al 1996 Krishnan et al 2000 Pritchett et al
2003 Sydansk and Seright 2007 Liu et al 2010 Shi et al 2011 Yu et al 2011 Zhao et
al 2011)
There are several methods to control the excessive water production problems associated
with enhanced oil recovery methods (Kabir 2001 Alqam et al 2001) These include
mechanical and chemical methods
211 Mechanical methods
There are different types of mechanical methods for controlling the excessive water
production (Mohammad et al 2007) These methods works on the mechanism of coning
control via draw down reduction co-production and downhole separation simultaneous
water and oil production for coning mitigation and downhole separation and disposal Most
common and current excessive water production methods include
Chapter 2 Literature Review
7
Bridge plugs
Straddle packers
Tubing patches
Cement
Sand plugs
Expandable tubular
212 Chemical methods
The chemical methods are most suitable for reservoir related problems (Kabir 2001)
Chemical means can be applied without a rig on location making them more convenient
for the operator and less expensive (Mennella et al 2001) Unlike cement and bridge
plugs chemicals including gelling polymers can be placed deep into the formation They
form a gel that acts as a physical barrier that hinders the flow of water for a long period of
time The length of this period depends on the characteristics of the reservoir the gel and
water movement in the treated reservoir The examples include
Micro matrix cements
Polymers
Micro particle blends
Foamed systems
Resinsparticulate chemical blend
Gelsgelant
Profile modification is one of the latest techniques considered to increase the oil recovery
during EOR process (Seright 1988 Mahto et al 2009) The profile modification is process
of reducing the permeability of high permeability zones by placing the injected fluid in the
porous media making the injected fluid to flow through the low permeability zones (Gao et
Chapter 2 Literature Review
8
al 1993 Xiang 1995 Alqam et al 2001) The method comprises emplacement of a
gelant slug into the highly permeable flooded out layers of the formation close to well bore
(Chang et al 1988 1985 Ali and Barrufet 1994) The gel is designed to reduce the flow
profile and diverting injected fluid into zones of greater residual oil content (Krumrine and
Boyce 1985 Mahto 2009 Yadav and Mahto 2010)
Today polymer gel treatment is the most useful chemical method to reduce the water
production (Cai and Huang 2001) Some kind of polymer solution is injected into the
reservoir and is allowed to gel under certain conditions The gel viscosity being much
higher than the displacing fluid could impede the flow of displacing fluid through the
already flooded regions thus the displacing fluid finds new paths which means additional
oil can be displaced (Ghosh et al 2011) Polymer gel systems are typically composed of a
water soluble polymer and a cross-linking agent which are dissolved in water (Zaitoun et
al 1991) This solution is considered as a gelant solution After allowing sufficient time
the gelant sets into a semisolid mass and behaves as a flow diverting or blocking agent
(Bryant et al 1996)
Selection of a gel polymer system strongly depends on the reservoir conditions such as
temperature salinity hardness and pH of water used for the preparation of the gelant Other
parameters for the proper selection of a given gel polymer system include salinity of the
formation water permeability of the target zone and the lithology of the formation (Yan et
al 1999 He et al 2009 Urbissinova et al 2010 Ponnapati et al 2011)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
9
22 GEL PROPERTIES AND GELATION MECHANISMGEL CHEMISTRY
221 Gel properties
Gels are classified as semi-solids The water-based gels that are of interest here are highly
elastic with high water content 98 to 99 trapped in the three-dimensional polymer
structure of the gel Many systems have been developed which form gels in beaker tests
under conditions anticipated in petroleum reservoirs Through extensive testing it is
possible to determine conditions such as ranges of composition pH and temperature that
the gels are stable over long periods of time (Mahto and Maurya 2007) Stability of the gel
under reservoir conditions is one of the most important properties of the gel Some of the
important pertinent properties of the gels to their application in the profile modification are
the following (Mahto et al 2011)
2211 Rheological properties
Gels are highly elastic and their rheological properties are significantly different than those
of polymer solutions that they are made from (Al-Muntasheri et al 2007) Gels formed at
low shear rates were more viscous than gels formed at high shear rates However the
structure of these gels was susceptible to shear degradation Kharrat amp Vossoughi 1992
studied rheological behavior of four different gel systems and concluded that each gel
system is unique in their rheological behavior and generalization of their rheological
characterization does not seem to be warranted
2212 Gelation time
In-depth gel treatment requires gelation systems with long gelation times Gelation time is
not a limitation where near-wellbore treatments are desired but is of concern where it is
desired to have in-depth treatment to reduce cross-flow between layers (Al-Muntasheri et
al 2006 Mahto 2010) Gelation time is controlled differently for different gel systems
Chapter 2 Literature Review
10
For example the chromium redox gelling system can be used to promote long gelation time
by controlling the rate that Cr (VI) is reduced to Cr (III) In high temperature reservoirs in
situ gelation rate can be controlled using low molecular weight polyacrylamide with a low
degree of hydrolysis 1 by the rate that amide groups are auto-hydrolyzed to carboxyl
groups These groups subsequently react with chromium introduced as chromium acetate to
form gels which are stable in synthetic sea water to temperatures Gelation time is a
function of temperature and it follows the Arrhenius-type plot That is a semi-log plot of
gelation time vs inverse of absolute temperature produces a straight line In their study of
viscometric behavior of chromium (III)polyacrylamide gels Aslam et al 1984 observed
that gelation time decreased with increasing polymer concentration and also with
increasing initial sodium dichromate concentration It was also observed that gelation rate
was affected by shear rate and shear rate history Implication from the latter observation is
that extrapolation of gel time measurements obtained from viscometry to In-situ gelation
should be done at comparable shear rates More importantly shear rate dependence means
that in situ gelation may be influenced by the shear rate history which a gelling solution
experiences as it flows from mixing equipment through surface and subsurface equipment
into the reservoir Shear rate also varies in the reservoir as the gelling solution flows from
the wellbore into the formation
Figure 21 Stages of gel formation
Chapter 2 Literature Review
11
2213 Selective injectivity
It is desired for the gelling solution to enter the zone of high permeability with minimum or
no flow into the zones of low permeability Most operators prefer not to isolate zones when
injecting a gel solution into a well where several intervals may take the gel solution
Selective injectivity with the majority of the gel solution going into the high permeability
zone Simple models of polymer injection indicate that selective injection occurs only in
parallel linear displacement tests and is absent when polymer is injected into a layered
reservoir in radial flow Todd et al 1990 show that selective injection is possible for a
chromium-redox gelling system injected into a well containing three layers with different
permeabilities However the tight zones had significant permeability reduction in the
immediate vicinity of the wellbore and this would have to be removed before water could
subsequently be injected into the zones Hoefner et al 1992 presented laboratory core
flood data for parallel linear cores which showed selective penetration of chromium
xanthan gels Selective flow behavior was found to be a function of process variables such
as permeability and injection rates and was observed only over a limited range of
conditions Hoefner et al 1992 acknowledge that selective gels are not completely
excluded from the lower permeability media
2214 Syneresis
Gels normally undergo syneresis with time This causes shrinkage in gel volume and
consequently water is expelled from the gel structure It is believed that syneresis is the
result of increasing the cross-link density with time It seems that syneresis is a function of
brine salinity pH temperature and gel composition (Albonico et al 1997 Al-Muntasheri
et al 2006) Although syneresis could become a hindrance for the long-term effectiveness
of the gel placement in the fracture in pore scale it does not have significant effect
Chapter 2 Literature Review
12
2215 Dehydration
Gels dehydrate when exposed to a high pressure gradient Dehydration causes shrinkage in
gel volume and loss of water
222 Gelation mechanism of most useful polymer gel systems used for profile
modification jobs
2221 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide and chromium
(III) gel system
Chromium (III) forms a complex ion in solution and reacts by a ligand-exchange reaction
with the carboxylate or hydrolysed group on the polymer molecules to form crosslinks
resulting in a network or gel In this gelation mechanism where one Cr (III) interacts two
carboxylic groups (Jain et al 2005)
C
CH
CH2
CH
C
O
CrOO
P
P
NH2
O
O C
CH
CH2
CHCH
O
P
NH2
P
Partially Hydrolyzed Polyacrlamide + Cr (III)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
13
2222 Gelation mechanism of polyacrylamide tert-butyl acrylate (PAtBA) copolymer
with polyethyleneimine (PEI)
There is two gelation mechanism involve for polyacrylamide tert-butyl acrylate (PAtBA)
copolymer with polyethyleneimine (PEI)
First is the formation of covalent bonds between the carbonyl carbon at the ester group and
an imine nitrogen from PEI
Figure 22 Cross-linking reaction with PEI through ester carbonyl carbon
(Hardy et al 1999 Al-Muntasheri et al 2007)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
14
Second is the PEI nitrogens form covalent bonds with the carbonyl carbons at the amide
group of PAtBA through a transamidation reaction
Figure 23 Cross-linking reaction with PEI through transamidation of the amide
group (Reddy et al 2003 Al-Muntasheri et al 2007)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
15
2223 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide-hexamine-
hydroquinone gel system (Yadav and Mahto 2013)
The hexamine on hydrolysis yields formaldehyde which then combines with hydroquinone
and form 2 3 5 6 tetramethylol hydroquinone Further partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide reacts with 2 3 5 6 tetramethylol hydroquinone and forms three
dimensional networks of polymer gel the different steps of which are as follows
Step I
In the initial step hexamine hydrolyses to yield formaldehyde
N
N N+ H2O CH2 OH +
O
C
H H
Formaldehyde
Hexamine
N
6 OH 4 NH3
_ H2O
Step II
Formaldehyde produced in step-I then react with hydroquinone to form a condensed
structure known as 2 3 5 6-tetramethylolhydroquinone
+
O
C
H H
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
Hydroquinone Formaldehyde 2 3 5 6-Tetramethylol Hydroquinone
OH
OH
4
Chapter 2 Literature Review
16
Step III
The condensed molecule formed in step-II then reacts with PHPA to form the 3-
dimensional gel structure which helps in profile modification jobs
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide
Partially Hydrolized Polyacrylamide (PHPA)
Amide
O-
Na+
+
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
2 3 5 6-Tetramethylol Hydroquinone
R
R
o N
H
H
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
HO
Water
Crosslinking 3-D gel structure
Chapter 2 Literature Review
17
2224 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide-hexamine-
pyrocatechol gel system (Yadav and Mahto 2012)
The hexamine on hydrolysis yields formaldehyde which then combines with pyrocatechol
and form 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol Further partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide reacts with 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol and forms three
dimensional networks of polymer gel the different steps of which are as follows
Step I
In the initial step hexamine hydrolyses to yield formaldehyde
N
N N+ H2O CH2 OH +
O
C
H H
Formaldehyde
Hexamine
N
6 OH 4 NH3
_ H2O
Chapter 2 Literature Review
18
Step II
Formaldehyde produced in step-I then react with pyrocatechol to form a condensed
structure known as 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol
+
O
C
H H
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
Pyrocatechol Formaldehyde 3 4 5 6 Tetramethylol Pyrocatechol
OH
4OH
Step III
The condensed molecule formed in step-II then reacts with PHPA to form the 3-
dimensional gel structure which helps in profile modification jobs
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide
Partially Hydrolized Polyacrylamide (PHPA)
Amide
O-
Na+
+
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
3 4 5 6 Tetramethylol Pyrocatechol
Chapter 2 Literature Review
19
R
R
o N
H
H
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
HO
Water
Crosslinking 3-D gel structure 3-D Structure of polymer gel
23 MATHEMATICAL FLOW MODELS FOR THE RHEOLOGICAL BEHAVIOR
OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS
Several rheological models are reported in literature for the determination of rheological
behavior of polymer gel solutions (Kelessidis and Maglione 2006 Park and Song 2010)
The Bingham model is expressed as
τ = τ + kγ
Fluids that exhibit Bingham plastic behavior are characterized by a yield point (τ0) and a
plastic viscosity (μp) that is independent of the shear rate
There are several rheological models that involve three or more adjustable parameters It is
necessary to include a third parameter to describe the flow of the fluids in the upper or
lower Newtonian region as well as the Power law region The Herschel-Bulkley model
Chapter 2 Literature Review
20
corrects this deficiency by replacing the plastic viscosity term in the Bingham model with a
Power law expression as follows
τ = τ + kγ
τ ndash Shear stress Pa
τ0 ndash Yield point Pa
K ndash Consistency index Pasn
γ ndash Shear rate s-1
n ndash Flow behavior index
The parameters K and n are similar to those of power law model For fluids having a yield
stress however the calculated values of n and K will be different from those calculated
using power law model The parameter τ0 is the fluidrsquos yield stress at zero shear rate In
theory this yield stress is identical to the Bingham plastic yield point (YP) though its
calculated value is different The model is reduce to the Bingham plastic model when n=1
and reduces to the power law rheological model when τ0=0
In a general way the rheological model proposed by Mizrahi-Berk may be gives a good fit
with most of the rheograms of polymer gel systems
τ = τ + kγ
While the power index of the shear rate (n) is generally less than 1 to show a shear-thinning
behavior neither the consistency index nor yield stress from the models shows any pattern
with the solids content
A nonlinear relation exits between the shear stress and the shear rate above the yield stress
There are a number of rheological models used to describe this behavior RobertsonndashStiff
(Ohen and Bick 2011) proposed a three-parameter yield-pseudo-plastic model for relating
the shear stress to the shear rate may be used in determination of rheological behavior of
polymer gel system as follows
Chapter 2 Literature Review
21
τ = k (γ + C)
Where k C and n are model parameters The RobertsonndashStiff model includes the
Newtonian Bingham plastic and power law models as special cases
24 DEVELOPMENT OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS USING DIFFERENT
CROSS-LINKERS
Cross-linked polymers have been widely used for profile modification jobs over the last
decades (Mahto and Sharma 2010)
241 Polymers used for profile modification jobs
The most commonly used polymers are the following
2411 PolyacrylamidePartially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
These are water soluble polymer whose monomeric unit is the acrylamide molecule The
polyacrylamide has undergoes partially hydrolysis which causes anionic carboxyl group to
be scattered along the backbone chain (Wever et al 2011) The polymers are called
partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamide is between 1x106 to 8x106 The size of the molecules
about 01 to 03 micro meters By hydrolysis in a caustic water solution some of the
CONH2 group react to form carbyl group (COOH)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
22
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide Amide
O-
Na+
Figure 24 Chemical structure of partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
2412 Xanthan gum
Xanthan gum is a polysaccharide with a a-D-glucose backbone like cellulose but every
second glucose unit is attached to a triaccharide consisting of mannose glucuronic acid
and mannose The mannose closest to the backbone has an acetic acid ester on carbon 6
and the mannose at the end of the triaccharide is linked through carbons 6 and 4 to the
second carbon of pyruvic acid Xanthan gum is produced by the bacterium Xanthomonas
campestris which is found on crucifereous vegetables such as cabbage and cauliflower
The negatively charged carboxyl group on the side chains because the molecules to form
very viscous fluids when mixed with water (Chatterji and Borchardt 1981 Taylor and
Nasr-El-Din 1998)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
23
Figure 25 Chemical structure of xanthan gum (Song et al 2006)
2413 Copolymers
The main copolymers used in profile modification jobs are copolymer of acrylamide ter
polymer with N-vinyle pyrrolidone and 2-acrylamide-2-methyl-1-propanesulfonic acid
(PAAm-VP-AMPS) amphoteric copolymer polyacrylonitrile and lignin sulphonate
Table 21 Properties of polyacrylamide and xanthan gum polymers
Sl
No
Property Polyacrylamide Xanthan Gum
1 Transition Metal
Cations
Easily crosslinked Easily crosslinked
2 Shear stability Undergoes irreversible
shear degradation
Reversible shear thining
Chapter 2 Literature Review
24
3 Thermal stability Maximum use upto 225-
250 (degF)
Maximum use 160-170 (degF)
4 Hydrolytic
stability
Hydrolysis promoted by
acid or base Partially
hydrolyzed product more
sensitive to Ca+2 Mg+2
Hydrolytic de-
polymerization promoted by
acid or base especially at
high temperature
5 Oxidative
stability
Susceptible Particularly susceptible
especially at high
temperature
6 Brine tolerance Very limited especially to
Ca+2 Mg+2
Good tolerance to mono and
divalent captions
7 Microbial
degradation
Susceptible to attack by
yeast fungi bacteria
Very susceptible in aerobic
conditions
242 Cross linkers used for profile modification jobs
Crosslinkers are the chemical compound which formed stable three dimensional structures
with high molecular weight polymers like polyacrylamide and xanthan gum
The cross-linkers used in cross-linking of the high molecular weight polymers are the
following
2421 Metallic crosslinkers
The most common metallic crosslinkers are Al+3 Cr+6 Cr+3 zirconium titanium boron etc
2422 Organic crosslinkers
Two classes of organic cross-linkers namely phenolic and aldehydes are used for profile
modification jobs The different cross-linkers in the phenolic group are phenol
hydroquinone resorcinol phenyl acetate salicylic alcohol furfuryl alcohol etc In the
Chapter 2 Literature Review
25
aldehyde group main crosslinkers are formaldehyde paraformaldehyde hexamethylene
tetra mine etc
243 Emerging developments of cross linked polymer gel systems
Polymer gel systems have emerged as one of the most effective conformance solution for
controlling of excessive water production worldwide The different cross-linked polymer
gel systems are the following (Moradi 2000 Mahto and Sharma 2010)
2431 Polyacrylamide-chromium (III) gel system
The short gelation time of Cr(III)-acetatepolymer composition at elevated temperature
limit their application to reservoirs that are at relatively at lower temperatures (Sydansk and
Southwell 2000) The existing gelation characteristics of these systems have limited
control over the gelation time of the polymer solutions at elevated temperature For the
delay in gelation time at elevated temperature chromium (IV) or formaldehyde are used but
their use in the field is complicated by significant health and environmental issues At
present many organic ligands are used for their delaying power with Cr(III)polymer and
Cr(OAc)3 polymer solutions and provides outstanding control over the gelation time over
60-135degC With the use of this gelation time spanning the range from several hours to one
month or more at temperature up to 120degC The most interesting features of the ligands like
glycolate malonate and salicylate are their gelation delaying power and cost which
provides gelation delays of 12 to 33 times longer than acetate The other ligands include
oxalate citrate maleate and EDTA which are characteristic by their extremely strong Cr
(III) binding capacity and are found to block gelation entirely (Lane 1998 Jain et al
2004)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
26
2432 Polyacrylamide-chromium (IV)-thiourea gel system
The chromium (VI)-Thiourea-polyacrylamide gels form as the result of two chemical
reactions First chromium (VI) is reduced to chromium (III) by thiourea Second the
produced chromium (III) reacts with carboxylate groups on the partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide to form a crosslinked gel The pH range for the reduction of chromium (VI)
to chromium (III) by thiourea is in the range of 40 to 50 Gel times on the order of days to
weeks can be achieved which is desirable to allow proper placement of the gel system in
the formation Another option is to use chromium (III) ligands like acetate lactate or
manolate
2433 Xanthan-Cr(III) gel system
The chromium (III)-xanthan gel systems have been widely recommended for matrix
treatment because they are shear thinning inject easily and have been claimed to reheal
after shearing (Chang et al 1985 1988 Kolnes et al 1991 Liang et al 1992 Nagra et
al 1996) The initial gelation rate of xanthan-chromium gel system is inversely
proportional to the hydrogen ion concentration and is strongly affected by pH in the porous
matrix (Storm et al 1991)
2434 Acrylamide-polymerchromium (III)-carboxylate gel system
The aqous acrylamide-polymercarboxylate gels are formed by crosslinking water soluble
acrylamide polymers with a Cr(III) carboxylate complex crosslinking agent (Sydansk
1990) The water soluble acrylamide polymer can be polyacrylamide partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide or tert-polymer containing acrylamide Acrylamide-polymerCr(III)
carboxylate gels can be used for near wellbore total shutoff treatments where matrix rock is
to be treated These are stable at elevated temperatures and they are stable and rigid at
225degF at elevated temperature These new matrix of gels are functional in the presence of
high salinity water at elevated temperatures (Sydansk 1988)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
27
2435 Polyacrylamide-aluminum citrate gel system
The aluminum citrate solution form gels with anionic polyacrylamide under certain
conditions Cationic polymers do not form gels with aluminum under similar conditions
The low pH aluminum system begins crosslinking with polymer solution immediately
even before it can be injected This prevents in depth penetration of the plugging solution
Because aluminum is known to be amphoteric in aqueous solution they can crosslink at
high pH environment
2436 Polyacrylamide-polyethyleneimine gel system
These gels are rigid and non-flowing at polyacrylamide concentration of 7 and 9 These
are thermally stable at 100degC and a permeability reduction of more than 94 was realized
indicating the possibility of using this system in profile modification jobs or water shutoff
2437 KUSP1-monoethylphthalate systemKUSP1-boric acid gel system
KUSP1 is a biopolymer that is extracted from a medium after the growth of the bacterium
cellumonasflavigena It is nontoxic and exhibit viscosities on the order of 2-3 cP at 25degC
KUSP1 is soluble in alkali but forms a gel with monoethylphthalate ester and permeability
reduction by treatment with the KUSP1-MEP system is stable to brine flow for periods of
up to six months Alkaline KUSP1 can also form gel with boric acid and the gelation time
of the KUSP1-boric acid system could be regulated up to several days by selection of pH
and boric acid concentrations (Vossoughi and Buller 1991)
2438 Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine gel
system
Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine system at acidic
conditions the gelation time was short and the gel did not last for a longer period of time
Chapter 2 Literature Review
28
High viscosity is obtained at high initial values This system can be used where formation
brine contains high concentration of divalent cations (ranges from 10000 to 15000 mgl)
Iron (III) can react with the polymer and accelerated the gelation process and produce a gel
that breaks over a short periods of time (Al-Muntasheri 2007) Hence it should not be used
after acid treatment jobs especially in sandstone reservoirs as the possibility of iron
concentration is high in the well bore area which can cause premature setting of gel This
system can be used at a temperature less than 140degC (Al-Muntasheri 2007 2006 2008)
2439 Polyacrylamide-phenol-formaldehyde gel systemspolyacrylamide-resorcinol
formaldehyde gel system
Phenol-Formaldehyde polymer gels system is an attractive tool fluid shutoff or profile
modification in high temperature formations By selecting between different polymer
compositions reasonable flexibility in the gelation time can be achieved over the
temperature range from 60degC to at least 140degC (Bryant et al 1997 Mahto et al 2009
2010) Choice of polymer composition permits the control of the gelation time and the
gelants display good injectivity even when the residence time approaches the gelation time
(Zhuang et al 2000 Banerjee et al 2006) Cross-linking occurs over a wide range of pH
and is insensitive to lithology (Seright and Martin 1993 Dovan et al 1997)
24310 Polyacrylamide-hydroquinone-hexamine gel system
Hexamethylenetetramine (HMTA) undergoes hydrolysis to produce methyldiol and
ammonia Methyldiol compound is very much unstable Hence it looses water molecules to
produce formaldehyde Thus formed formaldehyde is then reacting with hydroquinone
Hydroquinone undergoes electrophilic substitution reaction to produce 2356
tetramethylol hydroquinone (intermediate) Then intermediate react with partially
hydrolyzed polyacrylamide (PHPA) polymer Hence form a large viscous molecule Hence
OHmacr in methylol group of intermediate and H+ from amide group of polymer are leaving as
Chapter 2 Literature Review
29
a water molecule while producing N-C crosslinker (Dovan et al 1997 Gwaish et al 2008
Mahto and Sheikh 2009)
Table 22 Summary of thermally stable gels
Sl
No
Polymers Crosslinkers Comments
1 Polyacrylamide low mol wt
(Bryant et al 1996)
Cr(III) Acetate 5 or more polymer
needed
2 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Lockhart and Albonico 1994)
Cr(III) Molonate Slower gelation rate
than with Cr(III)
Acetate
3 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Bryant et al 1997 1997)
Phenol and
Formaldehyde
Ligands such as
citrate oxalate
lactate stabilized the
gel
4 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Gawish et al 2008)
Hydroquinone amp
Hexamethylenetetramine
2 sodium
carbonate needed
for softening and
stability
5 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Moradi 2000)
Terephthaladehyde
dihydroxynaphthalene
HMTA etc
Stable gel
6 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer (Moradi 2000)
Phenol formaldehyde Stable gel
7 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer
(Moradi 2000)
Phenyl acetate phenyl
salicylate etc with
HMTA
Stable gel lower
toxicity than phenol
amp formaldehyde gel
8 Acrylic esteracrylic acid Polyethyleneimine Stable gel required
Chapter 2 Literature Review
30
copolymer
(Moradi 2000)
larger concentration
amp cooling at below
93degC
9 Resorcinol
(Mahto et al 2009)
Formaldehyde Water like viscosity
of gelant is plus
toxicity is a problem
10 Scleroglucan
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Stable gel the
polymer is very
expensive
11 Lignosulfate
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Expensive gel due to
high chromium
required
12 Alcaligenes biopolymer PVA
(Moradi 2000)
Na+ phenol amp aldehyde Stable gel in pH
range of 7-8 higher
concentration of
polymer and
crosslinkers needed
13 PVA-polyvinylamide copolymer
(Hoskin and Shu 1989)
Dialdehydes or
polyaldehydes
Not widely used
14 Copolymer tert butyle acylate
(Al-Muntasheri et al 2006
2007)
Polyethyleneimine
15 Partially hydrolysed
polyacrylamide (Jia et al 2010
2011)
Polyethyleneimine
Chapter 2 Literature Review
31
25 SELECTION CRITERIA OF WELLS FOR GEL TREATMENT
Polymer gels can be applied to both injection and production wells (Al-Muntasheri et al
2010 Canbolat and Parlaktuna 2012) The objective of treating injection well is to
improve vertical injection profile resulting in more efficient distribution of injected water
(avery et al 1987) The production well treatment is to improve areal efficiency and to
reduce water oil ratio by reducing water channeling in the near wellbore region
(Giangiacomo 2001 Larson et al 1999 Ghafoori et al 2008) The following criterions
for candidate selection of injection and production wells are reported in the literature
(Maghsood and Bringham 1984 Sharma et al 2009)
251 Selection criteria for injection wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Low secondary oil recovery due to poor sweep efficiency that is high degree of
reservoir heterogeneity
(b) Pre-matured water breakthrough of producing wells
(c) Evidence of direct injector to producer channeling through fractures bugs or high
matrix permeability rock
(d) High injection rate associated with low well head pressure
252 Selection criteria for production wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Recovery calculations indicate that considerable mobile oil remains that could be
recovered most cost effectively if a blocking agent could be realistically placed in the
proper location
(b) High water oil ratio (WOR) values are observed
(c) The source of excess water production is identified (ie using profiles logs or
tracers)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
32
(d) The candidate well exhibits high productivity
26 DESIGNING GEL JOB FOR OIL FIELD APPLICATION
Gel volume is to be designed for both injection and production wells
261 Injection well
When cross flow occurs between thief zone and low permeability oil bearing zone a large
volume of gel is to be injected so that gel penetrates significant distance into the thief zone
(Romero et al 2003) In case where there is no cross flow ie thief zone is separated by an
impermeable barrierlayer from oil bearing zone a small volume of gel is placed near the
wellbore (Glenat et al 1996) Gel volume can be designed in two ways one is based on
filling a portion of channel volume from injector to producer and another is based on
distance from the injection well up to which the gel is to be placed (Parez et al 2001
Sarkissian et al 2005)
262 Production well
There are no definite design criteria available for bulk volume for producing well
treatment Gels with higher polymer concentrations are used in producing well (vs
injection well) treatment because the gel has to withstand high differential pressure in the
direction of producing wellbore (Glenat et al 1996 Giangiacomo 2001) Based on field
experience the following guidelines have been given
(a) Gel volume is equivalent to the volume of fluid that the well can produce in 24 hours
in a pumped-off condition
(b) Gel volume is based on 50 feet radius and thief zone thickness 0
(c) Gel volume is based on 50-200 barrels of gel per perforated foot
Chapter 2 Literature Review
33
26 CONCLUSIONS
The conclusion of the study provided strong evidence that stable gels can be produced
under harsh environmental conditions with organic and inorganic crosslinkers which may
be used for the profile modification jobs in the oil fields These crosslinkers typically
produced gels at temperature ranges from 40 degC to 140 degC and salinity up to 60000 ppm
They are generally less toxic then chromium acetate phenol and formaldehyde croslinkers
The majority of the crosslinkers are readily available at prices not much higher than the
toxic crosslinkers
5
CHAPTER 2
LITERATURE REVIEW
The challenges associated with matured oilfields as well as different polymer gel systems
are reviewed with particular emphasis on their application to improve sweep efficiency
through profile modification during enhanced oil recovery processes The cross-linked
polymer gels have great potential for the use in permeability reduction fluid control and
profile modification This review includes gel formation and gelation mechanism models
for rheological and gelation behavior for polymer gel systems development of different gel
systems using different cross-linkers selection criteria of wells for gel treatment and
designing of job for oil field application
21 CHALLENGES ASSOCIATED WITH MATURED OIL FIELDS AND THEIR
CONTROL
The enhanced oil recovery processes like water flooding polymer flooding (Needham and
Doe 1987 Sohn et al 1990 El-Hadidi et al 1997 Norris et al 2013) foam flooding
(Miller et al 1994) alkaline-surfactant-polymer and alkali flooding etc are used for the
mature oil fields (Baojun et al 2004 Ma et al 2007 Benson et al 2007 Thorne et al
2010) In these processes some kind of fluid is injected to push the oil from the injection
well toward the producer Water and gases are the most commonly used displacing fluids in
this process Water flood is the most common practice of secondary oil recovery techniques
(Dalrymple et al 1994 Zheng et al 2002 Tang et al 2004) Injection of carbon dioxide
or other gases is also a common practice to improve oil recovery efficiency (Sydansk and
Reichman 1996) Regardless of the type of the fluid used to displace the oil the displacing
fluid could bypass the oil and early breakthrough could occur In the case of water flood
the water oil ratio could become so high that the process ceases to be economical any more
(Jordan et al 1982) For injection of CO2 or other gases the high gasoil ratio renders the
process uneconomical (Modesto et al 2009)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
6
The major problem associated with matured oil fields during enhanced oil oil recovery
process is channelling of injected fluid (gas and water) through high permeability zones
fractures and fracture network in the reservoir In this situation injected fluid starts to move
towards producing well and oil along with injected fluid or sometimes only injected fluid is
produced (Albonico et al 1994 Glenat et al 1996 Chauveteau et al 1997 Al-Anazi et
al 2011 Elsharafi and Bai 2012) This causes pressure energy of injected fluid being
wasted without producing the oil in the permeability zones (Krilov et al 1998 Larson et
al 1999) The breakthrough of injected fluid and production of injected fluid in the
producer well makes the enhanced oil recovery process uneconomical (Scott et al 1987
Bryant et al 1997 Thomas et al 1998 Seright et al 2001 Parez et al 2001 Sakissian et
al 2005 Ye et al 2005 2010 Chung et al 2011 Elsharafi and Bai 2012)
The above problem will be remedied if the already swept high permeable zones andor
layers could be somehow plugged so that the injected fluid is forced to re-direct itself into
the unswept regions andor unswept layers causing additional oil recovery and improving
volumetric sweep efficiency (Stavland et al 1996 Krishnan et al 2000 Pritchett et al
2003 Sydansk and Seright 2007 Liu et al 2010 Shi et al 2011 Yu et al 2011 Zhao et
al 2011)
There are several methods to control the excessive water production problems associated
with enhanced oil recovery methods (Kabir 2001 Alqam et al 2001) These include
mechanical and chemical methods
211 Mechanical methods
There are different types of mechanical methods for controlling the excessive water
production (Mohammad et al 2007) These methods works on the mechanism of coning
control via draw down reduction co-production and downhole separation simultaneous
water and oil production for coning mitigation and downhole separation and disposal Most
common and current excessive water production methods include
Chapter 2 Literature Review
7
Bridge plugs
Straddle packers
Tubing patches
Cement
Sand plugs
Expandable tubular
212 Chemical methods
The chemical methods are most suitable for reservoir related problems (Kabir 2001)
Chemical means can be applied without a rig on location making them more convenient
for the operator and less expensive (Mennella et al 2001) Unlike cement and bridge
plugs chemicals including gelling polymers can be placed deep into the formation They
form a gel that acts as a physical barrier that hinders the flow of water for a long period of
time The length of this period depends on the characteristics of the reservoir the gel and
water movement in the treated reservoir The examples include
Micro matrix cements
Polymers
Micro particle blends
Foamed systems
Resinsparticulate chemical blend
Gelsgelant
Profile modification is one of the latest techniques considered to increase the oil recovery
during EOR process (Seright 1988 Mahto et al 2009) The profile modification is process
of reducing the permeability of high permeability zones by placing the injected fluid in the
porous media making the injected fluid to flow through the low permeability zones (Gao et
Chapter 2 Literature Review
8
al 1993 Xiang 1995 Alqam et al 2001) The method comprises emplacement of a
gelant slug into the highly permeable flooded out layers of the formation close to well bore
(Chang et al 1988 1985 Ali and Barrufet 1994) The gel is designed to reduce the flow
profile and diverting injected fluid into zones of greater residual oil content (Krumrine and
Boyce 1985 Mahto 2009 Yadav and Mahto 2010)
Today polymer gel treatment is the most useful chemical method to reduce the water
production (Cai and Huang 2001) Some kind of polymer solution is injected into the
reservoir and is allowed to gel under certain conditions The gel viscosity being much
higher than the displacing fluid could impede the flow of displacing fluid through the
already flooded regions thus the displacing fluid finds new paths which means additional
oil can be displaced (Ghosh et al 2011) Polymer gel systems are typically composed of a
water soluble polymer and a cross-linking agent which are dissolved in water (Zaitoun et
al 1991) This solution is considered as a gelant solution After allowing sufficient time
the gelant sets into a semisolid mass and behaves as a flow diverting or blocking agent
(Bryant et al 1996)
Selection of a gel polymer system strongly depends on the reservoir conditions such as
temperature salinity hardness and pH of water used for the preparation of the gelant Other
parameters for the proper selection of a given gel polymer system include salinity of the
formation water permeability of the target zone and the lithology of the formation (Yan et
al 1999 He et al 2009 Urbissinova et al 2010 Ponnapati et al 2011)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
9
22 GEL PROPERTIES AND GELATION MECHANISMGEL CHEMISTRY
221 Gel properties
Gels are classified as semi-solids The water-based gels that are of interest here are highly
elastic with high water content 98 to 99 trapped in the three-dimensional polymer
structure of the gel Many systems have been developed which form gels in beaker tests
under conditions anticipated in petroleum reservoirs Through extensive testing it is
possible to determine conditions such as ranges of composition pH and temperature that
the gels are stable over long periods of time (Mahto and Maurya 2007) Stability of the gel
under reservoir conditions is one of the most important properties of the gel Some of the
important pertinent properties of the gels to their application in the profile modification are
the following (Mahto et al 2011)
2211 Rheological properties
Gels are highly elastic and their rheological properties are significantly different than those
of polymer solutions that they are made from (Al-Muntasheri et al 2007) Gels formed at
low shear rates were more viscous than gels formed at high shear rates However the
structure of these gels was susceptible to shear degradation Kharrat amp Vossoughi 1992
studied rheological behavior of four different gel systems and concluded that each gel
system is unique in their rheological behavior and generalization of their rheological
characterization does not seem to be warranted
2212 Gelation time
In-depth gel treatment requires gelation systems with long gelation times Gelation time is
not a limitation where near-wellbore treatments are desired but is of concern where it is
desired to have in-depth treatment to reduce cross-flow between layers (Al-Muntasheri et
al 2006 Mahto 2010) Gelation time is controlled differently for different gel systems
Chapter 2 Literature Review
10
For example the chromium redox gelling system can be used to promote long gelation time
by controlling the rate that Cr (VI) is reduced to Cr (III) In high temperature reservoirs in
situ gelation rate can be controlled using low molecular weight polyacrylamide with a low
degree of hydrolysis 1 by the rate that amide groups are auto-hydrolyzed to carboxyl
groups These groups subsequently react with chromium introduced as chromium acetate to
form gels which are stable in synthetic sea water to temperatures Gelation time is a
function of temperature and it follows the Arrhenius-type plot That is a semi-log plot of
gelation time vs inverse of absolute temperature produces a straight line In their study of
viscometric behavior of chromium (III)polyacrylamide gels Aslam et al 1984 observed
that gelation time decreased with increasing polymer concentration and also with
increasing initial sodium dichromate concentration It was also observed that gelation rate
was affected by shear rate and shear rate history Implication from the latter observation is
that extrapolation of gel time measurements obtained from viscometry to In-situ gelation
should be done at comparable shear rates More importantly shear rate dependence means
that in situ gelation may be influenced by the shear rate history which a gelling solution
experiences as it flows from mixing equipment through surface and subsurface equipment
into the reservoir Shear rate also varies in the reservoir as the gelling solution flows from
the wellbore into the formation
Figure 21 Stages of gel formation
Chapter 2 Literature Review
11
2213 Selective injectivity
It is desired for the gelling solution to enter the zone of high permeability with minimum or
no flow into the zones of low permeability Most operators prefer not to isolate zones when
injecting a gel solution into a well where several intervals may take the gel solution
Selective injectivity with the majority of the gel solution going into the high permeability
zone Simple models of polymer injection indicate that selective injection occurs only in
parallel linear displacement tests and is absent when polymer is injected into a layered
reservoir in radial flow Todd et al 1990 show that selective injection is possible for a
chromium-redox gelling system injected into a well containing three layers with different
permeabilities However the tight zones had significant permeability reduction in the
immediate vicinity of the wellbore and this would have to be removed before water could
subsequently be injected into the zones Hoefner et al 1992 presented laboratory core
flood data for parallel linear cores which showed selective penetration of chromium
xanthan gels Selective flow behavior was found to be a function of process variables such
as permeability and injection rates and was observed only over a limited range of
conditions Hoefner et al 1992 acknowledge that selective gels are not completely
excluded from the lower permeability media
2214 Syneresis
Gels normally undergo syneresis with time This causes shrinkage in gel volume and
consequently water is expelled from the gel structure It is believed that syneresis is the
result of increasing the cross-link density with time It seems that syneresis is a function of
brine salinity pH temperature and gel composition (Albonico et al 1997 Al-Muntasheri
et al 2006) Although syneresis could become a hindrance for the long-term effectiveness
of the gel placement in the fracture in pore scale it does not have significant effect
Chapter 2 Literature Review
12
2215 Dehydration
Gels dehydrate when exposed to a high pressure gradient Dehydration causes shrinkage in
gel volume and loss of water
222 Gelation mechanism of most useful polymer gel systems used for profile
modification jobs
2221 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide and chromium
(III) gel system
Chromium (III) forms a complex ion in solution and reacts by a ligand-exchange reaction
with the carboxylate or hydrolysed group on the polymer molecules to form crosslinks
resulting in a network or gel In this gelation mechanism where one Cr (III) interacts two
carboxylic groups (Jain et al 2005)
C
CH
CH2
CH
C
O
CrOO
P
P
NH2
O
O C
CH
CH2
CHCH
O
P
NH2
P
Partially Hydrolyzed Polyacrlamide + Cr (III)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
13
2222 Gelation mechanism of polyacrylamide tert-butyl acrylate (PAtBA) copolymer
with polyethyleneimine (PEI)
There is two gelation mechanism involve for polyacrylamide tert-butyl acrylate (PAtBA)
copolymer with polyethyleneimine (PEI)
First is the formation of covalent bonds between the carbonyl carbon at the ester group and
an imine nitrogen from PEI
Figure 22 Cross-linking reaction with PEI through ester carbonyl carbon
(Hardy et al 1999 Al-Muntasheri et al 2007)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
14
Second is the PEI nitrogens form covalent bonds with the carbonyl carbons at the amide
group of PAtBA through a transamidation reaction
Figure 23 Cross-linking reaction with PEI through transamidation of the amide
group (Reddy et al 2003 Al-Muntasheri et al 2007)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
15
2223 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide-hexamine-
hydroquinone gel system (Yadav and Mahto 2013)
The hexamine on hydrolysis yields formaldehyde which then combines with hydroquinone
and form 2 3 5 6 tetramethylol hydroquinone Further partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide reacts with 2 3 5 6 tetramethylol hydroquinone and forms three
dimensional networks of polymer gel the different steps of which are as follows
Step I
In the initial step hexamine hydrolyses to yield formaldehyde
N
N N+ H2O CH2 OH +
O
C
H H
Formaldehyde
Hexamine
N
6 OH 4 NH3
_ H2O
Step II
Formaldehyde produced in step-I then react with hydroquinone to form a condensed
structure known as 2 3 5 6-tetramethylolhydroquinone
+
O
C
H H
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
Hydroquinone Formaldehyde 2 3 5 6-Tetramethylol Hydroquinone
OH
OH
4
Chapter 2 Literature Review
16
Step III
The condensed molecule formed in step-II then reacts with PHPA to form the 3-
dimensional gel structure which helps in profile modification jobs
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide
Partially Hydrolized Polyacrylamide (PHPA)
Amide
O-
Na+
+
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
2 3 5 6-Tetramethylol Hydroquinone
R
R
o N
H
H
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
HO
Water
Crosslinking 3-D gel structure
Chapter 2 Literature Review
17
2224 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide-hexamine-
pyrocatechol gel system (Yadav and Mahto 2012)
The hexamine on hydrolysis yields formaldehyde which then combines with pyrocatechol
and form 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol Further partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide reacts with 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol and forms three
dimensional networks of polymer gel the different steps of which are as follows
Step I
In the initial step hexamine hydrolyses to yield formaldehyde
N
N N+ H2O CH2 OH +
O
C
H H
Formaldehyde
Hexamine
N
6 OH 4 NH3
_ H2O
Chapter 2 Literature Review
18
Step II
Formaldehyde produced in step-I then react with pyrocatechol to form a condensed
structure known as 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol
+
O
C
H H
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
Pyrocatechol Formaldehyde 3 4 5 6 Tetramethylol Pyrocatechol
OH
4OH
Step III
The condensed molecule formed in step-II then reacts with PHPA to form the 3-
dimensional gel structure which helps in profile modification jobs
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide
Partially Hydrolized Polyacrylamide (PHPA)
Amide
O-
Na+
+
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
3 4 5 6 Tetramethylol Pyrocatechol
Chapter 2 Literature Review
19
R
R
o N
H
H
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
HO
Water
Crosslinking 3-D gel structure 3-D Structure of polymer gel
23 MATHEMATICAL FLOW MODELS FOR THE RHEOLOGICAL BEHAVIOR
OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS
Several rheological models are reported in literature for the determination of rheological
behavior of polymer gel solutions (Kelessidis and Maglione 2006 Park and Song 2010)
The Bingham model is expressed as
τ = τ + kγ
Fluids that exhibit Bingham plastic behavior are characterized by a yield point (τ0) and a
plastic viscosity (μp) that is independent of the shear rate
There are several rheological models that involve three or more adjustable parameters It is
necessary to include a third parameter to describe the flow of the fluids in the upper or
lower Newtonian region as well as the Power law region The Herschel-Bulkley model
Chapter 2 Literature Review
20
corrects this deficiency by replacing the plastic viscosity term in the Bingham model with a
Power law expression as follows
τ = τ + kγ
τ ndash Shear stress Pa
τ0 ndash Yield point Pa
K ndash Consistency index Pasn
γ ndash Shear rate s-1
n ndash Flow behavior index
The parameters K and n are similar to those of power law model For fluids having a yield
stress however the calculated values of n and K will be different from those calculated
using power law model The parameter τ0 is the fluidrsquos yield stress at zero shear rate In
theory this yield stress is identical to the Bingham plastic yield point (YP) though its
calculated value is different The model is reduce to the Bingham plastic model when n=1
and reduces to the power law rheological model when τ0=0
In a general way the rheological model proposed by Mizrahi-Berk may be gives a good fit
with most of the rheograms of polymer gel systems
τ = τ + kγ
While the power index of the shear rate (n) is generally less than 1 to show a shear-thinning
behavior neither the consistency index nor yield stress from the models shows any pattern
with the solids content
A nonlinear relation exits between the shear stress and the shear rate above the yield stress
There are a number of rheological models used to describe this behavior RobertsonndashStiff
(Ohen and Bick 2011) proposed a three-parameter yield-pseudo-plastic model for relating
the shear stress to the shear rate may be used in determination of rheological behavior of
polymer gel system as follows
Chapter 2 Literature Review
21
τ = k (γ + C)
Where k C and n are model parameters The RobertsonndashStiff model includes the
Newtonian Bingham plastic and power law models as special cases
24 DEVELOPMENT OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS USING DIFFERENT
CROSS-LINKERS
Cross-linked polymers have been widely used for profile modification jobs over the last
decades (Mahto and Sharma 2010)
241 Polymers used for profile modification jobs
The most commonly used polymers are the following
2411 PolyacrylamidePartially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
These are water soluble polymer whose monomeric unit is the acrylamide molecule The
polyacrylamide has undergoes partially hydrolysis which causes anionic carboxyl group to
be scattered along the backbone chain (Wever et al 2011) The polymers are called
partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamide is between 1x106 to 8x106 The size of the molecules
about 01 to 03 micro meters By hydrolysis in a caustic water solution some of the
CONH2 group react to form carbyl group (COOH)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
22
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide Amide
O-
Na+
Figure 24 Chemical structure of partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
2412 Xanthan gum
Xanthan gum is a polysaccharide with a a-D-glucose backbone like cellulose but every
second glucose unit is attached to a triaccharide consisting of mannose glucuronic acid
and mannose The mannose closest to the backbone has an acetic acid ester on carbon 6
and the mannose at the end of the triaccharide is linked through carbons 6 and 4 to the
second carbon of pyruvic acid Xanthan gum is produced by the bacterium Xanthomonas
campestris which is found on crucifereous vegetables such as cabbage and cauliflower
The negatively charged carboxyl group on the side chains because the molecules to form
very viscous fluids when mixed with water (Chatterji and Borchardt 1981 Taylor and
Nasr-El-Din 1998)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
23
Figure 25 Chemical structure of xanthan gum (Song et al 2006)
2413 Copolymers
The main copolymers used in profile modification jobs are copolymer of acrylamide ter
polymer with N-vinyle pyrrolidone and 2-acrylamide-2-methyl-1-propanesulfonic acid
(PAAm-VP-AMPS) amphoteric copolymer polyacrylonitrile and lignin sulphonate
Table 21 Properties of polyacrylamide and xanthan gum polymers
Sl
No
Property Polyacrylamide Xanthan Gum
1 Transition Metal
Cations
Easily crosslinked Easily crosslinked
2 Shear stability Undergoes irreversible
shear degradation
Reversible shear thining
Chapter 2 Literature Review
24
3 Thermal stability Maximum use upto 225-
250 (degF)
Maximum use 160-170 (degF)
4 Hydrolytic
stability
Hydrolysis promoted by
acid or base Partially
hydrolyzed product more
sensitive to Ca+2 Mg+2
Hydrolytic de-
polymerization promoted by
acid or base especially at
high temperature
5 Oxidative
stability
Susceptible Particularly susceptible
especially at high
temperature
6 Brine tolerance Very limited especially to
Ca+2 Mg+2
Good tolerance to mono and
divalent captions
7 Microbial
degradation
Susceptible to attack by
yeast fungi bacteria
Very susceptible in aerobic
conditions
242 Cross linkers used for profile modification jobs
Crosslinkers are the chemical compound which formed stable three dimensional structures
with high molecular weight polymers like polyacrylamide and xanthan gum
The cross-linkers used in cross-linking of the high molecular weight polymers are the
following
2421 Metallic crosslinkers
The most common metallic crosslinkers are Al+3 Cr+6 Cr+3 zirconium titanium boron etc
2422 Organic crosslinkers
Two classes of organic cross-linkers namely phenolic and aldehydes are used for profile
modification jobs The different cross-linkers in the phenolic group are phenol
hydroquinone resorcinol phenyl acetate salicylic alcohol furfuryl alcohol etc In the
Chapter 2 Literature Review
25
aldehyde group main crosslinkers are formaldehyde paraformaldehyde hexamethylene
tetra mine etc
243 Emerging developments of cross linked polymer gel systems
Polymer gel systems have emerged as one of the most effective conformance solution for
controlling of excessive water production worldwide The different cross-linked polymer
gel systems are the following (Moradi 2000 Mahto and Sharma 2010)
2431 Polyacrylamide-chromium (III) gel system
The short gelation time of Cr(III)-acetatepolymer composition at elevated temperature
limit their application to reservoirs that are at relatively at lower temperatures (Sydansk and
Southwell 2000) The existing gelation characteristics of these systems have limited
control over the gelation time of the polymer solutions at elevated temperature For the
delay in gelation time at elevated temperature chromium (IV) or formaldehyde are used but
their use in the field is complicated by significant health and environmental issues At
present many organic ligands are used for their delaying power with Cr(III)polymer and
Cr(OAc)3 polymer solutions and provides outstanding control over the gelation time over
60-135degC With the use of this gelation time spanning the range from several hours to one
month or more at temperature up to 120degC The most interesting features of the ligands like
glycolate malonate and salicylate are their gelation delaying power and cost which
provides gelation delays of 12 to 33 times longer than acetate The other ligands include
oxalate citrate maleate and EDTA which are characteristic by their extremely strong Cr
(III) binding capacity and are found to block gelation entirely (Lane 1998 Jain et al
2004)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
26
2432 Polyacrylamide-chromium (IV)-thiourea gel system
The chromium (VI)-Thiourea-polyacrylamide gels form as the result of two chemical
reactions First chromium (VI) is reduced to chromium (III) by thiourea Second the
produced chromium (III) reacts with carboxylate groups on the partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide to form a crosslinked gel The pH range for the reduction of chromium (VI)
to chromium (III) by thiourea is in the range of 40 to 50 Gel times on the order of days to
weeks can be achieved which is desirable to allow proper placement of the gel system in
the formation Another option is to use chromium (III) ligands like acetate lactate or
manolate
2433 Xanthan-Cr(III) gel system
The chromium (III)-xanthan gel systems have been widely recommended for matrix
treatment because they are shear thinning inject easily and have been claimed to reheal
after shearing (Chang et al 1985 1988 Kolnes et al 1991 Liang et al 1992 Nagra et
al 1996) The initial gelation rate of xanthan-chromium gel system is inversely
proportional to the hydrogen ion concentration and is strongly affected by pH in the porous
matrix (Storm et al 1991)
2434 Acrylamide-polymerchromium (III)-carboxylate gel system
The aqous acrylamide-polymercarboxylate gels are formed by crosslinking water soluble
acrylamide polymers with a Cr(III) carboxylate complex crosslinking agent (Sydansk
1990) The water soluble acrylamide polymer can be polyacrylamide partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide or tert-polymer containing acrylamide Acrylamide-polymerCr(III)
carboxylate gels can be used for near wellbore total shutoff treatments where matrix rock is
to be treated These are stable at elevated temperatures and they are stable and rigid at
225degF at elevated temperature These new matrix of gels are functional in the presence of
high salinity water at elevated temperatures (Sydansk 1988)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
27
2435 Polyacrylamide-aluminum citrate gel system
The aluminum citrate solution form gels with anionic polyacrylamide under certain
conditions Cationic polymers do not form gels with aluminum under similar conditions
The low pH aluminum system begins crosslinking with polymer solution immediately
even before it can be injected This prevents in depth penetration of the plugging solution
Because aluminum is known to be amphoteric in aqueous solution they can crosslink at
high pH environment
2436 Polyacrylamide-polyethyleneimine gel system
These gels are rigid and non-flowing at polyacrylamide concentration of 7 and 9 These
are thermally stable at 100degC and a permeability reduction of more than 94 was realized
indicating the possibility of using this system in profile modification jobs or water shutoff
2437 KUSP1-monoethylphthalate systemKUSP1-boric acid gel system
KUSP1 is a biopolymer that is extracted from a medium after the growth of the bacterium
cellumonasflavigena It is nontoxic and exhibit viscosities on the order of 2-3 cP at 25degC
KUSP1 is soluble in alkali but forms a gel with monoethylphthalate ester and permeability
reduction by treatment with the KUSP1-MEP system is stable to brine flow for periods of
up to six months Alkaline KUSP1 can also form gel with boric acid and the gelation time
of the KUSP1-boric acid system could be regulated up to several days by selection of pH
and boric acid concentrations (Vossoughi and Buller 1991)
2438 Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine gel
system
Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine system at acidic
conditions the gelation time was short and the gel did not last for a longer period of time
Chapter 2 Literature Review
28
High viscosity is obtained at high initial values This system can be used where formation
brine contains high concentration of divalent cations (ranges from 10000 to 15000 mgl)
Iron (III) can react with the polymer and accelerated the gelation process and produce a gel
that breaks over a short periods of time (Al-Muntasheri 2007) Hence it should not be used
after acid treatment jobs especially in sandstone reservoirs as the possibility of iron
concentration is high in the well bore area which can cause premature setting of gel This
system can be used at a temperature less than 140degC (Al-Muntasheri 2007 2006 2008)
2439 Polyacrylamide-phenol-formaldehyde gel systemspolyacrylamide-resorcinol
formaldehyde gel system
Phenol-Formaldehyde polymer gels system is an attractive tool fluid shutoff or profile
modification in high temperature formations By selecting between different polymer
compositions reasonable flexibility in the gelation time can be achieved over the
temperature range from 60degC to at least 140degC (Bryant et al 1997 Mahto et al 2009
2010) Choice of polymer composition permits the control of the gelation time and the
gelants display good injectivity even when the residence time approaches the gelation time
(Zhuang et al 2000 Banerjee et al 2006) Cross-linking occurs over a wide range of pH
and is insensitive to lithology (Seright and Martin 1993 Dovan et al 1997)
24310 Polyacrylamide-hydroquinone-hexamine gel system
Hexamethylenetetramine (HMTA) undergoes hydrolysis to produce methyldiol and
ammonia Methyldiol compound is very much unstable Hence it looses water molecules to
produce formaldehyde Thus formed formaldehyde is then reacting with hydroquinone
Hydroquinone undergoes electrophilic substitution reaction to produce 2356
tetramethylol hydroquinone (intermediate) Then intermediate react with partially
hydrolyzed polyacrylamide (PHPA) polymer Hence form a large viscous molecule Hence
OHmacr in methylol group of intermediate and H+ from amide group of polymer are leaving as
Chapter 2 Literature Review
29
a water molecule while producing N-C crosslinker (Dovan et al 1997 Gwaish et al 2008
Mahto and Sheikh 2009)
Table 22 Summary of thermally stable gels
Sl
No
Polymers Crosslinkers Comments
1 Polyacrylamide low mol wt
(Bryant et al 1996)
Cr(III) Acetate 5 or more polymer
needed
2 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Lockhart and Albonico 1994)
Cr(III) Molonate Slower gelation rate
than with Cr(III)
Acetate
3 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Bryant et al 1997 1997)
Phenol and
Formaldehyde
Ligands such as
citrate oxalate
lactate stabilized the
gel
4 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Gawish et al 2008)
Hydroquinone amp
Hexamethylenetetramine
2 sodium
carbonate needed
for softening and
stability
5 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Moradi 2000)
Terephthaladehyde
dihydroxynaphthalene
HMTA etc
Stable gel
6 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer (Moradi 2000)
Phenol formaldehyde Stable gel
7 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer
(Moradi 2000)
Phenyl acetate phenyl
salicylate etc with
HMTA
Stable gel lower
toxicity than phenol
amp formaldehyde gel
8 Acrylic esteracrylic acid Polyethyleneimine Stable gel required
Chapter 2 Literature Review
30
copolymer
(Moradi 2000)
larger concentration
amp cooling at below
93degC
9 Resorcinol
(Mahto et al 2009)
Formaldehyde Water like viscosity
of gelant is plus
toxicity is a problem
10 Scleroglucan
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Stable gel the
polymer is very
expensive
11 Lignosulfate
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Expensive gel due to
high chromium
required
12 Alcaligenes biopolymer PVA
(Moradi 2000)
Na+ phenol amp aldehyde Stable gel in pH
range of 7-8 higher
concentration of
polymer and
crosslinkers needed
13 PVA-polyvinylamide copolymer
(Hoskin and Shu 1989)
Dialdehydes or
polyaldehydes
Not widely used
14 Copolymer tert butyle acylate
(Al-Muntasheri et al 2006
2007)
Polyethyleneimine
15 Partially hydrolysed
polyacrylamide (Jia et al 2010
2011)
Polyethyleneimine
Chapter 2 Literature Review
31
25 SELECTION CRITERIA OF WELLS FOR GEL TREATMENT
Polymer gels can be applied to both injection and production wells (Al-Muntasheri et al
2010 Canbolat and Parlaktuna 2012) The objective of treating injection well is to
improve vertical injection profile resulting in more efficient distribution of injected water
(avery et al 1987) The production well treatment is to improve areal efficiency and to
reduce water oil ratio by reducing water channeling in the near wellbore region
(Giangiacomo 2001 Larson et al 1999 Ghafoori et al 2008) The following criterions
for candidate selection of injection and production wells are reported in the literature
(Maghsood and Bringham 1984 Sharma et al 2009)
251 Selection criteria for injection wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Low secondary oil recovery due to poor sweep efficiency that is high degree of
reservoir heterogeneity
(b) Pre-matured water breakthrough of producing wells
(c) Evidence of direct injector to producer channeling through fractures bugs or high
matrix permeability rock
(d) High injection rate associated with low well head pressure
252 Selection criteria for production wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Recovery calculations indicate that considerable mobile oil remains that could be
recovered most cost effectively if a blocking agent could be realistically placed in the
proper location
(b) High water oil ratio (WOR) values are observed
(c) The source of excess water production is identified (ie using profiles logs or
tracers)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
32
(d) The candidate well exhibits high productivity
26 DESIGNING GEL JOB FOR OIL FIELD APPLICATION
Gel volume is to be designed for both injection and production wells
261 Injection well
When cross flow occurs between thief zone and low permeability oil bearing zone a large
volume of gel is to be injected so that gel penetrates significant distance into the thief zone
(Romero et al 2003) In case where there is no cross flow ie thief zone is separated by an
impermeable barrierlayer from oil bearing zone a small volume of gel is placed near the
wellbore (Glenat et al 1996) Gel volume can be designed in two ways one is based on
filling a portion of channel volume from injector to producer and another is based on
distance from the injection well up to which the gel is to be placed (Parez et al 2001
Sarkissian et al 2005)
262 Production well
There are no definite design criteria available for bulk volume for producing well
treatment Gels with higher polymer concentrations are used in producing well (vs
injection well) treatment because the gel has to withstand high differential pressure in the
direction of producing wellbore (Glenat et al 1996 Giangiacomo 2001) Based on field
experience the following guidelines have been given
(a) Gel volume is equivalent to the volume of fluid that the well can produce in 24 hours
in a pumped-off condition
(b) Gel volume is based on 50 feet radius and thief zone thickness 0
(c) Gel volume is based on 50-200 barrels of gel per perforated foot
Chapter 2 Literature Review
33
26 CONCLUSIONS
The conclusion of the study provided strong evidence that stable gels can be produced
under harsh environmental conditions with organic and inorganic crosslinkers which may
be used for the profile modification jobs in the oil fields These crosslinkers typically
produced gels at temperature ranges from 40 degC to 140 degC and salinity up to 60000 ppm
They are generally less toxic then chromium acetate phenol and formaldehyde croslinkers
The majority of the crosslinkers are readily available at prices not much higher than the
toxic crosslinkers
Chapter 2 Literature Review
6
The major problem associated with matured oil fields during enhanced oil oil recovery
process is channelling of injected fluid (gas and water) through high permeability zones
fractures and fracture network in the reservoir In this situation injected fluid starts to move
towards producing well and oil along with injected fluid or sometimes only injected fluid is
produced (Albonico et al 1994 Glenat et al 1996 Chauveteau et al 1997 Al-Anazi et
al 2011 Elsharafi and Bai 2012) This causes pressure energy of injected fluid being
wasted without producing the oil in the permeability zones (Krilov et al 1998 Larson et
al 1999) The breakthrough of injected fluid and production of injected fluid in the
producer well makes the enhanced oil recovery process uneconomical (Scott et al 1987
Bryant et al 1997 Thomas et al 1998 Seright et al 2001 Parez et al 2001 Sakissian et
al 2005 Ye et al 2005 2010 Chung et al 2011 Elsharafi and Bai 2012)
The above problem will be remedied if the already swept high permeable zones andor
layers could be somehow plugged so that the injected fluid is forced to re-direct itself into
the unswept regions andor unswept layers causing additional oil recovery and improving
volumetric sweep efficiency (Stavland et al 1996 Krishnan et al 2000 Pritchett et al
2003 Sydansk and Seright 2007 Liu et al 2010 Shi et al 2011 Yu et al 2011 Zhao et
al 2011)
There are several methods to control the excessive water production problems associated
with enhanced oil recovery methods (Kabir 2001 Alqam et al 2001) These include
mechanical and chemical methods
211 Mechanical methods
There are different types of mechanical methods for controlling the excessive water
production (Mohammad et al 2007) These methods works on the mechanism of coning
control via draw down reduction co-production and downhole separation simultaneous
water and oil production for coning mitigation and downhole separation and disposal Most
common and current excessive water production methods include
Chapter 2 Literature Review
7
Bridge plugs
Straddle packers
Tubing patches
Cement
Sand plugs
Expandable tubular
212 Chemical methods
The chemical methods are most suitable for reservoir related problems (Kabir 2001)
Chemical means can be applied without a rig on location making them more convenient
for the operator and less expensive (Mennella et al 2001) Unlike cement and bridge
plugs chemicals including gelling polymers can be placed deep into the formation They
form a gel that acts as a physical barrier that hinders the flow of water for a long period of
time The length of this period depends on the characteristics of the reservoir the gel and
water movement in the treated reservoir The examples include
Micro matrix cements
Polymers
Micro particle blends
Foamed systems
Resinsparticulate chemical blend
Gelsgelant
Profile modification is one of the latest techniques considered to increase the oil recovery
during EOR process (Seright 1988 Mahto et al 2009) The profile modification is process
of reducing the permeability of high permeability zones by placing the injected fluid in the
porous media making the injected fluid to flow through the low permeability zones (Gao et
Chapter 2 Literature Review
8
al 1993 Xiang 1995 Alqam et al 2001) The method comprises emplacement of a
gelant slug into the highly permeable flooded out layers of the formation close to well bore
(Chang et al 1988 1985 Ali and Barrufet 1994) The gel is designed to reduce the flow
profile and diverting injected fluid into zones of greater residual oil content (Krumrine and
Boyce 1985 Mahto 2009 Yadav and Mahto 2010)
Today polymer gel treatment is the most useful chemical method to reduce the water
production (Cai and Huang 2001) Some kind of polymer solution is injected into the
reservoir and is allowed to gel under certain conditions The gel viscosity being much
higher than the displacing fluid could impede the flow of displacing fluid through the
already flooded regions thus the displacing fluid finds new paths which means additional
oil can be displaced (Ghosh et al 2011) Polymer gel systems are typically composed of a
water soluble polymer and a cross-linking agent which are dissolved in water (Zaitoun et
al 1991) This solution is considered as a gelant solution After allowing sufficient time
the gelant sets into a semisolid mass and behaves as a flow diverting or blocking agent
(Bryant et al 1996)
Selection of a gel polymer system strongly depends on the reservoir conditions such as
temperature salinity hardness and pH of water used for the preparation of the gelant Other
parameters for the proper selection of a given gel polymer system include salinity of the
formation water permeability of the target zone and the lithology of the formation (Yan et
al 1999 He et al 2009 Urbissinova et al 2010 Ponnapati et al 2011)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
9
22 GEL PROPERTIES AND GELATION MECHANISMGEL CHEMISTRY
221 Gel properties
Gels are classified as semi-solids The water-based gels that are of interest here are highly
elastic with high water content 98 to 99 trapped in the three-dimensional polymer
structure of the gel Many systems have been developed which form gels in beaker tests
under conditions anticipated in petroleum reservoirs Through extensive testing it is
possible to determine conditions such as ranges of composition pH and temperature that
the gels are stable over long periods of time (Mahto and Maurya 2007) Stability of the gel
under reservoir conditions is one of the most important properties of the gel Some of the
important pertinent properties of the gels to their application in the profile modification are
the following (Mahto et al 2011)
2211 Rheological properties
Gels are highly elastic and their rheological properties are significantly different than those
of polymer solutions that they are made from (Al-Muntasheri et al 2007) Gels formed at
low shear rates were more viscous than gels formed at high shear rates However the
structure of these gels was susceptible to shear degradation Kharrat amp Vossoughi 1992
studied rheological behavior of four different gel systems and concluded that each gel
system is unique in their rheological behavior and generalization of their rheological
characterization does not seem to be warranted
2212 Gelation time
In-depth gel treatment requires gelation systems with long gelation times Gelation time is
not a limitation where near-wellbore treatments are desired but is of concern where it is
desired to have in-depth treatment to reduce cross-flow between layers (Al-Muntasheri et
al 2006 Mahto 2010) Gelation time is controlled differently for different gel systems
Chapter 2 Literature Review
10
For example the chromium redox gelling system can be used to promote long gelation time
by controlling the rate that Cr (VI) is reduced to Cr (III) In high temperature reservoirs in
situ gelation rate can be controlled using low molecular weight polyacrylamide with a low
degree of hydrolysis 1 by the rate that amide groups are auto-hydrolyzed to carboxyl
groups These groups subsequently react with chromium introduced as chromium acetate to
form gels which are stable in synthetic sea water to temperatures Gelation time is a
function of temperature and it follows the Arrhenius-type plot That is a semi-log plot of
gelation time vs inverse of absolute temperature produces a straight line In their study of
viscometric behavior of chromium (III)polyacrylamide gels Aslam et al 1984 observed
that gelation time decreased with increasing polymer concentration and also with
increasing initial sodium dichromate concentration It was also observed that gelation rate
was affected by shear rate and shear rate history Implication from the latter observation is
that extrapolation of gel time measurements obtained from viscometry to In-situ gelation
should be done at comparable shear rates More importantly shear rate dependence means
that in situ gelation may be influenced by the shear rate history which a gelling solution
experiences as it flows from mixing equipment through surface and subsurface equipment
into the reservoir Shear rate also varies in the reservoir as the gelling solution flows from
the wellbore into the formation
Figure 21 Stages of gel formation
Chapter 2 Literature Review
11
2213 Selective injectivity
It is desired for the gelling solution to enter the zone of high permeability with minimum or
no flow into the zones of low permeability Most operators prefer not to isolate zones when
injecting a gel solution into a well where several intervals may take the gel solution
Selective injectivity with the majority of the gel solution going into the high permeability
zone Simple models of polymer injection indicate that selective injection occurs only in
parallel linear displacement tests and is absent when polymer is injected into a layered
reservoir in radial flow Todd et al 1990 show that selective injection is possible for a
chromium-redox gelling system injected into a well containing three layers with different
permeabilities However the tight zones had significant permeability reduction in the
immediate vicinity of the wellbore and this would have to be removed before water could
subsequently be injected into the zones Hoefner et al 1992 presented laboratory core
flood data for parallel linear cores which showed selective penetration of chromium
xanthan gels Selective flow behavior was found to be a function of process variables such
as permeability and injection rates and was observed only over a limited range of
conditions Hoefner et al 1992 acknowledge that selective gels are not completely
excluded from the lower permeability media
2214 Syneresis
Gels normally undergo syneresis with time This causes shrinkage in gel volume and
consequently water is expelled from the gel structure It is believed that syneresis is the
result of increasing the cross-link density with time It seems that syneresis is a function of
brine salinity pH temperature and gel composition (Albonico et al 1997 Al-Muntasheri
et al 2006) Although syneresis could become a hindrance for the long-term effectiveness
of the gel placement in the fracture in pore scale it does not have significant effect
Chapter 2 Literature Review
12
2215 Dehydration
Gels dehydrate when exposed to a high pressure gradient Dehydration causes shrinkage in
gel volume and loss of water
222 Gelation mechanism of most useful polymer gel systems used for profile
modification jobs
2221 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide and chromium
(III) gel system
Chromium (III) forms a complex ion in solution and reacts by a ligand-exchange reaction
with the carboxylate or hydrolysed group on the polymer molecules to form crosslinks
resulting in a network or gel In this gelation mechanism where one Cr (III) interacts two
carboxylic groups (Jain et al 2005)
C
CH
CH2
CH
C
O
CrOO
P
P
NH2
O
O C
CH
CH2
CHCH
O
P
NH2
P
Partially Hydrolyzed Polyacrlamide + Cr (III)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
13
2222 Gelation mechanism of polyacrylamide tert-butyl acrylate (PAtBA) copolymer
with polyethyleneimine (PEI)
There is two gelation mechanism involve for polyacrylamide tert-butyl acrylate (PAtBA)
copolymer with polyethyleneimine (PEI)
First is the formation of covalent bonds between the carbonyl carbon at the ester group and
an imine nitrogen from PEI
Figure 22 Cross-linking reaction with PEI through ester carbonyl carbon
(Hardy et al 1999 Al-Muntasheri et al 2007)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
14
Second is the PEI nitrogens form covalent bonds with the carbonyl carbons at the amide
group of PAtBA through a transamidation reaction
Figure 23 Cross-linking reaction with PEI through transamidation of the amide
group (Reddy et al 2003 Al-Muntasheri et al 2007)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
15
2223 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide-hexamine-
hydroquinone gel system (Yadav and Mahto 2013)
The hexamine on hydrolysis yields formaldehyde which then combines with hydroquinone
and form 2 3 5 6 tetramethylol hydroquinone Further partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide reacts with 2 3 5 6 tetramethylol hydroquinone and forms three
dimensional networks of polymer gel the different steps of which are as follows
Step I
In the initial step hexamine hydrolyses to yield formaldehyde
N
N N+ H2O CH2 OH +
O
C
H H
Formaldehyde
Hexamine
N
6 OH 4 NH3
_ H2O
Step II
Formaldehyde produced in step-I then react with hydroquinone to form a condensed
structure known as 2 3 5 6-tetramethylolhydroquinone
+
O
C
H H
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
Hydroquinone Formaldehyde 2 3 5 6-Tetramethylol Hydroquinone
OH
OH
4
Chapter 2 Literature Review
16
Step III
The condensed molecule formed in step-II then reacts with PHPA to form the 3-
dimensional gel structure which helps in profile modification jobs
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide
Partially Hydrolized Polyacrylamide (PHPA)
Amide
O-
Na+
+
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
2 3 5 6-Tetramethylol Hydroquinone
R
R
o N
H
H
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
HO
Water
Crosslinking 3-D gel structure
Chapter 2 Literature Review
17
2224 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide-hexamine-
pyrocatechol gel system (Yadav and Mahto 2012)
The hexamine on hydrolysis yields formaldehyde which then combines with pyrocatechol
and form 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol Further partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide reacts with 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol and forms three
dimensional networks of polymer gel the different steps of which are as follows
Step I
In the initial step hexamine hydrolyses to yield formaldehyde
N
N N+ H2O CH2 OH +
O
C
H H
Formaldehyde
Hexamine
N
6 OH 4 NH3
_ H2O
Chapter 2 Literature Review
18
Step II
Formaldehyde produced in step-I then react with pyrocatechol to form a condensed
structure known as 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol
+
O
C
H H
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
Pyrocatechol Formaldehyde 3 4 5 6 Tetramethylol Pyrocatechol
OH
4OH
Step III
The condensed molecule formed in step-II then reacts with PHPA to form the 3-
dimensional gel structure which helps in profile modification jobs
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide
Partially Hydrolized Polyacrylamide (PHPA)
Amide
O-
Na+
+
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
3 4 5 6 Tetramethylol Pyrocatechol
Chapter 2 Literature Review
19
R
R
o N
H
H
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
HO
Water
Crosslinking 3-D gel structure 3-D Structure of polymer gel
23 MATHEMATICAL FLOW MODELS FOR THE RHEOLOGICAL BEHAVIOR
OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS
Several rheological models are reported in literature for the determination of rheological
behavior of polymer gel solutions (Kelessidis and Maglione 2006 Park and Song 2010)
The Bingham model is expressed as
τ = τ + kγ
Fluids that exhibit Bingham plastic behavior are characterized by a yield point (τ0) and a
plastic viscosity (μp) that is independent of the shear rate
There are several rheological models that involve three or more adjustable parameters It is
necessary to include a third parameter to describe the flow of the fluids in the upper or
lower Newtonian region as well as the Power law region The Herschel-Bulkley model
Chapter 2 Literature Review
20
corrects this deficiency by replacing the plastic viscosity term in the Bingham model with a
Power law expression as follows
τ = τ + kγ
τ ndash Shear stress Pa
τ0 ndash Yield point Pa
K ndash Consistency index Pasn
γ ndash Shear rate s-1
n ndash Flow behavior index
The parameters K and n are similar to those of power law model For fluids having a yield
stress however the calculated values of n and K will be different from those calculated
using power law model The parameter τ0 is the fluidrsquos yield stress at zero shear rate In
theory this yield stress is identical to the Bingham plastic yield point (YP) though its
calculated value is different The model is reduce to the Bingham plastic model when n=1
and reduces to the power law rheological model when τ0=0
In a general way the rheological model proposed by Mizrahi-Berk may be gives a good fit
with most of the rheograms of polymer gel systems
τ = τ + kγ
While the power index of the shear rate (n) is generally less than 1 to show a shear-thinning
behavior neither the consistency index nor yield stress from the models shows any pattern
with the solids content
A nonlinear relation exits between the shear stress and the shear rate above the yield stress
There are a number of rheological models used to describe this behavior RobertsonndashStiff
(Ohen and Bick 2011) proposed a three-parameter yield-pseudo-plastic model for relating
the shear stress to the shear rate may be used in determination of rheological behavior of
polymer gel system as follows
Chapter 2 Literature Review
21
τ = k (γ + C)
Where k C and n are model parameters The RobertsonndashStiff model includes the
Newtonian Bingham plastic and power law models as special cases
24 DEVELOPMENT OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS USING DIFFERENT
CROSS-LINKERS
Cross-linked polymers have been widely used for profile modification jobs over the last
decades (Mahto and Sharma 2010)
241 Polymers used for profile modification jobs
The most commonly used polymers are the following
2411 PolyacrylamidePartially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
These are water soluble polymer whose monomeric unit is the acrylamide molecule The
polyacrylamide has undergoes partially hydrolysis which causes anionic carboxyl group to
be scattered along the backbone chain (Wever et al 2011) The polymers are called
partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamide is between 1x106 to 8x106 The size of the molecules
about 01 to 03 micro meters By hydrolysis in a caustic water solution some of the
CONH2 group react to form carbyl group (COOH)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
22
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide Amide
O-
Na+
Figure 24 Chemical structure of partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
2412 Xanthan gum
Xanthan gum is a polysaccharide with a a-D-glucose backbone like cellulose but every
second glucose unit is attached to a triaccharide consisting of mannose glucuronic acid
and mannose The mannose closest to the backbone has an acetic acid ester on carbon 6
and the mannose at the end of the triaccharide is linked through carbons 6 and 4 to the
second carbon of pyruvic acid Xanthan gum is produced by the bacterium Xanthomonas
campestris which is found on crucifereous vegetables such as cabbage and cauliflower
The negatively charged carboxyl group on the side chains because the molecules to form
very viscous fluids when mixed with water (Chatterji and Borchardt 1981 Taylor and
Nasr-El-Din 1998)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
23
Figure 25 Chemical structure of xanthan gum (Song et al 2006)
2413 Copolymers
The main copolymers used in profile modification jobs are copolymer of acrylamide ter
polymer with N-vinyle pyrrolidone and 2-acrylamide-2-methyl-1-propanesulfonic acid
(PAAm-VP-AMPS) amphoteric copolymer polyacrylonitrile and lignin sulphonate
Table 21 Properties of polyacrylamide and xanthan gum polymers
Sl
No
Property Polyacrylamide Xanthan Gum
1 Transition Metal
Cations
Easily crosslinked Easily crosslinked
2 Shear stability Undergoes irreversible
shear degradation
Reversible shear thining
Chapter 2 Literature Review
24
3 Thermal stability Maximum use upto 225-
250 (degF)
Maximum use 160-170 (degF)
4 Hydrolytic
stability
Hydrolysis promoted by
acid or base Partially
hydrolyzed product more
sensitive to Ca+2 Mg+2
Hydrolytic de-
polymerization promoted by
acid or base especially at
high temperature
5 Oxidative
stability
Susceptible Particularly susceptible
especially at high
temperature
6 Brine tolerance Very limited especially to
Ca+2 Mg+2
Good tolerance to mono and
divalent captions
7 Microbial
degradation
Susceptible to attack by
yeast fungi bacteria
Very susceptible in aerobic
conditions
242 Cross linkers used for profile modification jobs
Crosslinkers are the chemical compound which formed stable three dimensional structures
with high molecular weight polymers like polyacrylamide and xanthan gum
The cross-linkers used in cross-linking of the high molecular weight polymers are the
following
2421 Metallic crosslinkers
The most common metallic crosslinkers are Al+3 Cr+6 Cr+3 zirconium titanium boron etc
2422 Organic crosslinkers
Two classes of organic cross-linkers namely phenolic and aldehydes are used for profile
modification jobs The different cross-linkers in the phenolic group are phenol
hydroquinone resorcinol phenyl acetate salicylic alcohol furfuryl alcohol etc In the
Chapter 2 Literature Review
25
aldehyde group main crosslinkers are formaldehyde paraformaldehyde hexamethylene
tetra mine etc
243 Emerging developments of cross linked polymer gel systems
Polymer gel systems have emerged as one of the most effective conformance solution for
controlling of excessive water production worldwide The different cross-linked polymer
gel systems are the following (Moradi 2000 Mahto and Sharma 2010)
2431 Polyacrylamide-chromium (III) gel system
The short gelation time of Cr(III)-acetatepolymer composition at elevated temperature
limit their application to reservoirs that are at relatively at lower temperatures (Sydansk and
Southwell 2000) The existing gelation characteristics of these systems have limited
control over the gelation time of the polymer solutions at elevated temperature For the
delay in gelation time at elevated temperature chromium (IV) or formaldehyde are used but
their use in the field is complicated by significant health and environmental issues At
present many organic ligands are used for their delaying power with Cr(III)polymer and
Cr(OAc)3 polymer solutions and provides outstanding control over the gelation time over
60-135degC With the use of this gelation time spanning the range from several hours to one
month or more at temperature up to 120degC The most interesting features of the ligands like
glycolate malonate and salicylate are their gelation delaying power and cost which
provides gelation delays of 12 to 33 times longer than acetate The other ligands include
oxalate citrate maleate and EDTA which are characteristic by their extremely strong Cr
(III) binding capacity and are found to block gelation entirely (Lane 1998 Jain et al
2004)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
26
2432 Polyacrylamide-chromium (IV)-thiourea gel system
The chromium (VI)-Thiourea-polyacrylamide gels form as the result of two chemical
reactions First chromium (VI) is reduced to chromium (III) by thiourea Second the
produced chromium (III) reacts with carboxylate groups on the partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide to form a crosslinked gel The pH range for the reduction of chromium (VI)
to chromium (III) by thiourea is in the range of 40 to 50 Gel times on the order of days to
weeks can be achieved which is desirable to allow proper placement of the gel system in
the formation Another option is to use chromium (III) ligands like acetate lactate or
manolate
2433 Xanthan-Cr(III) gel system
The chromium (III)-xanthan gel systems have been widely recommended for matrix
treatment because they are shear thinning inject easily and have been claimed to reheal
after shearing (Chang et al 1985 1988 Kolnes et al 1991 Liang et al 1992 Nagra et
al 1996) The initial gelation rate of xanthan-chromium gel system is inversely
proportional to the hydrogen ion concentration and is strongly affected by pH in the porous
matrix (Storm et al 1991)
2434 Acrylamide-polymerchromium (III)-carboxylate gel system
The aqous acrylamide-polymercarboxylate gels are formed by crosslinking water soluble
acrylamide polymers with a Cr(III) carboxylate complex crosslinking agent (Sydansk
1990) The water soluble acrylamide polymer can be polyacrylamide partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide or tert-polymer containing acrylamide Acrylamide-polymerCr(III)
carboxylate gels can be used for near wellbore total shutoff treatments where matrix rock is
to be treated These are stable at elevated temperatures and they are stable and rigid at
225degF at elevated temperature These new matrix of gels are functional in the presence of
high salinity water at elevated temperatures (Sydansk 1988)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
27
2435 Polyacrylamide-aluminum citrate gel system
The aluminum citrate solution form gels with anionic polyacrylamide under certain
conditions Cationic polymers do not form gels with aluminum under similar conditions
The low pH aluminum system begins crosslinking with polymer solution immediately
even before it can be injected This prevents in depth penetration of the plugging solution
Because aluminum is known to be amphoteric in aqueous solution they can crosslink at
high pH environment
2436 Polyacrylamide-polyethyleneimine gel system
These gels are rigid and non-flowing at polyacrylamide concentration of 7 and 9 These
are thermally stable at 100degC and a permeability reduction of more than 94 was realized
indicating the possibility of using this system in profile modification jobs or water shutoff
2437 KUSP1-monoethylphthalate systemKUSP1-boric acid gel system
KUSP1 is a biopolymer that is extracted from a medium after the growth of the bacterium
cellumonasflavigena It is nontoxic and exhibit viscosities on the order of 2-3 cP at 25degC
KUSP1 is soluble in alkali but forms a gel with monoethylphthalate ester and permeability
reduction by treatment with the KUSP1-MEP system is stable to brine flow for periods of
up to six months Alkaline KUSP1 can also form gel with boric acid and the gelation time
of the KUSP1-boric acid system could be regulated up to several days by selection of pH
and boric acid concentrations (Vossoughi and Buller 1991)
2438 Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine gel
system
Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine system at acidic
conditions the gelation time was short and the gel did not last for a longer period of time
Chapter 2 Literature Review
28
High viscosity is obtained at high initial values This system can be used where formation
brine contains high concentration of divalent cations (ranges from 10000 to 15000 mgl)
Iron (III) can react with the polymer and accelerated the gelation process and produce a gel
that breaks over a short periods of time (Al-Muntasheri 2007) Hence it should not be used
after acid treatment jobs especially in sandstone reservoirs as the possibility of iron
concentration is high in the well bore area which can cause premature setting of gel This
system can be used at a temperature less than 140degC (Al-Muntasheri 2007 2006 2008)
2439 Polyacrylamide-phenol-formaldehyde gel systemspolyacrylamide-resorcinol
formaldehyde gel system
Phenol-Formaldehyde polymer gels system is an attractive tool fluid shutoff or profile
modification in high temperature formations By selecting between different polymer
compositions reasonable flexibility in the gelation time can be achieved over the
temperature range from 60degC to at least 140degC (Bryant et al 1997 Mahto et al 2009
2010) Choice of polymer composition permits the control of the gelation time and the
gelants display good injectivity even when the residence time approaches the gelation time
(Zhuang et al 2000 Banerjee et al 2006) Cross-linking occurs over a wide range of pH
and is insensitive to lithology (Seright and Martin 1993 Dovan et al 1997)
24310 Polyacrylamide-hydroquinone-hexamine gel system
Hexamethylenetetramine (HMTA) undergoes hydrolysis to produce methyldiol and
ammonia Methyldiol compound is very much unstable Hence it looses water molecules to
produce formaldehyde Thus formed formaldehyde is then reacting with hydroquinone
Hydroquinone undergoes electrophilic substitution reaction to produce 2356
tetramethylol hydroquinone (intermediate) Then intermediate react with partially
hydrolyzed polyacrylamide (PHPA) polymer Hence form a large viscous molecule Hence
OHmacr in methylol group of intermediate and H+ from amide group of polymer are leaving as
Chapter 2 Literature Review
29
a water molecule while producing N-C crosslinker (Dovan et al 1997 Gwaish et al 2008
Mahto and Sheikh 2009)
Table 22 Summary of thermally stable gels
Sl
No
Polymers Crosslinkers Comments
1 Polyacrylamide low mol wt
(Bryant et al 1996)
Cr(III) Acetate 5 or more polymer
needed
2 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Lockhart and Albonico 1994)
Cr(III) Molonate Slower gelation rate
than with Cr(III)
Acetate
3 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Bryant et al 1997 1997)
Phenol and
Formaldehyde
Ligands such as
citrate oxalate
lactate stabilized the
gel
4 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Gawish et al 2008)
Hydroquinone amp
Hexamethylenetetramine
2 sodium
carbonate needed
for softening and
stability
5 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Moradi 2000)
Terephthaladehyde
dihydroxynaphthalene
HMTA etc
Stable gel
6 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer (Moradi 2000)
Phenol formaldehyde Stable gel
7 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer
(Moradi 2000)
Phenyl acetate phenyl
salicylate etc with
HMTA
Stable gel lower
toxicity than phenol
amp formaldehyde gel
8 Acrylic esteracrylic acid Polyethyleneimine Stable gel required
Chapter 2 Literature Review
30
copolymer
(Moradi 2000)
larger concentration
amp cooling at below
93degC
9 Resorcinol
(Mahto et al 2009)
Formaldehyde Water like viscosity
of gelant is plus
toxicity is a problem
10 Scleroglucan
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Stable gel the
polymer is very
expensive
11 Lignosulfate
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Expensive gel due to
high chromium
required
12 Alcaligenes biopolymer PVA
(Moradi 2000)
Na+ phenol amp aldehyde Stable gel in pH
range of 7-8 higher
concentration of
polymer and
crosslinkers needed
13 PVA-polyvinylamide copolymer
(Hoskin and Shu 1989)
Dialdehydes or
polyaldehydes
Not widely used
14 Copolymer tert butyle acylate
(Al-Muntasheri et al 2006
2007)
Polyethyleneimine
15 Partially hydrolysed
polyacrylamide (Jia et al 2010
2011)
Polyethyleneimine
Chapter 2 Literature Review
31
25 SELECTION CRITERIA OF WELLS FOR GEL TREATMENT
Polymer gels can be applied to both injection and production wells (Al-Muntasheri et al
2010 Canbolat and Parlaktuna 2012) The objective of treating injection well is to
improve vertical injection profile resulting in more efficient distribution of injected water
(avery et al 1987) The production well treatment is to improve areal efficiency and to
reduce water oil ratio by reducing water channeling in the near wellbore region
(Giangiacomo 2001 Larson et al 1999 Ghafoori et al 2008) The following criterions
for candidate selection of injection and production wells are reported in the literature
(Maghsood and Bringham 1984 Sharma et al 2009)
251 Selection criteria for injection wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Low secondary oil recovery due to poor sweep efficiency that is high degree of
reservoir heterogeneity
(b) Pre-matured water breakthrough of producing wells
(c) Evidence of direct injector to producer channeling through fractures bugs or high
matrix permeability rock
(d) High injection rate associated with low well head pressure
252 Selection criteria for production wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Recovery calculations indicate that considerable mobile oil remains that could be
recovered most cost effectively if a blocking agent could be realistically placed in the
proper location
(b) High water oil ratio (WOR) values are observed
(c) The source of excess water production is identified (ie using profiles logs or
tracers)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
32
(d) The candidate well exhibits high productivity
26 DESIGNING GEL JOB FOR OIL FIELD APPLICATION
Gel volume is to be designed for both injection and production wells
261 Injection well
When cross flow occurs between thief zone and low permeability oil bearing zone a large
volume of gel is to be injected so that gel penetrates significant distance into the thief zone
(Romero et al 2003) In case where there is no cross flow ie thief zone is separated by an
impermeable barrierlayer from oil bearing zone a small volume of gel is placed near the
wellbore (Glenat et al 1996) Gel volume can be designed in two ways one is based on
filling a portion of channel volume from injector to producer and another is based on
distance from the injection well up to which the gel is to be placed (Parez et al 2001
Sarkissian et al 2005)
262 Production well
There are no definite design criteria available for bulk volume for producing well
treatment Gels with higher polymer concentrations are used in producing well (vs
injection well) treatment because the gel has to withstand high differential pressure in the
direction of producing wellbore (Glenat et al 1996 Giangiacomo 2001) Based on field
experience the following guidelines have been given
(a) Gel volume is equivalent to the volume of fluid that the well can produce in 24 hours
in a pumped-off condition
(b) Gel volume is based on 50 feet radius and thief zone thickness 0
(c) Gel volume is based on 50-200 barrels of gel per perforated foot
Chapter 2 Literature Review
33
26 CONCLUSIONS
The conclusion of the study provided strong evidence that stable gels can be produced
under harsh environmental conditions with organic and inorganic crosslinkers which may
be used for the profile modification jobs in the oil fields These crosslinkers typically
produced gels at temperature ranges from 40 degC to 140 degC and salinity up to 60000 ppm
They are generally less toxic then chromium acetate phenol and formaldehyde croslinkers
The majority of the crosslinkers are readily available at prices not much higher than the
toxic crosslinkers
Chapter 2 Literature Review
7
Bridge plugs
Straddle packers
Tubing patches
Cement
Sand plugs
Expandable tubular
212 Chemical methods
The chemical methods are most suitable for reservoir related problems (Kabir 2001)
Chemical means can be applied without a rig on location making them more convenient
for the operator and less expensive (Mennella et al 2001) Unlike cement and bridge
plugs chemicals including gelling polymers can be placed deep into the formation They
form a gel that acts as a physical barrier that hinders the flow of water for a long period of
time The length of this period depends on the characteristics of the reservoir the gel and
water movement in the treated reservoir The examples include
Micro matrix cements
Polymers
Micro particle blends
Foamed systems
Resinsparticulate chemical blend
Gelsgelant
Profile modification is one of the latest techniques considered to increase the oil recovery
during EOR process (Seright 1988 Mahto et al 2009) The profile modification is process
of reducing the permeability of high permeability zones by placing the injected fluid in the
porous media making the injected fluid to flow through the low permeability zones (Gao et
Chapter 2 Literature Review
8
al 1993 Xiang 1995 Alqam et al 2001) The method comprises emplacement of a
gelant slug into the highly permeable flooded out layers of the formation close to well bore
(Chang et al 1988 1985 Ali and Barrufet 1994) The gel is designed to reduce the flow
profile and diverting injected fluid into zones of greater residual oil content (Krumrine and
Boyce 1985 Mahto 2009 Yadav and Mahto 2010)
Today polymer gel treatment is the most useful chemical method to reduce the water
production (Cai and Huang 2001) Some kind of polymer solution is injected into the
reservoir and is allowed to gel under certain conditions The gel viscosity being much
higher than the displacing fluid could impede the flow of displacing fluid through the
already flooded regions thus the displacing fluid finds new paths which means additional
oil can be displaced (Ghosh et al 2011) Polymer gel systems are typically composed of a
water soluble polymer and a cross-linking agent which are dissolved in water (Zaitoun et
al 1991) This solution is considered as a gelant solution After allowing sufficient time
the gelant sets into a semisolid mass and behaves as a flow diverting or blocking agent
(Bryant et al 1996)
Selection of a gel polymer system strongly depends on the reservoir conditions such as
temperature salinity hardness and pH of water used for the preparation of the gelant Other
parameters for the proper selection of a given gel polymer system include salinity of the
formation water permeability of the target zone and the lithology of the formation (Yan et
al 1999 He et al 2009 Urbissinova et al 2010 Ponnapati et al 2011)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
9
22 GEL PROPERTIES AND GELATION MECHANISMGEL CHEMISTRY
221 Gel properties
Gels are classified as semi-solids The water-based gels that are of interest here are highly
elastic with high water content 98 to 99 trapped in the three-dimensional polymer
structure of the gel Many systems have been developed which form gels in beaker tests
under conditions anticipated in petroleum reservoirs Through extensive testing it is
possible to determine conditions such as ranges of composition pH and temperature that
the gels are stable over long periods of time (Mahto and Maurya 2007) Stability of the gel
under reservoir conditions is one of the most important properties of the gel Some of the
important pertinent properties of the gels to their application in the profile modification are
the following (Mahto et al 2011)
2211 Rheological properties
Gels are highly elastic and their rheological properties are significantly different than those
of polymer solutions that they are made from (Al-Muntasheri et al 2007) Gels formed at
low shear rates were more viscous than gels formed at high shear rates However the
structure of these gels was susceptible to shear degradation Kharrat amp Vossoughi 1992
studied rheological behavior of four different gel systems and concluded that each gel
system is unique in their rheological behavior and generalization of their rheological
characterization does not seem to be warranted
2212 Gelation time
In-depth gel treatment requires gelation systems with long gelation times Gelation time is
not a limitation where near-wellbore treatments are desired but is of concern where it is
desired to have in-depth treatment to reduce cross-flow between layers (Al-Muntasheri et
al 2006 Mahto 2010) Gelation time is controlled differently for different gel systems
Chapter 2 Literature Review
10
For example the chromium redox gelling system can be used to promote long gelation time
by controlling the rate that Cr (VI) is reduced to Cr (III) In high temperature reservoirs in
situ gelation rate can be controlled using low molecular weight polyacrylamide with a low
degree of hydrolysis 1 by the rate that amide groups are auto-hydrolyzed to carboxyl
groups These groups subsequently react with chromium introduced as chromium acetate to
form gels which are stable in synthetic sea water to temperatures Gelation time is a
function of temperature and it follows the Arrhenius-type plot That is a semi-log plot of
gelation time vs inverse of absolute temperature produces a straight line In their study of
viscometric behavior of chromium (III)polyacrylamide gels Aslam et al 1984 observed
that gelation time decreased with increasing polymer concentration and also with
increasing initial sodium dichromate concentration It was also observed that gelation rate
was affected by shear rate and shear rate history Implication from the latter observation is
that extrapolation of gel time measurements obtained from viscometry to In-situ gelation
should be done at comparable shear rates More importantly shear rate dependence means
that in situ gelation may be influenced by the shear rate history which a gelling solution
experiences as it flows from mixing equipment through surface and subsurface equipment
into the reservoir Shear rate also varies in the reservoir as the gelling solution flows from
the wellbore into the formation
Figure 21 Stages of gel formation
Chapter 2 Literature Review
11
2213 Selective injectivity
It is desired for the gelling solution to enter the zone of high permeability with minimum or
no flow into the zones of low permeability Most operators prefer not to isolate zones when
injecting a gel solution into a well where several intervals may take the gel solution
Selective injectivity with the majority of the gel solution going into the high permeability
zone Simple models of polymer injection indicate that selective injection occurs only in
parallel linear displacement tests and is absent when polymer is injected into a layered
reservoir in radial flow Todd et al 1990 show that selective injection is possible for a
chromium-redox gelling system injected into a well containing three layers with different
permeabilities However the tight zones had significant permeability reduction in the
immediate vicinity of the wellbore and this would have to be removed before water could
subsequently be injected into the zones Hoefner et al 1992 presented laboratory core
flood data for parallel linear cores which showed selective penetration of chromium
xanthan gels Selective flow behavior was found to be a function of process variables such
as permeability and injection rates and was observed only over a limited range of
conditions Hoefner et al 1992 acknowledge that selective gels are not completely
excluded from the lower permeability media
2214 Syneresis
Gels normally undergo syneresis with time This causes shrinkage in gel volume and
consequently water is expelled from the gel structure It is believed that syneresis is the
result of increasing the cross-link density with time It seems that syneresis is a function of
brine salinity pH temperature and gel composition (Albonico et al 1997 Al-Muntasheri
et al 2006) Although syneresis could become a hindrance for the long-term effectiveness
of the gel placement in the fracture in pore scale it does not have significant effect
Chapter 2 Literature Review
12
2215 Dehydration
Gels dehydrate when exposed to a high pressure gradient Dehydration causes shrinkage in
gel volume and loss of water
222 Gelation mechanism of most useful polymer gel systems used for profile
modification jobs
2221 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide and chromium
(III) gel system
Chromium (III) forms a complex ion in solution and reacts by a ligand-exchange reaction
with the carboxylate or hydrolysed group on the polymer molecules to form crosslinks
resulting in a network or gel In this gelation mechanism where one Cr (III) interacts two
carboxylic groups (Jain et al 2005)
C
CH
CH2
CH
C
O
CrOO
P
P
NH2
O
O C
CH
CH2
CHCH
O
P
NH2
P
Partially Hydrolyzed Polyacrlamide + Cr (III)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
13
2222 Gelation mechanism of polyacrylamide tert-butyl acrylate (PAtBA) copolymer
with polyethyleneimine (PEI)
There is two gelation mechanism involve for polyacrylamide tert-butyl acrylate (PAtBA)
copolymer with polyethyleneimine (PEI)
First is the formation of covalent bonds between the carbonyl carbon at the ester group and
an imine nitrogen from PEI
Figure 22 Cross-linking reaction with PEI through ester carbonyl carbon
(Hardy et al 1999 Al-Muntasheri et al 2007)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
14
Second is the PEI nitrogens form covalent bonds with the carbonyl carbons at the amide
group of PAtBA through a transamidation reaction
Figure 23 Cross-linking reaction with PEI through transamidation of the amide
group (Reddy et al 2003 Al-Muntasheri et al 2007)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
15
2223 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide-hexamine-
hydroquinone gel system (Yadav and Mahto 2013)
The hexamine on hydrolysis yields formaldehyde which then combines with hydroquinone
and form 2 3 5 6 tetramethylol hydroquinone Further partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide reacts with 2 3 5 6 tetramethylol hydroquinone and forms three
dimensional networks of polymer gel the different steps of which are as follows
Step I
In the initial step hexamine hydrolyses to yield formaldehyde
N
N N+ H2O CH2 OH +
O
C
H H
Formaldehyde
Hexamine
N
6 OH 4 NH3
_ H2O
Step II
Formaldehyde produced in step-I then react with hydroquinone to form a condensed
structure known as 2 3 5 6-tetramethylolhydroquinone
+
O
C
H H
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
Hydroquinone Formaldehyde 2 3 5 6-Tetramethylol Hydroquinone
OH
OH
4
Chapter 2 Literature Review
16
Step III
The condensed molecule formed in step-II then reacts with PHPA to form the 3-
dimensional gel structure which helps in profile modification jobs
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide
Partially Hydrolized Polyacrylamide (PHPA)
Amide
O-
Na+
+
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
2 3 5 6-Tetramethylol Hydroquinone
R
R
o N
H
H
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
HO
Water
Crosslinking 3-D gel structure
Chapter 2 Literature Review
17
2224 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide-hexamine-
pyrocatechol gel system (Yadav and Mahto 2012)
The hexamine on hydrolysis yields formaldehyde which then combines with pyrocatechol
and form 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol Further partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide reacts with 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol and forms three
dimensional networks of polymer gel the different steps of which are as follows
Step I
In the initial step hexamine hydrolyses to yield formaldehyde
N
N N+ H2O CH2 OH +
O
C
H H
Formaldehyde
Hexamine
N
6 OH 4 NH3
_ H2O
Chapter 2 Literature Review
18
Step II
Formaldehyde produced in step-I then react with pyrocatechol to form a condensed
structure known as 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol
+
O
C
H H
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
Pyrocatechol Formaldehyde 3 4 5 6 Tetramethylol Pyrocatechol
OH
4OH
Step III
The condensed molecule formed in step-II then reacts with PHPA to form the 3-
dimensional gel structure which helps in profile modification jobs
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide
Partially Hydrolized Polyacrylamide (PHPA)
Amide
O-
Na+
+
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
3 4 5 6 Tetramethylol Pyrocatechol
Chapter 2 Literature Review
19
R
R
o N
H
H
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
HO
Water
Crosslinking 3-D gel structure 3-D Structure of polymer gel
23 MATHEMATICAL FLOW MODELS FOR THE RHEOLOGICAL BEHAVIOR
OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS
Several rheological models are reported in literature for the determination of rheological
behavior of polymer gel solutions (Kelessidis and Maglione 2006 Park and Song 2010)
The Bingham model is expressed as
τ = τ + kγ
Fluids that exhibit Bingham plastic behavior are characterized by a yield point (τ0) and a
plastic viscosity (μp) that is independent of the shear rate
There are several rheological models that involve three or more adjustable parameters It is
necessary to include a third parameter to describe the flow of the fluids in the upper or
lower Newtonian region as well as the Power law region The Herschel-Bulkley model
Chapter 2 Literature Review
20
corrects this deficiency by replacing the plastic viscosity term in the Bingham model with a
Power law expression as follows
τ = τ + kγ
τ ndash Shear stress Pa
τ0 ndash Yield point Pa
K ndash Consistency index Pasn
γ ndash Shear rate s-1
n ndash Flow behavior index
The parameters K and n are similar to those of power law model For fluids having a yield
stress however the calculated values of n and K will be different from those calculated
using power law model The parameter τ0 is the fluidrsquos yield stress at zero shear rate In
theory this yield stress is identical to the Bingham plastic yield point (YP) though its
calculated value is different The model is reduce to the Bingham plastic model when n=1
and reduces to the power law rheological model when τ0=0
In a general way the rheological model proposed by Mizrahi-Berk may be gives a good fit
with most of the rheograms of polymer gel systems
τ = τ + kγ
While the power index of the shear rate (n) is generally less than 1 to show a shear-thinning
behavior neither the consistency index nor yield stress from the models shows any pattern
with the solids content
A nonlinear relation exits between the shear stress and the shear rate above the yield stress
There are a number of rheological models used to describe this behavior RobertsonndashStiff
(Ohen and Bick 2011) proposed a three-parameter yield-pseudo-plastic model for relating
the shear stress to the shear rate may be used in determination of rheological behavior of
polymer gel system as follows
Chapter 2 Literature Review
21
τ = k (γ + C)
Where k C and n are model parameters The RobertsonndashStiff model includes the
Newtonian Bingham plastic and power law models as special cases
24 DEVELOPMENT OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS USING DIFFERENT
CROSS-LINKERS
Cross-linked polymers have been widely used for profile modification jobs over the last
decades (Mahto and Sharma 2010)
241 Polymers used for profile modification jobs
The most commonly used polymers are the following
2411 PolyacrylamidePartially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
These are water soluble polymer whose monomeric unit is the acrylamide molecule The
polyacrylamide has undergoes partially hydrolysis which causes anionic carboxyl group to
be scattered along the backbone chain (Wever et al 2011) The polymers are called
partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamide is between 1x106 to 8x106 The size of the molecules
about 01 to 03 micro meters By hydrolysis in a caustic water solution some of the
CONH2 group react to form carbyl group (COOH)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
22
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide Amide
O-
Na+
Figure 24 Chemical structure of partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
2412 Xanthan gum
Xanthan gum is a polysaccharide with a a-D-glucose backbone like cellulose but every
second glucose unit is attached to a triaccharide consisting of mannose glucuronic acid
and mannose The mannose closest to the backbone has an acetic acid ester on carbon 6
and the mannose at the end of the triaccharide is linked through carbons 6 and 4 to the
second carbon of pyruvic acid Xanthan gum is produced by the bacterium Xanthomonas
campestris which is found on crucifereous vegetables such as cabbage and cauliflower
The negatively charged carboxyl group on the side chains because the molecules to form
very viscous fluids when mixed with water (Chatterji and Borchardt 1981 Taylor and
Nasr-El-Din 1998)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
23
Figure 25 Chemical structure of xanthan gum (Song et al 2006)
2413 Copolymers
The main copolymers used in profile modification jobs are copolymer of acrylamide ter
polymer with N-vinyle pyrrolidone and 2-acrylamide-2-methyl-1-propanesulfonic acid
(PAAm-VP-AMPS) amphoteric copolymer polyacrylonitrile and lignin sulphonate
Table 21 Properties of polyacrylamide and xanthan gum polymers
Sl
No
Property Polyacrylamide Xanthan Gum
1 Transition Metal
Cations
Easily crosslinked Easily crosslinked
2 Shear stability Undergoes irreversible
shear degradation
Reversible shear thining
Chapter 2 Literature Review
24
3 Thermal stability Maximum use upto 225-
250 (degF)
Maximum use 160-170 (degF)
4 Hydrolytic
stability
Hydrolysis promoted by
acid or base Partially
hydrolyzed product more
sensitive to Ca+2 Mg+2
Hydrolytic de-
polymerization promoted by
acid or base especially at
high temperature
5 Oxidative
stability
Susceptible Particularly susceptible
especially at high
temperature
6 Brine tolerance Very limited especially to
Ca+2 Mg+2
Good tolerance to mono and
divalent captions
7 Microbial
degradation
Susceptible to attack by
yeast fungi bacteria
Very susceptible in aerobic
conditions
242 Cross linkers used for profile modification jobs
Crosslinkers are the chemical compound which formed stable three dimensional structures
with high molecular weight polymers like polyacrylamide and xanthan gum
The cross-linkers used in cross-linking of the high molecular weight polymers are the
following
2421 Metallic crosslinkers
The most common metallic crosslinkers are Al+3 Cr+6 Cr+3 zirconium titanium boron etc
2422 Organic crosslinkers
Two classes of organic cross-linkers namely phenolic and aldehydes are used for profile
modification jobs The different cross-linkers in the phenolic group are phenol
hydroquinone resorcinol phenyl acetate salicylic alcohol furfuryl alcohol etc In the
Chapter 2 Literature Review
25
aldehyde group main crosslinkers are formaldehyde paraformaldehyde hexamethylene
tetra mine etc
243 Emerging developments of cross linked polymer gel systems
Polymer gel systems have emerged as one of the most effective conformance solution for
controlling of excessive water production worldwide The different cross-linked polymer
gel systems are the following (Moradi 2000 Mahto and Sharma 2010)
2431 Polyacrylamide-chromium (III) gel system
The short gelation time of Cr(III)-acetatepolymer composition at elevated temperature
limit their application to reservoirs that are at relatively at lower temperatures (Sydansk and
Southwell 2000) The existing gelation characteristics of these systems have limited
control over the gelation time of the polymer solutions at elevated temperature For the
delay in gelation time at elevated temperature chromium (IV) or formaldehyde are used but
their use in the field is complicated by significant health and environmental issues At
present many organic ligands are used for their delaying power with Cr(III)polymer and
Cr(OAc)3 polymer solutions and provides outstanding control over the gelation time over
60-135degC With the use of this gelation time spanning the range from several hours to one
month or more at temperature up to 120degC The most interesting features of the ligands like
glycolate malonate and salicylate are their gelation delaying power and cost which
provides gelation delays of 12 to 33 times longer than acetate The other ligands include
oxalate citrate maleate and EDTA which are characteristic by their extremely strong Cr
(III) binding capacity and are found to block gelation entirely (Lane 1998 Jain et al
2004)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
26
2432 Polyacrylamide-chromium (IV)-thiourea gel system
The chromium (VI)-Thiourea-polyacrylamide gels form as the result of two chemical
reactions First chromium (VI) is reduced to chromium (III) by thiourea Second the
produced chromium (III) reacts with carboxylate groups on the partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide to form a crosslinked gel The pH range for the reduction of chromium (VI)
to chromium (III) by thiourea is in the range of 40 to 50 Gel times on the order of days to
weeks can be achieved which is desirable to allow proper placement of the gel system in
the formation Another option is to use chromium (III) ligands like acetate lactate or
manolate
2433 Xanthan-Cr(III) gel system
The chromium (III)-xanthan gel systems have been widely recommended for matrix
treatment because they are shear thinning inject easily and have been claimed to reheal
after shearing (Chang et al 1985 1988 Kolnes et al 1991 Liang et al 1992 Nagra et
al 1996) The initial gelation rate of xanthan-chromium gel system is inversely
proportional to the hydrogen ion concentration and is strongly affected by pH in the porous
matrix (Storm et al 1991)
2434 Acrylamide-polymerchromium (III)-carboxylate gel system
The aqous acrylamide-polymercarboxylate gels are formed by crosslinking water soluble
acrylamide polymers with a Cr(III) carboxylate complex crosslinking agent (Sydansk
1990) The water soluble acrylamide polymer can be polyacrylamide partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide or tert-polymer containing acrylamide Acrylamide-polymerCr(III)
carboxylate gels can be used for near wellbore total shutoff treatments where matrix rock is
to be treated These are stable at elevated temperatures and they are stable and rigid at
225degF at elevated temperature These new matrix of gels are functional in the presence of
high salinity water at elevated temperatures (Sydansk 1988)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
27
2435 Polyacrylamide-aluminum citrate gel system
The aluminum citrate solution form gels with anionic polyacrylamide under certain
conditions Cationic polymers do not form gels with aluminum under similar conditions
The low pH aluminum system begins crosslinking with polymer solution immediately
even before it can be injected This prevents in depth penetration of the plugging solution
Because aluminum is known to be amphoteric in aqueous solution they can crosslink at
high pH environment
2436 Polyacrylamide-polyethyleneimine gel system
These gels are rigid and non-flowing at polyacrylamide concentration of 7 and 9 These
are thermally stable at 100degC and a permeability reduction of more than 94 was realized
indicating the possibility of using this system in profile modification jobs or water shutoff
2437 KUSP1-monoethylphthalate systemKUSP1-boric acid gel system
KUSP1 is a biopolymer that is extracted from a medium after the growth of the bacterium
cellumonasflavigena It is nontoxic and exhibit viscosities on the order of 2-3 cP at 25degC
KUSP1 is soluble in alkali but forms a gel with monoethylphthalate ester and permeability
reduction by treatment with the KUSP1-MEP system is stable to brine flow for periods of
up to six months Alkaline KUSP1 can also form gel with boric acid and the gelation time
of the KUSP1-boric acid system could be regulated up to several days by selection of pH
and boric acid concentrations (Vossoughi and Buller 1991)
2438 Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine gel
system
Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine system at acidic
conditions the gelation time was short and the gel did not last for a longer period of time
Chapter 2 Literature Review
28
High viscosity is obtained at high initial values This system can be used where formation
brine contains high concentration of divalent cations (ranges from 10000 to 15000 mgl)
Iron (III) can react with the polymer and accelerated the gelation process and produce a gel
that breaks over a short periods of time (Al-Muntasheri 2007) Hence it should not be used
after acid treatment jobs especially in sandstone reservoirs as the possibility of iron
concentration is high in the well bore area which can cause premature setting of gel This
system can be used at a temperature less than 140degC (Al-Muntasheri 2007 2006 2008)
2439 Polyacrylamide-phenol-formaldehyde gel systemspolyacrylamide-resorcinol
formaldehyde gel system
Phenol-Formaldehyde polymer gels system is an attractive tool fluid shutoff or profile
modification in high temperature formations By selecting between different polymer
compositions reasonable flexibility in the gelation time can be achieved over the
temperature range from 60degC to at least 140degC (Bryant et al 1997 Mahto et al 2009
2010) Choice of polymer composition permits the control of the gelation time and the
gelants display good injectivity even when the residence time approaches the gelation time
(Zhuang et al 2000 Banerjee et al 2006) Cross-linking occurs over a wide range of pH
and is insensitive to lithology (Seright and Martin 1993 Dovan et al 1997)
24310 Polyacrylamide-hydroquinone-hexamine gel system
Hexamethylenetetramine (HMTA) undergoes hydrolysis to produce methyldiol and
ammonia Methyldiol compound is very much unstable Hence it looses water molecules to
produce formaldehyde Thus formed formaldehyde is then reacting with hydroquinone
Hydroquinone undergoes electrophilic substitution reaction to produce 2356
tetramethylol hydroquinone (intermediate) Then intermediate react with partially
hydrolyzed polyacrylamide (PHPA) polymer Hence form a large viscous molecule Hence
OHmacr in methylol group of intermediate and H+ from amide group of polymer are leaving as
Chapter 2 Literature Review
29
a water molecule while producing N-C crosslinker (Dovan et al 1997 Gwaish et al 2008
Mahto and Sheikh 2009)
Table 22 Summary of thermally stable gels
Sl
No
Polymers Crosslinkers Comments
1 Polyacrylamide low mol wt
(Bryant et al 1996)
Cr(III) Acetate 5 or more polymer
needed
2 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Lockhart and Albonico 1994)
Cr(III) Molonate Slower gelation rate
than with Cr(III)
Acetate
3 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Bryant et al 1997 1997)
Phenol and
Formaldehyde
Ligands such as
citrate oxalate
lactate stabilized the
gel
4 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Gawish et al 2008)
Hydroquinone amp
Hexamethylenetetramine
2 sodium
carbonate needed
for softening and
stability
5 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Moradi 2000)
Terephthaladehyde
dihydroxynaphthalene
HMTA etc
Stable gel
6 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer (Moradi 2000)
Phenol formaldehyde Stable gel
7 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer
(Moradi 2000)
Phenyl acetate phenyl
salicylate etc with
HMTA
Stable gel lower
toxicity than phenol
amp formaldehyde gel
8 Acrylic esteracrylic acid Polyethyleneimine Stable gel required
Chapter 2 Literature Review
30
copolymer
(Moradi 2000)
larger concentration
amp cooling at below
93degC
9 Resorcinol
(Mahto et al 2009)
Formaldehyde Water like viscosity
of gelant is plus
toxicity is a problem
10 Scleroglucan
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Stable gel the
polymer is very
expensive
11 Lignosulfate
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Expensive gel due to
high chromium
required
12 Alcaligenes biopolymer PVA
(Moradi 2000)
Na+ phenol amp aldehyde Stable gel in pH
range of 7-8 higher
concentration of
polymer and
crosslinkers needed
13 PVA-polyvinylamide copolymer
(Hoskin and Shu 1989)
Dialdehydes or
polyaldehydes
Not widely used
14 Copolymer tert butyle acylate
(Al-Muntasheri et al 2006
2007)
Polyethyleneimine
15 Partially hydrolysed
polyacrylamide (Jia et al 2010
2011)
Polyethyleneimine
Chapter 2 Literature Review
31
25 SELECTION CRITERIA OF WELLS FOR GEL TREATMENT
Polymer gels can be applied to both injection and production wells (Al-Muntasheri et al
2010 Canbolat and Parlaktuna 2012) The objective of treating injection well is to
improve vertical injection profile resulting in more efficient distribution of injected water
(avery et al 1987) The production well treatment is to improve areal efficiency and to
reduce water oil ratio by reducing water channeling in the near wellbore region
(Giangiacomo 2001 Larson et al 1999 Ghafoori et al 2008) The following criterions
for candidate selection of injection and production wells are reported in the literature
(Maghsood and Bringham 1984 Sharma et al 2009)
251 Selection criteria for injection wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Low secondary oil recovery due to poor sweep efficiency that is high degree of
reservoir heterogeneity
(b) Pre-matured water breakthrough of producing wells
(c) Evidence of direct injector to producer channeling through fractures bugs or high
matrix permeability rock
(d) High injection rate associated with low well head pressure
252 Selection criteria for production wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Recovery calculations indicate that considerable mobile oil remains that could be
recovered most cost effectively if a blocking agent could be realistically placed in the
proper location
(b) High water oil ratio (WOR) values are observed
(c) The source of excess water production is identified (ie using profiles logs or
tracers)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
32
(d) The candidate well exhibits high productivity
26 DESIGNING GEL JOB FOR OIL FIELD APPLICATION
Gel volume is to be designed for both injection and production wells
261 Injection well
When cross flow occurs between thief zone and low permeability oil bearing zone a large
volume of gel is to be injected so that gel penetrates significant distance into the thief zone
(Romero et al 2003) In case where there is no cross flow ie thief zone is separated by an
impermeable barrierlayer from oil bearing zone a small volume of gel is placed near the
wellbore (Glenat et al 1996) Gel volume can be designed in two ways one is based on
filling a portion of channel volume from injector to producer and another is based on
distance from the injection well up to which the gel is to be placed (Parez et al 2001
Sarkissian et al 2005)
262 Production well
There are no definite design criteria available for bulk volume for producing well
treatment Gels with higher polymer concentrations are used in producing well (vs
injection well) treatment because the gel has to withstand high differential pressure in the
direction of producing wellbore (Glenat et al 1996 Giangiacomo 2001) Based on field
experience the following guidelines have been given
(a) Gel volume is equivalent to the volume of fluid that the well can produce in 24 hours
in a pumped-off condition
(b) Gel volume is based on 50 feet radius and thief zone thickness 0
(c) Gel volume is based on 50-200 barrels of gel per perforated foot
Chapter 2 Literature Review
33
26 CONCLUSIONS
The conclusion of the study provided strong evidence that stable gels can be produced
under harsh environmental conditions with organic and inorganic crosslinkers which may
be used for the profile modification jobs in the oil fields These crosslinkers typically
produced gels at temperature ranges from 40 degC to 140 degC and salinity up to 60000 ppm
They are generally less toxic then chromium acetate phenol and formaldehyde croslinkers
The majority of the crosslinkers are readily available at prices not much higher than the
toxic crosslinkers
Chapter 2 Literature Review
8
al 1993 Xiang 1995 Alqam et al 2001) The method comprises emplacement of a
gelant slug into the highly permeable flooded out layers of the formation close to well bore
(Chang et al 1988 1985 Ali and Barrufet 1994) The gel is designed to reduce the flow
profile and diverting injected fluid into zones of greater residual oil content (Krumrine and
Boyce 1985 Mahto 2009 Yadav and Mahto 2010)
Today polymer gel treatment is the most useful chemical method to reduce the water
production (Cai and Huang 2001) Some kind of polymer solution is injected into the
reservoir and is allowed to gel under certain conditions The gel viscosity being much
higher than the displacing fluid could impede the flow of displacing fluid through the
already flooded regions thus the displacing fluid finds new paths which means additional
oil can be displaced (Ghosh et al 2011) Polymer gel systems are typically composed of a
water soluble polymer and a cross-linking agent which are dissolved in water (Zaitoun et
al 1991) This solution is considered as a gelant solution After allowing sufficient time
the gelant sets into a semisolid mass and behaves as a flow diverting or blocking agent
(Bryant et al 1996)
Selection of a gel polymer system strongly depends on the reservoir conditions such as
temperature salinity hardness and pH of water used for the preparation of the gelant Other
parameters for the proper selection of a given gel polymer system include salinity of the
formation water permeability of the target zone and the lithology of the formation (Yan et
al 1999 He et al 2009 Urbissinova et al 2010 Ponnapati et al 2011)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
9
22 GEL PROPERTIES AND GELATION MECHANISMGEL CHEMISTRY
221 Gel properties
Gels are classified as semi-solids The water-based gels that are of interest here are highly
elastic with high water content 98 to 99 trapped in the three-dimensional polymer
structure of the gel Many systems have been developed which form gels in beaker tests
under conditions anticipated in petroleum reservoirs Through extensive testing it is
possible to determine conditions such as ranges of composition pH and temperature that
the gels are stable over long periods of time (Mahto and Maurya 2007) Stability of the gel
under reservoir conditions is one of the most important properties of the gel Some of the
important pertinent properties of the gels to their application in the profile modification are
the following (Mahto et al 2011)
2211 Rheological properties
Gels are highly elastic and their rheological properties are significantly different than those
of polymer solutions that they are made from (Al-Muntasheri et al 2007) Gels formed at
low shear rates were more viscous than gels formed at high shear rates However the
structure of these gels was susceptible to shear degradation Kharrat amp Vossoughi 1992
studied rheological behavior of four different gel systems and concluded that each gel
system is unique in their rheological behavior and generalization of their rheological
characterization does not seem to be warranted
2212 Gelation time
In-depth gel treatment requires gelation systems with long gelation times Gelation time is
not a limitation where near-wellbore treatments are desired but is of concern where it is
desired to have in-depth treatment to reduce cross-flow between layers (Al-Muntasheri et
al 2006 Mahto 2010) Gelation time is controlled differently for different gel systems
Chapter 2 Literature Review
10
For example the chromium redox gelling system can be used to promote long gelation time
by controlling the rate that Cr (VI) is reduced to Cr (III) In high temperature reservoirs in
situ gelation rate can be controlled using low molecular weight polyacrylamide with a low
degree of hydrolysis 1 by the rate that amide groups are auto-hydrolyzed to carboxyl
groups These groups subsequently react with chromium introduced as chromium acetate to
form gels which are stable in synthetic sea water to temperatures Gelation time is a
function of temperature and it follows the Arrhenius-type plot That is a semi-log plot of
gelation time vs inverse of absolute temperature produces a straight line In their study of
viscometric behavior of chromium (III)polyacrylamide gels Aslam et al 1984 observed
that gelation time decreased with increasing polymer concentration and also with
increasing initial sodium dichromate concentration It was also observed that gelation rate
was affected by shear rate and shear rate history Implication from the latter observation is
that extrapolation of gel time measurements obtained from viscometry to In-situ gelation
should be done at comparable shear rates More importantly shear rate dependence means
that in situ gelation may be influenced by the shear rate history which a gelling solution
experiences as it flows from mixing equipment through surface and subsurface equipment
into the reservoir Shear rate also varies in the reservoir as the gelling solution flows from
the wellbore into the formation
Figure 21 Stages of gel formation
Chapter 2 Literature Review
11
2213 Selective injectivity
It is desired for the gelling solution to enter the zone of high permeability with minimum or
no flow into the zones of low permeability Most operators prefer not to isolate zones when
injecting a gel solution into a well where several intervals may take the gel solution
Selective injectivity with the majority of the gel solution going into the high permeability
zone Simple models of polymer injection indicate that selective injection occurs only in
parallel linear displacement tests and is absent when polymer is injected into a layered
reservoir in radial flow Todd et al 1990 show that selective injection is possible for a
chromium-redox gelling system injected into a well containing three layers with different
permeabilities However the tight zones had significant permeability reduction in the
immediate vicinity of the wellbore and this would have to be removed before water could
subsequently be injected into the zones Hoefner et al 1992 presented laboratory core
flood data for parallel linear cores which showed selective penetration of chromium
xanthan gels Selective flow behavior was found to be a function of process variables such
as permeability and injection rates and was observed only over a limited range of
conditions Hoefner et al 1992 acknowledge that selective gels are not completely
excluded from the lower permeability media
2214 Syneresis
Gels normally undergo syneresis with time This causes shrinkage in gel volume and
consequently water is expelled from the gel structure It is believed that syneresis is the
result of increasing the cross-link density with time It seems that syneresis is a function of
brine salinity pH temperature and gel composition (Albonico et al 1997 Al-Muntasheri
et al 2006) Although syneresis could become a hindrance for the long-term effectiveness
of the gel placement in the fracture in pore scale it does not have significant effect
Chapter 2 Literature Review
12
2215 Dehydration
Gels dehydrate when exposed to a high pressure gradient Dehydration causes shrinkage in
gel volume and loss of water
222 Gelation mechanism of most useful polymer gel systems used for profile
modification jobs
2221 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide and chromium
(III) gel system
Chromium (III) forms a complex ion in solution and reacts by a ligand-exchange reaction
with the carboxylate or hydrolysed group on the polymer molecules to form crosslinks
resulting in a network or gel In this gelation mechanism where one Cr (III) interacts two
carboxylic groups (Jain et al 2005)
C
CH
CH2
CH
C
O
CrOO
P
P
NH2
O
O C
CH
CH2
CHCH
O
P
NH2
P
Partially Hydrolyzed Polyacrlamide + Cr (III)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
13
2222 Gelation mechanism of polyacrylamide tert-butyl acrylate (PAtBA) copolymer
with polyethyleneimine (PEI)
There is two gelation mechanism involve for polyacrylamide tert-butyl acrylate (PAtBA)
copolymer with polyethyleneimine (PEI)
First is the formation of covalent bonds between the carbonyl carbon at the ester group and
an imine nitrogen from PEI
Figure 22 Cross-linking reaction with PEI through ester carbonyl carbon
(Hardy et al 1999 Al-Muntasheri et al 2007)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
14
Second is the PEI nitrogens form covalent bonds with the carbonyl carbons at the amide
group of PAtBA through a transamidation reaction
Figure 23 Cross-linking reaction with PEI through transamidation of the amide
group (Reddy et al 2003 Al-Muntasheri et al 2007)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
15
2223 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide-hexamine-
hydroquinone gel system (Yadav and Mahto 2013)
The hexamine on hydrolysis yields formaldehyde which then combines with hydroquinone
and form 2 3 5 6 tetramethylol hydroquinone Further partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide reacts with 2 3 5 6 tetramethylol hydroquinone and forms three
dimensional networks of polymer gel the different steps of which are as follows
Step I
In the initial step hexamine hydrolyses to yield formaldehyde
N
N N+ H2O CH2 OH +
O
C
H H
Formaldehyde
Hexamine
N
6 OH 4 NH3
_ H2O
Step II
Formaldehyde produced in step-I then react with hydroquinone to form a condensed
structure known as 2 3 5 6-tetramethylolhydroquinone
+
O
C
H H
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
Hydroquinone Formaldehyde 2 3 5 6-Tetramethylol Hydroquinone
OH
OH
4
Chapter 2 Literature Review
16
Step III
The condensed molecule formed in step-II then reacts with PHPA to form the 3-
dimensional gel structure which helps in profile modification jobs
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide
Partially Hydrolized Polyacrylamide (PHPA)
Amide
O-
Na+
+
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
2 3 5 6-Tetramethylol Hydroquinone
R
R
o N
H
H
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
HO
Water
Crosslinking 3-D gel structure
Chapter 2 Literature Review
17
2224 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide-hexamine-
pyrocatechol gel system (Yadav and Mahto 2012)
The hexamine on hydrolysis yields formaldehyde which then combines with pyrocatechol
and form 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol Further partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide reacts with 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol and forms three
dimensional networks of polymer gel the different steps of which are as follows
Step I
In the initial step hexamine hydrolyses to yield formaldehyde
N
N N+ H2O CH2 OH +
O
C
H H
Formaldehyde
Hexamine
N
6 OH 4 NH3
_ H2O
Chapter 2 Literature Review
18
Step II
Formaldehyde produced in step-I then react with pyrocatechol to form a condensed
structure known as 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol
+
O
C
H H
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
Pyrocatechol Formaldehyde 3 4 5 6 Tetramethylol Pyrocatechol
OH
4OH
Step III
The condensed molecule formed in step-II then reacts with PHPA to form the 3-
dimensional gel structure which helps in profile modification jobs
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide
Partially Hydrolized Polyacrylamide (PHPA)
Amide
O-
Na+
+
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
3 4 5 6 Tetramethylol Pyrocatechol
Chapter 2 Literature Review
19
R
R
o N
H
H
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
HO
Water
Crosslinking 3-D gel structure 3-D Structure of polymer gel
23 MATHEMATICAL FLOW MODELS FOR THE RHEOLOGICAL BEHAVIOR
OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS
Several rheological models are reported in literature for the determination of rheological
behavior of polymer gel solutions (Kelessidis and Maglione 2006 Park and Song 2010)
The Bingham model is expressed as
τ = τ + kγ
Fluids that exhibit Bingham plastic behavior are characterized by a yield point (τ0) and a
plastic viscosity (μp) that is independent of the shear rate
There are several rheological models that involve three or more adjustable parameters It is
necessary to include a third parameter to describe the flow of the fluids in the upper or
lower Newtonian region as well as the Power law region The Herschel-Bulkley model
Chapter 2 Literature Review
20
corrects this deficiency by replacing the plastic viscosity term in the Bingham model with a
Power law expression as follows
τ = τ + kγ
τ ndash Shear stress Pa
τ0 ndash Yield point Pa
K ndash Consistency index Pasn
γ ndash Shear rate s-1
n ndash Flow behavior index
The parameters K and n are similar to those of power law model For fluids having a yield
stress however the calculated values of n and K will be different from those calculated
using power law model The parameter τ0 is the fluidrsquos yield stress at zero shear rate In
theory this yield stress is identical to the Bingham plastic yield point (YP) though its
calculated value is different The model is reduce to the Bingham plastic model when n=1
and reduces to the power law rheological model when τ0=0
In a general way the rheological model proposed by Mizrahi-Berk may be gives a good fit
with most of the rheograms of polymer gel systems
τ = τ + kγ
While the power index of the shear rate (n) is generally less than 1 to show a shear-thinning
behavior neither the consistency index nor yield stress from the models shows any pattern
with the solids content
A nonlinear relation exits between the shear stress and the shear rate above the yield stress
There are a number of rheological models used to describe this behavior RobertsonndashStiff
(Ohen and Bick 2011) proposed a three-parameter yield-pseudo-plastic model for relating
the shear stress to the shear rate may be used in determination of rheological behavior of
polymer gel system as follows
Chapter 2 Literature Review
21
τ = k (γ + C)
Where k C and n are model parameters The RobertsonndashStiff model includes the
Newtonian Bingham plastic and power law models as special cases
24 DEVELOPMENT OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS USING DIFFERENT
CROSS-LINKERS
Cross-linked polymers have been widely used for profile modification jobs over the last
decades (Mahto and Sharma 2010)
241 Polymers used for profile modification jobs
The most commonly used polymers are the following
2411 PolyacrylamidePartially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
These are water soluble polymer whose monomeric unit is the acrylamide molecule The
polyacrylamide has undergoes partially hydrolysis which causes anionic carboxyl group to
be scattered along the backbone chain (Wever et al 2011) The polymers are called
partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamide is between 1x106 to 8x106 The size of the molecules
about 01 to 03 micro meters By hydrolysis in a caustic water solution some of the
CONH2 group react to form carbyl group (COOH)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
22
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide Amide
O-
Na+
Figure 24 Chemical structure of partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
2412 Xanthan gum
Xanthan gum is a polysaccharide with a a-D-glucose backbone like cellulose but every
second glucose unit is attached to a triaccharide consisting of mannose glucuronic acid
and mannose The mannose closest to the backbone has an acetic acid ester on carbon 6
and the mannose at the end of the triaccharide is linked through carbons 6 and 4 to the
second carbon of pyruvic acid Xanthan gum is produced by the bacterium Xanthomonas
campestris which is found on crucifereous vegetables such as cabbage and cauliflower
The negatively charged carboxyl group on the side chains because the molecules to form
very viscous fluids when mixed with water (Chatterji and Borchardt 1981 Taylor and
Nasr-El-Din 1998)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
23
Figure 25 Chemical structure of xanthan gum (Song et al 2006)
2413 Copolymers
The main copolymers used in profile modification jobs are copolymer of acrylamide ter
polymer with N-vinyle pyrrolidone and 2-acrylamide-2-methyl-1-propanesulfonic acid
(PAAm-VP-AMPS) amphoteric copolymer polyacrylonitrile and lignin sulphonate
Table 21 Properties of polyacrylamide and xanthan gum polymers
Sl
No
Property Polyacrylamide Xanthan Gum
1 Transition Metal
Cations
Easily crosslinked Easily crosslinked
2 Shear stability Undergoes irreversible
shear degradation
Reversible shear thining
Chapter 2 Literature Review
24
3 Thermal stability Maximum use upto 225-
250 (degF)
Maximum use 160-170 (degF)
4 Hydrolytic
stability
Hydrolysis promoted by
acid or base Partially
hydrolyzed product more
sensitive to Ca+2 Mg+2
Hydrolytic de-
polymerization promoted by
acid or base especially at
high temperature
5 Oxidative
stability
Susceptible Particularly susceptible
especially at high
temperature
6 Brine tolerance Very limited especially to
Ca+2 Mg+2
Good tolerance to mono and
divalent captions
7 Microbial
degradation
Susceptible to attack by
yeast fungi bacteria
Very susceptible in aerobic
conditions
242 Cross linkers used for profile modification jobs
Crosslinkers are the chemical compound which formed stable three dimensional structures
with high molecular weight polymers like polyacrylamide and xanthan gum
The cross-linkers used in cross-linking of the high molecular weight polymers are the
following
2421 Metallic crosslinkers
The most common metallic crosslinkers are Al+3 Cr+6 Cr+3 zirconium titanium boron etc
2422 Organic crosslinkers
Two classes of organic cross-linkers namely phenolic and aldehydes are used for profile
modification jobs The different cross-linkers in the phenolic group are phenol
hydroquinone resorcinol phenyl acetate salicylic alcohol furfuryl alcohol etc In the
Chapter 2 Literature Review
25
aldehyde group main crosslinkers are formaldehyde paraformaldehyde hexamethylene
tetra mine etc
243 Emerging developments of cross linked polymer gel systems
Polymer gel systems have emerged as one of the most effective conformance solution for
controlling of excessive water production worldwide The different cross-linked polymer
gel systems are the following (Moradi 2000 Mahto and Sharma 2010)
2431 Polyacrylamide-chromium (III) gel system
The short gelation time of Cr(III)-acetatepolymer composition at elevated temperature
limit their application to reservoirs that are at relatively at lower temperatures (Sydansk and
Southwell 2000) The existing gelation characteristics of these systems have limited
control over the gelation time of the polymer solutions at elevated temperature For the
delay in gelation time at elevated temperature chromium (IV) or formaldehyde are used but
their use in the field is complicated by significant health and environmental issues At
present many organic ligands are used for their delaying power with Cr(III)polymer and
Cr(OAc)3 polymer solutions and provides outstanding control over the gelation time over
60-135degC With the use of this gelation time spanning the range from several hours to one
month or more at temperature up to 120degC The most interesting features of the ligands like
glycolate malonate and salicylate are their gelation delaying power and cost which
provides gelation delays of 12 to 33 times longer than acetate The other ligands include
oxalate citrate maleate and EDTA which are characteristic by their extremely strong Cr
(III) binding capacity and are found to block gelation entirely (Lane 1998 Jain et al
2004)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
26
2432 Polyacrylamide-chromium (IV)-thiourea gel system
The chromium (VI)-Thiourea-polyacrylamide gels form as the result of two chemical
reactions First chromium (VI) is reduced to chromium (III) by thiourea Second the
produced chromium (III) reacts with carboxylate groups on the partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide to form a crosslinked gel The pH range for the reduction of chromium (VI)
to chromium (III) by thiourea is in the range of 40 to 50 Gel times on the order of days to
weeks can be achieved which is desirable to allow proper placement of the gel system in
the formation Another option is to use chromium (III) ligands like acetate lactate or
manolate
2433 Xanthan-Cr(III) gel system
The chromium (III)-xanthan gel systems have been widely recommended for matrix
treatment because they are shear thinning inject easily and have been claimed to reheal
after shearing (Chang et al 1985 1988 Kolnes et al 1991 Liang et al 1992 Nagra et
al 1996) The initial gelation rate of xanthan-chromium gel system is inversely
proportional to the hydrogen ion concentration and is strongly affected by pH in the porous
matrix (Storm et al 1991)
2434 Acrylamide-polymerchromium (III)-carboxylate gel system
The aqous acrylamide-polymercarboxylate gels are formed by crosslinking water soluble
acrylamide polymers with a Cr(III) carboxylate complex crosslinking agent (Sydansk
1990) The water soluble acrylamide polymer can be polyacrylamide partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide or tert-polymer containing acrylamide Acrylamide-polymerCr(III)
carboxylate gels can be used for near wellbore total shutoff treatments where matrix rock is
to be treated These are stable at elevated temperatures and they are stable and rigid at
225degF at elevated temperature These new matrix of gels are functional in the presence of
high salinity water at elevated temperatures (Sydansk 1988)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
27
2435 Polyacrylamide-aluminum citrate gel system
The aluminum citrate solution form gels with anionic polyacrylamide under certain
conditions Cationic polymers do not form gels with aluminum under similar conditions
The low pH aluminum system begins crosslinking with polymer solution immediately
even before it can be injected This prevents in depth penetration of the plugging solution
Because aluminum is known to be amphoteric in aqueous solution they can crosslink at
high pH environment
2436 Polyacrylamide-polyethyleneimine gel system
These gels are rigid and non-flowing at polyacrylamide concentration of 7 and 9 These
are thermally stable at 100degC and a permeability reduction of more than 94 was realized
indicating the possibility of using this system in profile modification jobs or water shutoff
2437 KUSP1-monoethylphthalate systemKUSP1-boric acid gel system
KUSP1 is a biopolymer that is extracted from a medium after the growth of the bacterium
cellumonasflavigena It is nontoxic and exhibit viscosities on the order of 2-3 cP at 25degC
KUSP1 is soluble in alkali but forms a gel with monoethylphthalate ester and permeability
reduction by treatment with the KUSP1-MEP system is stable to brine flow for periods of
up to six months Alkaline KUSP1 can also form gel with boric acid and the gelation time
of the KUSP1-boric acid system could be regulated up to several days by selection of pH
and boric acid concentrations (Vossoughi and Buller 1991)
2438 Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine gel
system
Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine system at acidic
conditions the gelation time was short and the gel did not last for a longer period of time
Chapter 2 Literature Review
28
High viscosity is obtained at high initial values This system can be used where formation
brine contains high concentration of divalent cations (ranges from 10000 to 15000 mgl)
Iron (III) can react with the polymer and accelerated the gelation process and produce a gel
that breaks over a short periods of time (Al-Muntasheri 2007) Hence it should not be used
after acid treatment jobs especially in sandstone reservoirs as the possibility of iron
concentration is high in the well bore area which can cause premature setting of gel This
system can be used at a temperature less than 140degC (Al-Muntasheri 2007 2006 2008)
2439 Polyacrylamide-phenol-formaldehyde gel systemspolyacrylamide-resorcinol
formaldehyde gel system
Phenol-Formaldehyde polymer gels system is an attractive tool fluid shutoff or profile
modification in high temperature formations By selecting between different polymer
compositions reasonable flexibility in the gelation time can be achieved over the
temperature range from 60degC to at least 140degC (Bryant et al 1997 Mahto et al 2009
2010) Choice of polymer composition permits the control of the gelation time and the
gelants display good injectivity even when the residence time approaches the gelation time
(Zhuang et al 2000 Banerjee et al 2006) Cross-linking occurs over a wide range of pH
and is insensitive to lithology (Seright and Martin 1993 Dovan et al 1997)
24310 Polyacrylamide-hydroquinone-hexamine gel system
Hexamethylenetetramine (HMTA) undergoes hydrolysis to produce methyldiol and
ammonia Methyldiol compound is very much unstable Hence it looses water molecules to
produce formaldehyde Thus formed formaldehyde is then reacting with hydroquinone
Hydroquinone undergoes electrophilic substitution reaction to produce 2356
tetramethylol hydroquinone (intermediate) Then intermediate react with partially
hydrolyzed polyacrylamide (PHPA) polymer Hence form a large viscous molecule Hence
OHmacr in methylol group of intermediate and H+ from amide group of polymer are leaving as
Chapter 2 Literature Review
29
a water molecule while producing N-C crosslinker (Dovan et al 1997 Gwaish et al 2008
Mahto and Sheikh 2009)
Table 22 Summary of thermally stable gels
Sl
No
Polymers Crosslinkers Comments
1 Polyacrylamide low mol wt
(Bryant et al 1996)
Cr(III) Acetate 5 or more polymer
needed
2 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Lockhart and Albonico 1994)
Cr(III) Molonate Slower gelation rate
than with Cr(III)
Acetate
3 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Bryant et al 1997 1997)
Phenol and
Formaldehyde
Ligands such as
citrate oxalate
lactate stabilized the
gel
4 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Gawish et al 2008)
Hydroquinone amp
Hexamethylenetetramine
2 sodium
carbonate needed
for softening and
stability
5 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Moradi 2000)
Terephthaladehyde
dihydroxynaphthalene
HMTA etc
Stable gel
6 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer (Moradi 2000)
Phenol formaldehyde Stable gel
7 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer
(Moradi 2000)
Phenyl acetate phenyl
salicylate etc with
HMTA
Stable gel lower
toxicity than phenol
amp formaldehyde gel
8 Acrylic esteracrylic acid Polyethyleneimine Stable gel required
Chapter 2 Literature Review
30
copolymer
(Moradi 2000)
larger concentration
amp cooling at below
93degC
9 Resorcinol
(Mahto et al 2009)
Formaldehyde Water like viscosity
of gelant is plus
toxicity is a problem
10 Scleroglucan
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Stable gel the
polymer is very
expensive
11 Lignosulfate
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Expensive gel due to
high chromium
required
12 Alcaligenes biopolymer PVA
(Moradi 2000)
Na+ phenol amp aldehyde Stable gel in pH
range of 7-8 higher
concentration of
polymer and
crosslinkers needed
13 PVA-polyvinylamide copolymer
(Hoskin and Shu 1989)
Dialdehydes or
polyaldehydes
Not widely used
14 Copolymer tert butyle acylate
(Al-Muntasheri et al 2006
2007)
Polyethyleneimine
15 Partially hydrolysed
polyacrylamide (Jia et al 2010
2011)
Polyethyleneimine
Chapter 2 Literature Review
31
25 SELECTION CRITERIA OF WELLS FOR GEL TREATMENT
Polymer gels can be applied to both injection and production wells (Al-Muntasheri et al
2010 Canbolat and Parlaktuna 2012) The objective of treating injection well is to
improve vertical injection profile resulting in more efficient distribution of injected water
(avery et al 1987) The production well treatment is to improve areal efficiency and to
reduce water oil ratio by reducing water channeling in the near wellbore region
(Giangiacomo 2001 Larson et al 1999 Ghafoori et al 2008) The following criterions
for candidate selection of injection and production wells are reported in the literature
(Maghsood and Bringham 1984 Sharma et al 2009)
251 Selection criteria for injection wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Low secondary oil recovery due to poor sweep efficiency that is high degree of
reservoir heterogeneity
(b) Pre-matured water breakthrough of producing wells
(c) Evidence of direct injector to producer channeling through fractures bugs or high
matrix permeability rock
(d) High injection rate associated with low well head pressure
252 Selection criteria for production wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Recovery calculations indicate that considerable mobile oil remains that could be
recovered most cost effectively if a blocking agent could be realistically placed in the
proper location
(b) High water oil ratio (WOR) values are observed
(c) The source of excess water production is identified (ie using profiles logs or
tracers)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
32
(d) The candidate well exhibits high productivity
26 DESIGNING GEL JOB FOR OIL FIELD APPLICATION
Gel volume is to be designed for both injection and production wells
261 Injection well
When cross flow occurs between thief zone and low permeability oil bearing zone a large
volume of gel is to be injected so that gel penetrates significant distance into the thief zone
(Romero et al 2003) In case where there is no cross flow ie thief zone is separated by an
impermeable barrierlayer from oil bearing zone a small volume of gel is placed near the
wellbore (Glenat et al 1996) Gel volume can be designed in two ways one is based on
filling a portion of channel volume from injector to producer and another is based on
distance from the injection well up to which the gel is to be placed (Parez et al 2001
Sarkissian et al 2005)
262 Production well
There are no definite design criteria available for bulk volume for producing well
treatment Gels with higher polymer concentrations are used in producing well (vs
injection well) treatment because the gel has to withstand high differential pressure in the
direction of producing wellbore (Glenat et al 1996 Giangiacomo 2001) Based on field
experience the following guidelines have been given
(a) Gel volume is equivalent to the volume of fluid that the well can produce in 24 hours
in a pumped-off condition
(b) Gel volume is based on 50 feet radius and thief zone thickness 0
(c) Gel volume is based on 50-200 barrels of gel per perforated foot
Chapter 2 Literature Review
33
26 CONCLUSIONS
The conclusion of the study provided strong evidence that stable gels can be produced
under harsh environmental conditions with organic and inorganic crosslinkers which may
be used for the profile modification jobs in the oil fields These crosslinkers typically
produced gels at temperature ranges from 40 degC to 140 degC and salinity up to 60000 ppm
They are generally less toxic then chromium acetate phenol and formaldehyde croslinkers
The majority of the crosslinkers are readily available at prices not much higher than the
toxic crosslinkers
Chapter 2 Literature Review
9
22 GEL PROPERTIES AND GELATION MECHANISMGEL CHEMISTRY
221 Gel properties
Gels are classified as semi-solids The water-based gels that are of interest here are highly
elastic with high water content 98 to 99 trapped in the three-dimensional polymer
structure of the gel Many systems have been developed which form gels in beaker tests
under conditions anticipated in petroleum reservoirs Through extensive testing it is
possible to determine conditions such as ranges of composition pH and temperature that
the gels are stable over long periods of time (Mahto and Maurya 2007) Stability of the gel
under reservoir conditions is one of the most important properties of the gel Some of the
important pertinent properties of the gels to their application in the profile modification are
the following (Mahto et al 2011)
2211 Rheological properties
Gels are highly elastic and their rheological properties are significantly different than those
of polymer solutions that they are made from (Al-Muntasheri et al 2007) Gels formed at
low shear rates were more viscous than gels formed at high shear rates However the
structure of these gels was susceptible to shear degradation Kharrat amp Vossoughi 1992
studied rheological behavior of four different gel systems and concluded that each gel
system is unique in their rheological behavior and generalization of their rheological
characterization does not seem to be warranted
2212 Gelation time
In-depth gel treatment requires gelation systems with long gelation times Gelation time is
not a limitation where near-wellbore treatments are desired but is of concern where it is
desired to have in-depth treatment to reduce cross-flow between layers (Al-Muntasheri et
al 2006 Mahto 2010) Gelation time is controlled differently for different gel systems
Chapter 2 Literature Review
10
For example the chromium redox gelling system can be used to promote long gelation time
by controlling the rate that Cr (VI) is reduced to Cr (III) In high temperature reservoirs in
situ gelation rate can be controlled using low molecular weight polyacrylamide with a low
degree of hydrolysis 1 by the rate that amide groups are auto-hydrolyzed to carboxyl
groups These groups subsequently react with chromium introduced as chromium acetate to
form gels which are stable in synthetic sea water to temperatures Gelation time is a
function of temperature and it follows the Arrhenius-type plot That is a semi-log plot of
gelation time vs inverse of absolute temperature produces a straight line In their study of
viscometric behavior of chromium (III)polyacrylamide gels Aslam et al 1984 observed
that gelation time decreased with increasing polymer concentration and also with
increasing initial sodium dichromate concentration It was also observed that gelation rate
was affected by shear rate and shear rate history Implication from the latter observation is
that extrapolation of gel time measurements obtained from viscometry to In-situ gelation
should be done at comparable shear rates More importantly shear rate dependence means
that in situ gelation may be influenced by the shear rate history which a gelling solution
experiences as it flows from mixing equipment through surface and subsurface equipment
into the reservoir Shear rate also varies in the reservoir as the gelling solution flows from
the wellbore into the formation
Figure 21 Stages of gel formation
Chapter 2 Literature Review
11
2213 Selective injectivity
It is desired for the gelling solution to enter the zone of high permeability with minimum or
no flow into the zones of low permeability Most operators prefer not to isolate zones when
injecting a gel solution into a well where several intervals may take the gel solution
Selective injectivity with the majority of the gel solution going into the high permeability
zone Simple models of polymer injection indicate that selective injection occurs only in
parallel linear displacement tests and is absent when polymer is injected into a layered
reservoir in radial flow Todd et al 1990 show that selective injection is possible for a
chromium-redox gelling system injected into a well containing three layers with different
permeabilities However the tight zones had significant permeability reduction in the
immediate vicinity of the wellbore and this would have to be removed before water could
subsequently be injected into the zones Hoefner et al 1992 presented laboratory core
flood data for parallel linear cores which showed selective penetration of chromium
xanthan gels Selective flow behavior was found to be a function of process variables such
as permeability and injection rates and was observed only over a limited range of
conditions Hoefner et al 1992 acknowledge that selective gels are not completely
excluded from the lower permeability media
2214 Syneresis
Gels normally undergo syneresis with time This causes shrinkage in gel volume and
consequently water is expelled from the gel structure It is believed that syneresis is the
result of increasing the cross-link density with time It seems that syneresis is a function of
brine salinity pH temperature and gel composition (Albonico et al 1997 Al-Muntasheri
et al 2006) Although syneresis could become a hindrance for the long-term effectiveness
of the gel placement in the fracture in pore scale it does not have significant effect
Chapter 2 Literature Review
12
2215 Dehydration
Gels dehydrate when exposed to a high pressure gradient Dehydration causes shrinkage in
gel volume and loss of water
222 Gelation mechanism of most useful polymer gel systems used for profile
modification jobs
2221 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide and chromium
(III) gel system
Chromium (III) forms a complex ion in solution and reacts by a ligand-exchange reaction
with the carboxylate or hydrolysed group on the polymer molecules to form crosslinks
resulting in a network or gel In this gelation mechanism where one Cr (III) interacts two
carboxylic groups (Jain et al 2005)
C
CH
CH2
CH
C
O
CrOO
P
P
NH2
O
O C
CH
CH2
CHCH
O
P
NH2
P
Partially Hydrolyzed Polyacrlamide + Cr (III)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
13
2222 Gelation mechanism of polyacrylamide tert-butyl acrylate (PAtBA) copolymer
with polyethyleneimine (PEI)
There is two gelation mechanism involve for polyacrylamide tert-butyl acrylate (PAtBA)
copolymer with polyethyleneimine (PEI)
First is the formation of covalent bonds between the carbonyl carbon at the ester group and
an imine nitrogen from PEI
Figure 22 Cross-linking reaction with PEI through ester carbonyl carbon
(Hardy et al 1999 Al-Muntasheri et al 2007)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
14
Second is the PEI nitrogens form covalent bonds with the carbonyl carbons at the amide
group of PAtBA through a transamidation reaction
Figure 23 Cross-linking reaction with PEI through transamidation of the amide
group (Reddy et al 2003 Al-Muntasheri et al 2007)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
15
2223 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide-hexamine-
hydroquinone gel system (Yadav and Mahto 2013)
The hexamine on hydrolysis yields formaldehyde which then combines with hydroquinone
and form 2 3 5 6 tetramethylol hydroquinone Further partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide reacts with 2 3 5 6 tetramethylol hydroquinone and forms three
dimensional networks of polymer gel the different steps of which are as follows
Step I
In the initial step hexamine hydrolyses to yield formaldehyde
N
N N+ H2O CH2 OH +
O
C
H H
Formaldehyde
Hexamine
N
6 OH 4 NH3
_ H2O
Step II
Formaldehyde produced in step-I then react with hydroquinone to form a condensed
structure known as 2 3 5 6-tetramethylolhydroquinone
+
O
C
H H
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
Hydroquinone Formaldehyde 2 3 5 6-Tetramethylol Hydroquinone
OH
OH
4
Chapter 2 Literature Review
16
Step III
The condensed molecule formed in step-II then reacts with PHPA to form the 3-
dimensional gel structure which helps in profile modification jobs
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide
Partially Hydrolized Polyacrylamide (PHPA)
Amide
O-
Na+
+
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
2 3 5 6-Tetramethylol Hydroquinone
R
R
o N
H
H
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
HO
Water
Crosslinking 3-D gel structure
Chapter 2 Literature Review
17
2224 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide-hexamine-
pyrocatechol gel system (Yadav and Mahto 2012)
The hexamine on hydrolysis yields formaldehyde which then combines with pyrocatechol
and form 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol Further partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide reacts with 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol and forms three
dimensional networks of polymer gel the different steps of which are as follows
Step I
In the initial step hexamine hydrolyses to yield formaldehyde
N
N N+ H2O CH2 OH +
O
C
H H
Formaldehyde
Hexamine
N
6 OH 4 NH3
_ H2O
Chapter 2 Literature Review
18
Step II
Formaldehyde produced in step-I then react with pyrocatechol to form a condensed
structure known as 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol
+
O
C
H H
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
Pyrocatechol Formaldehyde 3 4 5 6 Tetramethylol Pyrocatechol
OH
4OH
Step III
The condensed molecule formed in step-II then reacts with PHPA to form the 3-
dimensional gel structure which helps in profile modification jobs
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide
Partially Hydrolized Polyacrylamide (PHPA)
Amide
O-
Na+
+
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
3 4 5 6 Tetramethylol Pyrocatechol
Chapter 2 Literature Review
19
R
R
o N
H
H
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
HO
Water
Crosslinking 3-D gel structure 3-D Structure of polymer gel
23 MATHEMATICAL FLOW MODELS FOR THE RHEOLOGICAL BEHAVIOR
OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS
Several rheological models are reported in literature for the determination of rheological
behavior of polymer gel solutions (Kelessidis and Maglione 2006 Park and Song 2010)
The Bingham model is expressed as
τ = τ + kγ
Fluids that exhibit Bingham plastic behavior are characterized by a yield point (τ0) and a
plastic viscosity (μp) that is independent of the shear rate
There are several rheological models that involve three or more adjustable parameters It is
necessary to include a third parameter to describe the flow of the fluids in the upper or
lower Newtonian region as well as the Power law region The Herschel-Bulkley model
Chapter 2 Literature Review
20
corrects this deficiency by replacing the plastic viscosity term in the Bingham model with a
Power law expression as follows
τ = τ + kγ
τ ndash Shear stress Pa
τ0 ndash Yield point Pa
K ndash Consistency index Pasn
γ ndash Shear rate s-1
n ndash Flow behavior index
The parameters K and n are similar to those of power law model For fluids having a yield
stress however the calculated values of n and K will be different from those calculated
using power law model The parameter τ0 is the fluidrsquos yield stress at zero shear rate In
theory this yield stress is identical to the Bingham plastic yield point (YP) though its
calculated value is different The model is reduce to the Bingham plastic model when n=1
and reduces to the power law rheological model when τ0=0
In a general way the rheological model proposed by Mizrahi-Berk may be gives a good fit
with most of the rheograms of polymer gel systems
τ = τ + kγ
While the power index of the shear rate (n) is generally less than 1 to show a shear-thinning
behavior neither the consistency index nor yield stress from the models shows any pattern
with the solids content
A nonlinear relation exits between the shear stress and the shear rate above the yield stress
There are a number of rheological models used to describe this behavior RobertsonndashStiff
(Ohen and Bick 2011) proposed a three-parameter yield-pseudo-plastic model for relating
the shear stress to the shear rate may be used in determination of rheological behavior of
polymer gel system as follows
Chapter 2 Literature Review
21
τ = k (γ + C)
Where k C and n are model parameters The RobertsonndashStiff model includes the
Newtonian Bingham plastic and power law models as special cases
24 DEVELOPMENT OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS USING DIFFERENT
CROSS-LINKERS
Cross-linked polymers have been widely used for profile modification jobs over the last
decades (Mahto and Sharma 2010)
241 Polymers used for profile modification jobs
The most commonly used polymers are the following
2411 PolyacrylamidePartially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
These are water soluble polymer whose monomeric unit is the acrylamide molecule The
polyacrylamide has undergoes partially hydrolysis which causes anionic carboxyl group to
be scattered along the backbone chain (Wever et al 2011) The polymers are called
partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamide is between 1x106 to 8x106 The size of the molecules
about 01 to 03 micro meters By hydrolysis in a caustic water solution some of the
CONH2 group react to form carbyl group (COOH)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
22
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide Amide
O-
Na+
Figure 24 Chemical structure of partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
2412 Xanthan gum
Xanthan gum is a polysaccharide with a a-D-glucose backbone like cellulose but every
second glucose unit is attached to a triaccharide consisting of mannose glucuronic acid
and mannose The mannose closest to the backbone has an acetic acid ester on carbon 6
and the mannose at the end of the triaccharide is linked through carbons 6 and 4 to the
second carbon of pyruvic acid Xanthan gum is produced by the bacterium Xanthomonas
campestris which is found on crucifereous vegetables such as cabbage and cauliflower
The negatively charged carboxyl group on the side chains because the molecules to form
very viscous fluids when mixed with water (Chatterji and Borchardt 1981 Taylor and
Nasr-El-Din 1998)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
23
Figure 25 Chemical structure of xanthan gum (Song et al 2006)
2413 Copolymers
The main copolymers used in profile modification jobs are copolymer of acrylamide ter
polymer with N-vinyle pyrrolidone and 2-acrylamide-2-methyl-1-propanesulfonic acid
(PAAm-VP-AMPS) amphoteric copolymer polyacrylonitrile and lignin sulphonate
Table 21 Properties of polyacrylamide and xanthan gum polymers
Sl
No
Property Polyacrylamide Xanthan Gum
1 Transition Metal
Cations
Easily crosslinked Easily crosslinked
2 Shear stability Undergoes irreversible
shear degradation
Reversible shear thining
Chapter 2 Literature Review
24
3 Thermal stability Maximum use upto 225-
250 (degF)
Maximum use 160-170 (degF)
4 Hydrolytic
stability
Hydrolysis promoted by
acid or base Partially
hydrolyzed product more
sensitive to Ca+2 Mg+2
Hydrolytic de-
polymerization promoted by
acid or base especially at
high temperature
5 Oxidative
stability
Susceptible Particularly susceptible
especially at high
temperature
6 Brine tolerance Very limited especially to
Ca+2 Mg+2
Good tolerance to mono and
divalent captions
7 Microbial
degradation
Susceptible to attack by
yeast fungi bacteria
Very susceptible in aerobic
conditions
242 Cross linkers used for profile modification jobs
Crosslinkers are the chemical compound which formed stable three dimensional structures
with high molecular weight polymers like polyacrylamide and xanthan gum
The cross-linkers used in cross-linking of the high molecular weight polymers are the
following
2421 Metallic crosslinkers
The most common metallic crosslinkers are Al+3 Cr+6 Cr+3 zirconium titanium boron etc
2422 Organic crosslinkers
Two classes of organic cross-linkers namely phenolic and aldehydes are used for profile
modification jobs The different cross-linkers in the phenolic group are phenol
hydroquinone resorcinol phenyl acetate salicylic alcohol furfuryl alcohol etc In the
Chapter 2 Literature Review
25
aldehyde group main crosslinkers are formaldehyde paraformaldehyde hexamethylene
tetra mine etc
243 Emerging developments of cross linked polymer gel systems
Polymer gel systems have emerged as one of the most effective conformance solution for
controlling of excessive water production worldwide The different cross-linked polymer
gel systems are the following (Moradi 2000 Mahto and Sharma 2010)
2431 Polyacrylamide-chromium (III) gel system
The short gelation time of Cr(III)-acetatepolymer composition at elevated temperature
limit their application to reservoirs that are at relatively at lower temperatures (Sydansk and
Southwell 2000) The existing gelation characteristics of these systems have limited
control over the gelation time of the polymer solutions at elevated temperature For the
delay in gelation time at elevated temperature chromium (IV) or formaldehyde are used but
their use in the field is complicated by significant health and environmental issues At
present many organic ligands are used for their delaying power with Cr(III)polymer and
Cr(OAc)3 polymer solutions and provides outstanding control over the gelation time over
60-135degC With the use of this gelation time spanning the range from several hours to one
month or more at temperature up to 120degC The most interesting features of the ligands like
glycolate malonate and salicylate are their gelation delaying power and cost which
provides gelation delays of 12 to 33 times longer than acetate The other ligands include
oxalate citrate maleate and EDTA which are characteristic by their extremely strong Cr
(III) binding capacity and are found to block gelation entirely (Lane 1998 Jain et al
2004)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
26
2432 Polyacrylamide-chromium (IV)-thiourea gel system
The chromium (VI)-Thiourea-polyacrylamide gels form as the result of two chemical
reactions First chromium (VI) is reduced to chromium (III) by thiourea Second the
produced chromium (III) reacts with carboxylate groups on the partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide to form a crosslinked gel The pH range for the reduction of chromium (VI)
to chromium (III) by thiourea is in the range of 40 to 50 Gel times on the order of days to
weeks can be achieved which is desirable to allow proper placement of the gel system in
the formation Another option is to use chromium (III) ligands like acetate lactate or
manolate
2433 Xanthan-Cr(III) gel system
The chromium (III)-xanthan gel systems have been widely recommended for matrix
treatment because they are shear thinning inject easily and have been claimed to reheal
after shearing (Chang et al 1985 1988 Kolnes et al 1991 Liang et al 1992 Nagra et
al 1996) The initial gelation rate of xanthan-chromium gel system is inversely
proportional to the hydrogen ion concentration and is strongly affected by pH in the porous
matrix (Storm et al 1991)
2434 Acrylamide-polymerchromium (III)-carboxylate gel system
The aqous acrylamide-polymercarboxylate gels are formed by crosslinking water soluble
acrylamide polymers with a Cr(III) carboxylate complex crosslinking agent (Sydansk
1990) The water soluble acrylamide polymer can be polyacrylamide partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide or tert-polymer containing acrylamide Acrylamide-polymerCr(III)
carboxylate gels can be used for near wellbore total shutoff treatments where matrix rock is
to be treated These are stable at elevated temperatures and they are stable and rigid at
225degF at elevated temperature These new matrix of gels are functional in the presence of
high salinity water at elevated temperatures (Sydansk 1988)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
27
2435 Polyacrylamide-aluminum citrate gel system
The aluminum citrate solution form gels with anionic polyacrylamide under certain
conditions Cationic polymers do not form gels with aluminum under similar conditions
The low pH aluminum system begins crosslinking with polymer solution immediately
even before it can be injected This prevents in depth penetration of the plugging solution
Because aluminum is known to be amphoteric in aqueous solution they can crosslink at
high pH environment
2436 Polyacrylamide-polyethyleneimine gel system
These gels are rigid and non-flowing at polyacrylamide concentration of 7 and 9 These
are thermally stable at 100degC and a permeability reduction of more than 94 was realized
indicating the possibility of using this system in profile modification jobs or water shutoff
2437 KUSP1-monoethylphthalate systemKUSP1-boric acid gel system
KUSP1 is a biopolymer that is extracted from a medium after the growth of the bacterium
cellumonasflavigena It is nontoxic and exhibit viscosities on the order of 2-3 cP at 25degC
KUSP1 is soluble in alkali but forms a gel with monoethylphthalate ester and permeability
reduction by treatment with the KUSP1-MEP system is stable to brine flow for periods of
up to six months Alkaline KUSP1 can also form gel with boric acid and the gelation time
of the KUSP1-boric acid system could be regulated up to several days by selection of pH
and boric acid concentrations (Vossoughi and Buller 1991)
2438 Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine gel
system
Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine system at acidic
conditions the gelation time was short and the gel did not last for a longer period of time
Chapter 2 Literature Review
28
High viscosity is obtained at high initial values This system can be used where formation
brine contains high concentration of divalent cations (ranges from 10000 to 15000 mgl)
Iron (III) can react with the polymer and accelerated the gelation process and produce a gel
that breaks over a short periods of time (Al-Muntasheri 2007) Hence it should not be used
after acid treatment jobs especially in sandstone reservoirs as the possibility of iron
concentration is high in the well bore area which can cause premature setting of gel This
system can be used at a temperature less than 140degC (Al-Muntasheri 2007 2006 2008)
2439 Polyacrylamide-phenol-formaldehyde gel systemspolyacrylamide-resorcinol
formaldehyde gel system
Phenol-Formaldehyde polymer gels system is an attractive tool fluid shutoff or profile
modification in high temperature formations By selecting between different polymer
compositions reasonable flexibility in the gelation time can be achieved over the
temperature range from 60degC to at least 140degC (Bryant et al 1997 Mahto et al 2009
2010) Choice of polymer composition permits the control of the gelation time and the
gelants display good injectivity even when the residence time approaches the gelation time
(Zhuang et al 2000 Banerjee et al 2006) Cross-linking occurs over a wide range of pH
and is insensitive to lithology (Seright and Martin 1993 Dovan et al 1997)
24310 Polyacrylamide-hydroquinone-hexamine gel system
Hexamethylenetetramine (HMTA) undergoes hydrolysis to produce methyldiol and
ammonia Methyldiol compound is very much unstable Hence it looses water molecules to
produce formaldehyde Thus formed formaldehyde is then reacting with hydroquinone
Hydroquinone undergoes electrophilic substitution reaction to produce 2356
tetramethylol hydroquinone (intermediate) Then intermediate react with partially
hydrolyzed polyacrylamide (PHPA) polymer Hence form a large viscous molecule Hence
OHmacr in methylol group of intermediate and H+ from amide group of polymer are leaving as
Chapter 2 Literature Review
29
a water molecule while producing N-C crosslinker (Dovan et al 1997 Gwaish et al 2008
Mahto and Sheikh 2009)
Table 22 Summary of thermally stable gels
Sl
No
Polymers Crosslinkers Comments
1 Polyacrylamide low mol wt
(Bryant et al 1996)
Cr(III) Acetate 5 or more polymer
needed
2 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Lockhart and Albonico 1994)
Cr(III) Molonate Slower gelation rate
than with Cr(III)
Acetate
3 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Bryant et al 1997 1997)
Phenol and
Formaldehyde
Ligands such as
citrate oxalate
lactate stabilized the
gel
4 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Gawish et al 2008)
Hydroquinone amp
Hexamethylenetetramine
2 sodium
carbonate needed
for softening and
stability
5 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Moradi 2000)
Terephthaladehyde
dihydroxynaphthalene
HMTA etc
Stable gel
6 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer (Moradi 2000)
Phenol formaldehyde Stable gel
7 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer
(Moradi 2000)
Phenyl acetate phenyl
salicylate etc with
HMTA
Stable gel lower
toxicity than phenol
amp formaldehyde gel
8 Acrylic esteracrylic acid Polyethyleneimine Stable gel required
Chapter 2 Literature Review
30
copolymer
(Moradi 2000)
larger concentration
amp cooling at below
93degC
9 Resorcinol
(Mahto et al 2009)
Formaldehyde Water like viscosity
of gelant is plus
toxicity is a problem
10 Scleroglucan
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Stable gel the
polymer is very
expensive
11 Lignosulfate
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Expensive gel due to
high chromium
required
12 Alcaligenes biopolymer PVA
(Moradi 2000)
Na+ phenol amp aldehyde Stable gel in pH
range of 7-8 higher
concentration of
polymer and
crosslinkers needed
13 PVA-polyvinylamide copolymer
(Hoskin and Shu 1989)
Dialdehydes or
polyaldehydes
Not widely used
14 Copolymer tert butyle acylate
(Al-Muntasheri et al 2006
2007)
Polyethyleneimine
15 Partially hydrolysed
polyacrylamide (Jia et al 2010
2011)
Polyethyleneimine
Chapter 2 Literature Review
31
25 SELECTION CRITERIA OF WELLS FOR GEL TREATMENT
Polymer gels can be applied to both injection and production wells (Al-Muntasheri et al
2010 Canbolat and Parlaktuna 2012) The objective of treating injection well is to
improve vertical injection profile resulting in more efficient distribution of injected water
(avery et al 1987) The production well treatment is to improve areal efficiency and to
reduce water oil ratio by reducing water channeling in the near wellbore region
(Giangiacomo 2001 Larson et al 1999 Ghafoori et al 2008) The following criterions
for candidate selection of injection and production wells are reported in the literature
(Maghsood and Bringham 1984 Sharma et al 2009)
251 Selection criteria for injection wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Low secondary oil recovery due to poor sweep efficiency that is high degree of
reservoir heterogeneity
(b) Pre-matured water breakthrough of producing wells
(c) Evidence of direct injector to producer channeling through fractures bugs or high
matrix permeability rock
(d) High injection rate associated with low well head pressure
252 Selection criteria for production wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Recovery calculations indicate that considerable mobile oil remains that could be
recovered most cost effectively if a blocking agent could be realistically placed in the
proper location
(b) High water oil ratio (WOR) values are observed
(c) The source of excess water production is identified (ie using profiles logs or
tracers)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
32
(d) The candidate well exhibits high productivity
26 DESIGNING GEL JOB FOR OIL FIELD APPLICATION
Gel volume is to be designed for both injection and production wells
261 Injection well
When cross flow occurs between thief zone and low permeability oil bearing zone a large
volume of gel is to be injected so that gel penetrates significant distance into the thief zone
(Romero et al 2003) In case where there is no cross flow ie thief zone is separated by an
impermeable barrierlayer from oil bearing zone a small volume of gel is placed near the
wellbore (Glenat et al 1996) Gel volume can be designed in two ways one is based on
filling a portion of channel volume from injector to producer and another is based on
distance from the injection well up to which the gel is to be placed (Parez et al 2001
Sarkissian et al 2005)
262 Production well
There are no definite design criteria available for bulk volume for producing well
treatment Gels with higher polymer concentrations are used in producing well (vs
injection well) treatment because the gel has to withstand high differential pressure in the
direction of producing wellbore (Glenat et al 1996 Giangiacomo 2001) Based on field
experience the following guidelines have been given
(a) Gel volume is equivalent to the volume of fluid that the well can produce in 24 hours
in a pumped-off condition
(b) Gel volume is based on 50 feet radius and thief zone thickness 0
(c) Gel volume is based on 50-200 barrels of gel per perforated foot
Chapter 2 Literature Review
33
26 CONCLUSIONS
The conclusion of the study provided strong evidence that stable gels can be produced
under harsh environmental conditions with organic and inorganic crosslinkers which may
be used for the profile modification jobs in the oil fields These crosslinkers typically
produced gels at temperature ranges from 40 degC to 140 degC and salinity up to 60000 ppm
They are generally less toxic then chromium acetate phenol and formaldehyde croslinkers
The majority of the crosslinkers are readily available at prices not much higher than the
toxic crosslinkers
Chapter 2 Literature Review
10
For example the chromium redox gelling system can be used to promote long gelation time
by controlling the rate that Cr (VI) is reduced to Cr (III) In high temperature reservoirs in
situ gelation rate can be controlled using low molecular weight polyacrylamide with a low
degree of hydrolysis 1 by the rate that amide groups are auto-hydrolyzed to carboxyl
groups These groups subsequently react with chromium introduced as chromium acetate to
form gels which are stable in synthetic sea water to temperatures Gelation time is a
function of temperature and it follows the Arrhenius-type plot That is a semi-log plot of
gelation time vs inverse of absolute temperature produces a straight line In their study of
viscometric behavior of chromium (III)polyacrylamide gels Aslam et al 1984 observed
that gelation time decreased with increasing polymer concentration and also with
increasing initial sodium dichromate concentration It was also observed that gelation rate
was affected by shear rate and shear rate history Implication from the latter observation is
that extrapolation of gel time measurements obtained from viscometry to In-situ gelation
should be done at comparable shear rates More importantly shear rate dependence means
that in situ gelation may be influenced by the shear rate history which a gelling solution
experiences as it flows from mixing equipment through surface and subsurface equipment
into the reservoir Shear rate also varies in the reservoir as the gelling solution flows from
the wellbore into the formation
Figure 21 Stages of gel formation
Chapter 2 Literature Review
11
2213 Selective injectivity
It is desired for the gelling solution to enter the zone of high permeability with minimum or
no flow into the zones of low permeability Most operators prefer not to isolate zones when
injecting a gel solution into a well where several intervals may take the gel solution
Selective injectivity with the majority of the gel solution going into the high permeability
zone Simple models of polymer injection indicate that selective injection occurs only in
parallel linear displacement tests and is absent when polymer is injected into a layered
reservoir in radial flow Todd et al 1990 show that selective injection is possible for a
chromium-redox gelling system injected into a well containing three layers with different
permeabilities However the tight zones had significant permeability reduction in the
immediate vicinity of the wellbore and this would have to be removed before water could
subsequently be injected into the zones Hoefner et al 1992 presented laboratory core
flood data for parallel linear cores which showed selective penetration of chromium
xanthan gels Selective flow behavior was found to be a function of process variables such
as permeability and injection rates and was observed only over a limited range of
conditions Hoefner et al 1992 acknowledge that selective gels are not completely
excluded from the lower permeability media
2214 Syneresis
Gels normally undergo syneresis with time This causes shrinkage in gel volume and
consequently water is expelled from the gel structure It is believed that syneresis is the
result of increasing the cross-link density with time It seems that syneresis is a function of
brine salinity pH temperature and gel composition (Albonico et al 1997 Al-Muntasheri
et al 2006) Although syneresis could become a hindrance for the long-term effectiveness
of the gel placement in the fracture in pore scale it does not have significant effect
Chapter 2 Literature Review
12
2215 Dehydration
Gels dehydrate when exposed to a high pressure gradient Dehydration causes shrinkage in
gel volume and loss of water
222 Gelation mechanism of most useful polymer gel systems used for profile
modification jobs
2221 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide and chromium
(III) gel system
Chromium (III) forms a complex ion in solution and reacts by a ligand-exchange reaction
with the carboxylate or hydrolysed group on the polymer molecules to form crosslinks
resulting in a network or gel In this gelation mechanism where one Cr (III) interacts two
carboxylic groups (Jain et al 2005)
C
CH
CH2
CH
C
O
CrOO
P
P
NH2
O
O C
CH
CH2
CHCH
O
P
NH2
P
Partially Hydrolyzed Polyacrlamide + Cr (III)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
13
2222 Gelation mechanism of polyacrylamide tert-butyl acrylate (PAtBA) copolymer
with polyethyleneimine (PEI)
There is two gelation mechanism involve for polyacrylamide tert-butyl acrylate (PAtBA)
copolymer with polyethyleneimine (PEI)
First is the formation of covalent bonds between the carbonyl carbon at the ester group and
an imine nitrogen from PEI
Figure 22 Cross-linking reaction with PEI through ester carbonyl carbon
(Hardy et al 1999 Al-Muntasheri et al 2007)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
14
Second is the PEI nitrogens form covalent bonds with the carbonyl carbons at the amide
group of PAtBA through a transamidation reaction
Figure 23 Cross-linking reaction with PEI through transamidation of the amide
group (Reddy et al 2003 Al-Muntasheri et al 2007)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
15
2223 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide-hexamine-
hydroquinone gel system (Yadav and Mahto 2013)
The hexamine on hydrolysis yields formaldehyde which then combines with hydroquinone
and form 2 3 5 6 tetramethylol hydroquinone Further partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide reacts with 2 3 5 6 tetramethylol hydroquinone and forms three
dimensional networks of polymer gel the different steps of which are as follows
Step I
In the initial step hexamine hydrolyses to yield formaldehyde
N
N N+ H2O CH2 OH +
O
C
H H
Formaldehyde
Hexamine
N
6 OH 4 NH3
_ H2O
Step II
Formaldehyde produced in step-I then react with hydroquinone to form a condensed
structure known as 2 3 5 6-tetramethylolhydroquinone
+
O
C
H H
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
Hydroquinone Formaldehyde 2 3 5 6-Tetramethylol Hydroquinone
OH
OH
4
Chapter 2 Literature Review
16
Step III
The condensed molecule formed in step-II then reacts with PHPA to form the 3-
dimensional gel structure which helps in profile modification jobs
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide
Partially Hydrolized Polyacrylamide (PHPA)
Amide
O-
Na+
+
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
2 3 5 6-Tetramethylol Hydroquinone
R
R
o N
H
H
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
HO
Water
Crosslinking 3-D gel structure
Chapter 2 Literature Review
17
2224 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide-hexamine-
pyrocatechol gel system (Yadav and Mahto 2012)
The hexamine on hydrolysis yields formaldehyde which then combines with pyrocatechol
and form 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol Further partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide reacts with 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol and forms three
dimensional networks of polymer gel the different steps of which are as follows
Step I
In the initial step hexamine hydrolyses to yield formaldehyde
N
N N+ H2O CH2 OH +
O
C
H H
Formaldehyde
Hexamine
N
6 OH 4 NH3
_ H2O
Chapter 2 Literature Review
18
Step II
Formaldehyde produced in step-I then react with pyrocatechol to form a condensed
structure known as 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol
+
O
C
H H
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
Pyrocatechol Formaldehyde 3 4 5 6 Tetramethylol Pyrocatechol
OH
4OH
Step III
The condensed molecule formed in step-II then reacts with PHPA to form the 3-
dimensional gel structure which helps in profile modification jobs
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide
Partially Hydrolized Polyacrylamide (PHPA)
Amide
O-
Na+
+
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
3 4 5 6 Tetramethylol Pyrocatechol
Chapter 2 Literature Review
19
R
R
o N
H
H
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
HO
Water
Crosslinking 3-D gel structure 3-D Structure of polymer gel
23 MATHEMATICAL FLOW MODELS FOR THE RHEOLOGICAL BEHAVIOR
OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS
Several rheological models are reported in literature for the determination of rheological
behavior of polymer gel solutions (Kelessidis and Maglione 2006 Park and Song 2010)
The Bingham model is expressed as
τ = τ + kγ
Fluids that exhibit Bingham plastic behavior are characterized by a yield point (τ0) and a
plastic viscosity (μp) that is independent of the shear rate
There are several rheological models that involve three or more adjustable parameters It is
necessary to include a third parameter to describe the flow of the fluids in the upper or
lower Newtonian region as well as the Power law region The Herschel-Bulkley model
Chapter 2 Literature Review
20
corrects this deficiency by replacing the plastic viscosity term in the Bingham model with a
Power law expression as follows
τ = τ + kγ
τ ndash Shear stress Pa
τ0 ndash Yield point Pa
K ndash Consistency index Pasn
γ ndash Shear rate s-1
n ndash Flow behavior index
The parameters K and n are similar to those of power law model For fluids having a yield
stress however the calculated values of n and K will be different from those calculated
using power law model The parameter τ0 is the fluidrsquos yield stress at zero shear rate In
theory this yield stress is identical to the Bingham plastic yield point (YP) though its
calculated value is different The model is reduce to the Bingham plastic model when n=1
and reduces to the power law rheological model when τ0=0
In a general way the rheological model proposed by Mizrahi-Berk may be gives a good fit
with most of the rheograms of polymer gel systems
τ = τ + kγ
While the power index of the shear rate (n) is generally less than 1 to show a shear-thinning
behavior neither the consistency index nor yield stress from the models shows any pattern
with the solids content
A nonlinear relation exits between the shear stress and the shear rate above the yield stress
There are a number of rheological models used to describe this behavior RobertsonndashStiff
(Ohen and Bick 2011) proposed a three-parameter yield-pseudo-plastic model for relating
the shear stress to the shear rate may be used in determination of rheological behavior of
polymer gel system as follows
Chapter 2 Literature Review
21
τ = k (γ + C)
Where k C and n are model parameters The RobertsonndashStiff model includes the
Newtonian Bingham plastic and power law models as special cases
24 DEVELOPMENT OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS USING DIFFERENT
CROSS-LINKERS
Cross-linked polymers have been widely used for profile modification jobs over the last
decades (Mahto and Sharma 2010)
241 Polymers used for profile modification jobs
The most commonly used polymers are the following
2411 PolyacrylamidePartially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
These are water soluble polymer whose monomeric unit is the acrylamide molecule The
polyacrylamide has undergoes partially hydrolysis which causes anionic carboxyl group to
be scattered along the backbone chain (Wever et al 2011) The polymers are called
partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamide is between 1x106 to 8x106 The size of the molecules
about 01 to 03 micro meters By hydrolysis in a caustic water solution some of the
CONH2 group react to form carbyl group (COOH)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
22
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide Amide
O-
Na+
Figure 24 Chemical structure of partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
2412 Xanthan gum
Xanthan gum is a polysaccharide with a a-D-glucose backbone like cellulose but every
second glucose unit is attached to a triaccharide consisting of mannose glucuronic acid
and mannose The mannose closest to the backbone has an acetic acid ester on carbon 6
and the mannose at the end of the triaccharide is linked through carbons 6 and 4 to the
second carbon of pyruvic acid Xanthan gum is produced by the bacterium Xanthomonas
campestris which is found on crucifereous vegetables such as cabbage and cauliflower
The negatively charged carboxyl group on the side chains because the molecules to form
very viscous fluids when mixed with water (Chatterji and Borchardt 1981 Taylor and
Nasr-El-Din 1998)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
23
Figure 25 Chemical structure of xanthan gum (Song et al 2006)
2413 Copolymers
The main copolymers used in profile modification jobs are copolymer of acrylamide ter
polymer with N-vinyle pyrrolidone and 2-acrylamide-2-methyl-1-propanesulfonic acid
(PAAm-VP-AMPS) amphoteric copolymer polyacrylonitrile and lignin sulphonate
Table 21 Properties of polyacrylamide and xanthan gum polymers
Sl
No
Property Polyacrylamide Xanthan Gum
1 Transition Metal
Cations
Easily crosslinked Easily crosslinked
2 Shear stability Undergoes irreversible
shear degradation
Reversible shear thining
Chapter 2 Literature Review
24
3 Thermal stability Maximum use upto 225-
250 (degF)
Maximum use 160-170 (degF)
4 Hydrolytic
stability
Hydrolysis promoted by
acid or base Partially
hydrolyzed product more
sensitive to Ca+2 Mg+2
Hydrolytic de-
polymerization promoted by
acid or base especially at
high temperature
5 Oxidative
stability
Susceptible Particularly susceptible
especially at high
temperature
6 Brine tolerance Very limited especially to
Ca+2 Mg+2
Good tolerance to mono and
divalent captions
7 Microbial
degradation
Susceptible to attack by
yeast fungi bacteria
Very susceptible in aerobic
conditions
242 Cross linkers used for profile modification jobs
Crosslinkers are the chemical compound which formed stable three dimensional structures
with high molecular weight polymers like polyacrylamide and xanthan gum
The cross-linkers used in cross-linking of the high molecular weight polymers are the
following
2421 Metallic crosslinkers
The most common metallic crosslinkers are Al+3 Cr+6 Cr+3 zirconium titanium boron etc
2422 Organic crosslinkers
Two classes of organic cross-linkers namely phenolic and aldehydes are used for profile
modification jobs The different cross-linkers in the phenolic group are phenol
hydroquinone resorcinol phenyl acetate salicylic alcohol furfuryl alcohol etc In the
Chapter 2 Literature Review
25
aldehyde group main crosslinkers are formaldehyde paraformaldehyde hexamethylene
tetra mine etc
243 Emerging developments of cross linked polymer gel systems
Polymer gel systems have emerged as one of the most effective conformance solution for
controlling of excessive water production worldwide The different cross-linked polymer
gel systems are the following (Moradi 2000 Mahto and Sharma 2010)
2431 Polyacrylamide-chromium (III) gel system
The short gelation time of Cr(III)-acetatepolymer composition at elevated temperature
limit their application to reservoirs that are at relatively at lower temperatures (Sydansk and
Southwell 2000) The existing gelation characteristics of these systems have limited
control over the gelation time of the polymer solutions at elevated temperature For the
delay in gelation time at elevated temperature chromium (IV) or formaldehyde are used but
their use in the field is complicated by significant health and environmental issues At
present many organic ligands are used for their delaying power with Cr(III)polymer and
Cr(OAc)3 polymer solutions and provides outstanding control over the gelation time over
60-135degC With the use of this gelation time spanning the range from several hours to one
month or more at temperature up to 120degC The most interesting features of the ligands like
glycolate malonate and salicylate are their gelation delaying power and cost which
provides gelation delays of 12 to 33 times longer than acetate The other ligands include
oxalate citrate maleate and EDTA which are characteristic by their extremely strong Cr
(III) binding capacity and are found to block gelation entirely (Lane 1998 Jain et al
2004)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
26
2432 Polyacrylamide-chromium (IV)-thiourea gel system
The chromium (VI)-Thiourea-polyacrylamide gels form as the result of two chemical
reactions First chromium (VI) is reduced to chromium (III) by thiourea Second the
produced chromium (III) reacts with carboxylate groups on the partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide to form a crosslinked gel The pH range for the reduction of chromium (VI)
to chromium (III) by thiourea is in the range of 40 to 50 Gel times on the order of days to
weeks can be achieved which is desirable to allow proper placement of the gel system in
the formation Another option is to use chromium (III) ligands like acetate lactate or
manolate
2433 Xanthan-Cr(III) gel system
The chromium (III)-xanthan gel systems have been widely recommended for matrix
treatment because they are shear thinning inject easily and have been claimed to reheal
after shearing (Chang et al 1985 1988 Kolnes et al 1991 Liang et al 1992 Nagra et
al 1996) The initial gelation rate of xanthan-chromium gel system is inversely
proportional to the hydrogen ion concentration and is strongly affected by pH in the porous
matrix (Storm et al 1991)
2434 Acrylamide-polymerchromium (III)-carboxylate gel system
The aqous acrylamide-polymercarboxylate gels are formed by crosslinking water soluble
acrylamide polymers with a Cr(III) carboxylate complex crosslinking agent (Sydansk
1990) The water soluble acrylamide polymer can be polyacrylamide partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide or tert-polymer containing acrylamide Acrylamide-polymerCr(III)
carboxylate gels can be used for near wellbore total shutoff treatments where matrix rock is
to be treated These are stable at elevated temperatures and they are stable and rigid at
225degF at elevated temperature These new matrix of gels are functional in the presence of
high salinity water at elevated temperatures (Sydansk 1988)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
27
2435 Polyacrylamide-aluminum citrate gel system
The aluminum citrate solution form gels with anionic polyacrylamide under certain
conditions Cationic polymers do not form gels with aluminum under similar conditions
The low pH aluminum system begins crosslinking with polymer solution immediately
even before it can be injected This prevents in depth penetration of the plugging solution
Because aluminum is known to be amphoteric in aqueous solution they can crosslink at
high pH environment
2436 Polyacrylamide-polyethyleneimine gel system
These gels are rigid and non-flowing at polyacrylamide concentration of 7 and 9 These
are thermally stable at 100degC and a permeability reduction of more than 94 was realized
indicating the possibility of using this system in profile modification jobs or water shutoff
2437 KUSP1-monoethylphthalate systemKUSP1-boric acid gel system
KUSP1 is a biopolymer that is extracted from a medium after the growth of the bacterium
cellumonasflavigena It is nontoxic and exhibit viscosities on the order of 2-3 cP at 25degC
KUSP1 is soluble in alkali but forms a gel with monoethylphthalate ester and permeability
reduction by treatment with the KUSP1-MEP system is stable to brine flow for periods of
up to six months Alkaline KUSP1 can also form gel with boric acid and the gelation time
of the KUSP1-boric acid system could be regulated up to several days by selection of pH
and boric acid concentrations (Vossoughi and Buller 1991)
2438 Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine gel
system
Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine system at acidic
conditions the gelation time was short and the gel did not last for a longer period of time
Chapter 2 Literature Review
28
High viscosity is obtained at high initial values This system can be used where formation
brine contains high concentration of divalent cations (ranges from 10000 to 15000 mgl)
Iron (III) can react with the polymer and accelerated the gelation process and produce a gel
that breaks over a short periods of time (Al-Muntasheri 2007) Hence it should not be used
after acid treatment jobs especially in sandstone reservoirs as the possibility of iron
concentration is high in the well bore area which can cause premature setting of gel This
system can be used at a temperature less than 140degC (Al-Muntasheri 2007 2006 2008)
2439 Polyacrylamide-phenol-formaldehyde gel systemspolyacrylamide-resorcinol
formaldehyde gel system
Phenol-Formaldehyde polymer gels system is an attractive tool fluid shutoff or profile
modification in high temperature formations By selecting between different polymer
compositions reasonable flexibility in the gelation time can be achieved over the
temperature range from 60degC to at least 140degC (Bryant et al 1997 Mahto et al 2009
2010) Choice of polymer composition permits the control of the gelation time and the
gelants display good injectivity even when the residence time approaches the gelation time
(Zhuang et al 2000 Banerjee et al 2006) Cross-linking occurs over a wide range of pH
and is insensitive to lithology (Seright and Martin 1993 Dovan et al 1997)
24310 Polyacrylamide-hydroquinone-hexamine gel system
Hexamethylenetetramine (HMTA) undergoes hydrolysis to produce methyldiol and
ammonia Methyldiol compound is very much unstable Hence it looses water molecules to
produce formaldehyde Thus formed formaldehyde is then reacting with hydroquinone
Hydroquinone undergoes electrophilic substitution reaction to produce 2356
tetramethylol hydroquinone (intermediate) Then intermediate react with partially
hydrolyzed polyacrylamide (PHPA) polymer Hence form a large viscous molecule Hence
OHmacr in methylol group of intermediate and H+ from amide group of polymer are leaving as
Chapter 2 Literature Review
29
a water molecule while producing N-C crosslinker (Dovan et al 1997 Gwaish et al 2008
Mahto and Sheikh 2009)
Table 22 Summary of thermally stable gels
Sl
No
Polymers Crosslinkers Comments
1 Polyacrylamide low mol wt
(Bryant et al 1996)
Cr(III) Acetate 5 or more polymer
needed
2 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Lockhart and Albonico 1994)
Cr(III) Molonate Slower gelation rate
than with Cr(III)
Acetate
3 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Bryant et al 1997 1997)
Phenol and
Formaldehyde
Ligands such as
citrate oxalate
lactate stabilized the
gel
4 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Gawish et al 2008)
Hydroquinone amp
Hexamethylenetetramine
2 sodium
carbonate needed
for softening and
stability
5 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Moradi 2000)
Terephthaladehyde
dihydroxynaphthalene
HMTA etc
Stable gel
6 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer (Moradi 2000)
Phenol formaldehyde Stable gel
7 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer
(Moradi 2000)
Phenyl acetate phenyl
salicylate etc with
HMTA
Stable gel lower
toxicity than phenol
amp formaldehyde gel
8 Acrylic esteracrylic acid Polyethyleneimine Stable gel required
Chapter 2 Literature Review
30
copolymer
(Moradi 2000)
larger concentration
amp cooling at below
93degC
9 Resorcinol
(Mahto et al 2009)
Formaldehyde Water like viscosity
of gelant is plus
toxicity is a problem
10 Scleroglucan
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Stable gel the
polymer is very
expensive
11 Lignosulfate
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Expensive gel due to
high chromium
required
12 Alcaligenes biopolymer PVA
(Moradi 2000)
Na+ phenol amp aldehyde Stable gel in pH
range of 7-8 higher
concentration of
polymer and
crosslinkers needed
13 PVA-polyvinylamide copolymer
(Hoskin and Shu 1989)
Dialdehydes or
polyaldehydes
Not widely used
14 Copolymer tert butyle acylate
(Al-Muntasheri et al 2006
2007)
Polyethyleneimine
15 Partially hydrolysed
polyacrylamide (Jia et al 2010
2011)
Polyethyleneimine
Chapter 2 Literature Review
31
25 SELECTION CRITERIA OF WELLS FOR GEL TREATMENT
Polymer gels can be applied to both injection and production wells (Al-Muntasheri et al
2010 Canbolat and Parlaktuna 2012) The objective of treating injection well is to
improve vertical injection profile resulting in more efficient distribution of injected water
(avery et al 1987) The production well treatment is to improve areal efficiency and to
reduce water oil ratio by reducing water channeling in the near wellbore region
(Giangiacomo 2001 Larson et al 1999 Ghafoori et al 2008) The following criterions
for candidate selection of injection and production wells are reported in the literature
(Maghsood and Bringham 1984 Sharma et al 2009)
251 Selection criteria for injection wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Low secondary oil recovery due to poor sweep efficiency that is high degree of
reservoir heterogeneity
(b) Pre-matured water breakthrough of producing wells
(c) Evidence of direct injector to producer channeling through fractures bugs or high
matrix permeability rock
(d) High injection rate associated with low well head pressure
252 Selection criteria for production wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Recovery calculations indicate that considerable mobile oil remains that could be
recovered most cost effectively if a blocking agent could be realistically placed in the
proper location
(b) High water oil ratio (WOR) values are observed
(c) The source of excess water production is identified (ie using profiles logs or
tracers)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
32
(d) The candidate well exhibits high productivity
26 DESIGNING GEL JOB FOR OIL FIELD APPLICATION
Gel volume is to be designed for both injection and production wells
261 Injection well
When cross flow occurs between thief zone and low permeability oil bearing zone a large
volume of gel is to be injected so that gel penetrates significant distance into the thief zone
(Romero et al 2003) In case where there is no cross flow ie thief zone is separated by an
impermeable barrierlayer from oil bearing zone a small volume of gel is placed near the
wellbore (Glenat et al 1996) Gel volume can be designed in two ways one is based on
filling a portion of channel volume from injector to producer and another is based on
distance from the injection well up to which the gel is to be placed (Parez et al 2001
Sarkissian et al 2005)
262 Production well
There are no definite design criteria available for bulk volume for producing well
treatment Gels with higher polymer concentrations are used in producing well (vs
injection well) treatment because the gel has to withstand high differential pressure in the
direction of producing wellbore (Glenat et al 1996 Giangiacomo 2001) Based on field
experience the following guidelines have been given
(a) Gel volume is equivalent to the volume of fluid that the well can produce in 24 hours
in a pumped-off condition
(b) Gel volume is based on 50 feet radius and thief zone thickness 0
(c) Gel volume is based on 50-200 barrels of gel per perforated foot
Chapter 2 Literature Review
33
26 CONCLUSIONS
The conclusion of the study provided strong evidence that stable gels can be produced
under harsh environmental conditions with organic and inorganic crosslinkers which may
be used for the profile modification jobs in the oil fields These crosslinkers typically
produced gels at temperature ranges from 40 degC to 140 degC and salinity up to 60000 ppm
They are generally less toxic then chromium acetate phenol and formaldehyde croslinkers
The majority of the crosslinkers are readily available at prices not much higher than the
toxic crosslinkers
Chapter 2 Literature Review
11
2213 Selective injectivity
It is desired for the gelling solution to enter the zone of high permeability with minimum or
no flow into the zones of low permeability Most operators prefer not to isolate zones when
injecting a gel solution into a well where several intervals may take the gel solution
Selective injectivity with the majority of the gel solution going into the high permeability
zone Simple models of polymer injection indicate that selective injection occurs only in
parallel linear displacement tests and is absent when polymer is injected into a layered
reservoir in radial flow Todd et al 1990 show that selective injection is possible for a
chromium-redox gelling system injected into a well containing three layers with different
permeabilities However the tight zones had significant permeability reduction in the
immediate vicinity of the wellbore and this would have to be removed before water could
subsequently be injected into the zones Hoefner et al 1992 presented laboratory core
flood data for parallel linear cores which showed selective penetration of chromium
xanthan gels Selective flow behavior was found to be a function of process variables such
as permeability and injection rates and was observed only over a limited range of
conditions Hoefner et al 1992 acknowledge that selective gels are not completely
excluded from the lower permeability media
2214 Syneresis
Gels normally undergo syneresis with time This causes shrinkage in gel volume and
consequently water is expelled from the gel structure It is believed that syneresis is the
result of increasing the cross-link density with time It seems that syneresis is a function of
brine salinity pH temperature and gel composition (Albonico et al 1997 Al-Muntasheri
et al 2006) Although syneresis could become a hindrance for the long-term effectiveness
of the gel placement in the fracture in pore scale it does not have significant effect
Chapter 2 Literature Review
12
2215 Dehydration
Gels dehydrate when exposed to a high pressure gradient Dehydration causes shrinkage in
gel volume and loss of water
222 Gelation mechanism of most useful polymer gel systems used for profile
modification jobs
2221 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide and chromium
(III) gel system
Chromium (III) forms a complex ion in solution and reacts by a ligand-exchange reaction
with the carboxylate or hydrolysed group on the polymer molecules to form crosslinks
resulting in a network or gel In this gelation mechanism where one Cr (III) interacts two
carboxylic groups (Jain et al 2005)
C
CH
CH2
CH
C
O
CrOO
P
P
NH2
O
O C
CH
CH2
CHCH
O
P
NH2
P
Partially Hydrolyzed Polyacrlamide + Cr (III)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
13
2222 Gelation mechanism of polyacrylamide tert-butyl acrylate (PAtBA) copolymer
with polyethyleneimine (PEI)
There is two gelation mechanism involve for polyacrylamide tert-butyl acrylate (PAtBA)
copolymer with polyethyleneimine (PEI)
First is the formation of covalent bonds between the carbonyl carbon at the ester group and
an imine nitrogen from PEI
Figure 22 Cross-linking reaction with PEI through ester carbonyl carbon
(Hardy et al 1999 Al-Muntasheri et al 2007)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
14
Second is the PEI nitrogens form covalent bonds with the carbonyl carbons at the amide
group of PAtBA through a transamidation reaction
Figure 23 Cross-linking reaction with PEI through transamidation of the amide
group (Reddy et al 2003 Al-Muntasheri et al 2007)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
15
2223 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide-hexamine-
hydroquinone gel system (Yadav and Mahto 2013)
The hexamine on hydrolysis yields formaldehyde which then combines with hydroquinone
and form 2 3 5 6 tetramethylol hydroquinone Further partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide reacts with 2 3 5 6 tetramethylol hydroquinone and forms three
dimensional networks of polymer gel the different steps of which are as follows
Step I
In the initial step hexamine hydrolyses to yield formaldehyde
N
N N+ H2O CH2 OH +
O
C
H H
Formaldehyde
Hexamine
N
6 OH 4 NH3
_ H2O
Step II
Formaldehyde produced in step-I then react with hydroquinone to form a condensed
structure known as 2 3 5 6-tetramethylolhydroquinone
+
O
C
H H
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
Hydroquinone Formaldehyde 2 3 5 6-Tetramethylol Hydroquinone
OH
OH
4
Chapter 2 Literature Review
16
Step III
The condensed molecule formed in step-II then reacts with PHPA to form the 3-
dimensional gel structure which helps in profile modification jobs
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide
Partially Hydrolized Polyacrylamide (PHPA)
Amide
O-
Na+
+
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
2 3 5 6-Tetramethylol Hydroquinone
R
R
o N
H
H
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
HO
Water
Crosslinking 3-D gel structure
Chapter 2 Literature Review
17
2224 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide-hexamine-
pyrocatechol gel system (Yadav and Mahto 2012)
The hexamine on hydrolysis yields formaldehyde which then combines with pyrocatechol
and form 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol Further partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide reacts with 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol and forms three
dimensional networks of polymer gel the different steps of which are as follows
Step I
In the initial step hexamine hydrolyses to yield formaldehyde
N
N N+ H2O CH2 OH +
O
C
H H
Formaldehyde
Hexamine
N
6 OH 4 NH3
_ H2O
Chapter 2 Literature Review
18
Step II
Formaldehyde produced in step-I then react with pyrocatechol to form a condensed
structure known as 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol
+
O
C
H H
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
Pyrocatechol Formaldehyde 3 4 5 6 Tetramethylol Pyrocatechol
OH
4OH
Step III
The condensed molecule formed in step-II then reacts with PHPA to form the 3-
dimensional gel structure which helps in profile modification jobs
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide
Partially Hydrolized Polyacrylamide (PHPA)
Amide
O-
Na+
+
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
3 4 5 6 Tetramethylol Pyrocatechol
Chapter 2 Literature Review
19
R
R
o N
H
H
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
HO
Water
Crosslinking 3-D gel structure 3-D Structure of polymer gel
23 MATHEMATICAL FLOW MODELS FOR THE RHEOLOGICAL BEHAVIOR
OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS
Several rheological models are reported in literature for the determination of rheological
behavior of polymer gel solutions (Kelessidis and Maglione 2006 Park and Song 2010)
The Bingham model is expressed as
τ = τ + kγ
Fluids that exhibit Bingham plastic behavior are characterized by a yield point (τ0) and a
plastic viscosity (μp) that is independent of the shear rate
There are several rheological models that involve three or more adjustable parameters It is
necessary to include a third parameter to describe the flow of the fluids in the upper or
lower Newtonian region as well as the Power law region The Herschel-Bulkley model
Chapter 2 Literature Review
20
corrects this deficiency by replacing the plastic viscosity term in the Bingham model with a
Power law expression as follows
τ = τ + kγ
τ ndash Shear stress Pa
τ0 ndash Yield point Pa
K ndash Consistency index Pasn
γ ndash Shear rate s-1
n ndash Flow behavior index
The parameters K and n are similar to those of power law model For fluids having a yield
stress however the calculated values of n and K will be different from those calculated
using power law model The parameter τ0 is the fluidrsquos yield stress at zero shear rate In
theory this yield stress is identical to the Bingham plastic yield point (YP) though its
calculated value is different The model is reduce to the Bingham plastic model when n=1
and reduces to the power law rheological model when τ0=0
In a general way the rheological model proposed by Mizrahi-Berk may be gives a good fit
with most of the rheograms of polymer gel systems
τ = τ + kγ
While the power index of the shear rate (n) is generally less than 1 to show a shear-thinning
behavior neither the consistency index nor yield stress from the models shows any pattern
with the solids content
A nonlinear relation exits between the shear stress and the shear rate above the yield stress
There are a number of rheological models used to describe this behavior RobertsonndashStiff
(Ohen and Bick 2011) proposed a three-parameter yield-pseudo-plastic model for relating
the shear stress to the shear rate may be used in determination of rheological behavior of
polymer gel system as follows
Chapter 2 Literature Review
21
τ = k (γ + C)
Where k C and n are model parameters The RobertsonndashStiff model includes the
Newtonian Bingham plastic and power law models as special cases
24 DEVELOPMENT OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS USING DIFFERENT
CROSS-LINKERS
Cross-linked polymers have been widely used for profile modification jobs over the last
decades (Mahto and Sharma 2010)
241 Polymers used for profile modification jobs
The most commonly used polymers are the following
2411 PolyacrylamidePartially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
These are water soluble polymer whose monomeric unit is the acrylamide molecule The
polyacrylamide has undergoes partially hydrolysis which causes anionic carboxyl group to
be scattered along the backbone chain (Wever et al 2011) The polymers are called
partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamide is between 1x106 to 8x106 The size of the molecules
about 01 to 03 micro meters By hydrolysis in a caustic water solution some of the
CONH2 group react to form carbyl group (COOH)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
22
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide Amide
O-
Na+
Figure 24 Chemical structure of partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
2412 Xanthan gum
Xanthan gum is a polysaccharide with a a-D-glucose backbone like cellulose but every
second glucose unit is attached to a triaccharide consisting of mannose glucuronic acid
and mannose The mannose closest to the backbone has an acetic acid ester on carbon 6
and the mannose at the end of the triaccharide is linked through carbons 6 and 4 to the
second carbon of pyruvic acid Xanthan gum is produced by the bacterium Xanthomonas
campestris which is found on crucifereous vegetables such as cabbage and cauliflower
The negatively charged carboxyl group on the side chains because the molecules to form
very viscous fluids when mixed with water (Chatterji and Borchardt 1981 Taylor and
Nasr-El-Din 1998)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
23
Figure 25 Chemical structure of xanthan gum (Song et al 2006)
2413 Copolymers
The main copolymers used in profile modification jobs are copolymer of acrylamide ter
polymer with N-vinyle pyrrolidone and 2-acrylamide-2-methyl-1-propanesulfonic acid
(PAAm-VP-AMPS) amphoteric copolymer polyacrylonitrile and lignin sulphonate
Table 21 Properties of polyacrylamide and xanthan gum polymers
Sl
No
Property Polyacrylamide Xanthan Gum
1 Transition Metal
Cations
Easily crosslinked Easily crosslinked
2 Shear stability Undergoes irreversible
shear degradation
Reversible shear thining
Chapter 2 Literature Review
24
3 Thermal stability Maximum use upto 225-
250 (degF)
Maximum use 160-170 (degF)
4 Hydrolytic
stability
Hydrolysis promoted by
acid or base Partially
hydrolyzed product more
sensitive to Ca+2 Mg+2
Hydrolytic de-
polymerization promoted by
acid or base especially at
high temperature
5 Oxidative
stability
Susceptible Particularly susceptible
especially at high
temperature
6 Brine tolerance Very limited especially to
Ca+2 Mg+2
Good tolerance to mono and
divalent captions
7 Microbial
degradation
Susceptible to attack by
yeast fungi bacteria
Very susceptible in aerobic
conditions
242 Cross linkers used for profile modification jobs
Crosslinkers are the chemical compound which formed stable three dimensional structures
with high molecular weight polymers like polyacrylamide and xanthan gum
The cross-linkers used in cross-linking of the high molecular weight polymers are the
following
2421 Metallic crosslinkers
The most common metallic crosslinkers are Al+3 Cr+6 Cr+3 zirconium titanium boron etc
2422 Organic crosslinkers
Two classes of organic cross-linkers namely phenolic and aldehydes are used for profile
modification jobs The different cross-linkers in the phenolic group are phenol
hydroquinone resorcinol phenyl acetate salicylic alcohol furfuryl alcohol etc In the
Chapter 2 Literature Review
25
aldehyde group main crosslinkers are formaldehyde paraformaldehyde hexamethylene
tetra mine etc
243 Emerging developments of cross linked polymer gel systems
Polymer gel systems have emerged as one of the most effective conformance solution for
controlling of excessive water production worldwide The different cross-linked polymer
gel systems are the following (Moradi 2000 Mahto and Sharma 2010)
2431 Polyacrylamide-chromium (III) gel system
The short gelation time of Cr(III)-acetatepolymer composition at elevated temperature
limit their application to reservoirs that are at relatively at lower temperatures (Sydansk and
Southwell 2000) The existing gelation characteristics of these systems have limited
control over the gelation time of the polymer solutions at elevated temperature For the
delay in gelation time at elevated temperature chromium (IV) or formaldehyde are used but
their use in the field is complicated by significant health and environmental issues At
present many organic ligands are used for their delaying power with Cr(III)polymer and
Cr(OAc)3 polymer solutions and provides outstanding control over the gelation time over
60-135degC With the use of this gelation time spanning the range from several hours to one
month or more at temperature up to 120degC The most interesting features of the ligands like
glycolate malonate and salicylate are their gelation delaying power and cost which
provides gelation delays of 12 to 33 times longer than acetate The other ligands include
oxalate citrate maleate and EDTA which are characteristic by their extremely strong Cr
(III) binding capacity and are found to block gelation entirely (Lane 1998 Jain et al
2004)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
26
2432 Polyacrylamide-chromium (IV)-thiourea gel system
The chromium (VI)-Thiourea-polyacrylamide gels form as the result of two chemical
reactions First chromium (VI) is reduced to chromium (III) by thiourea Second the
produced chromium (III) reacts with carboxylate groups on the partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide to form a crosslinked gel The pH range for the reduction of chromium (VI)
to chromium (III) by thiourea is in the range of 40 to 50 Gel times on the order of days to
weeks can be achieved which is desirable to allow proper placement of the gel system in
the formation Another option is to use chromium (III) ligands like acetate lactate or
manolate
2433 Xanthan-Cr(III) gel system
The chromium (III)-xanthan gel systems have been widely recommended for matrix
treatment because they are shear thinning inject easily and have been claimed to reheal
after shearing (Chang et al 1985 1988 Kolnes et al 1991 Liang et al 1992 Nagra et
al 1996) The initial gelation rate of xanthan-chromium gel system is inversely
proportional to the hydrogen ion concentration and is strongly affected by pH in the porous
matrix (Storm et al 1991)
2434 Acrylamide-polymerchromium (III)-carboxylate gel system
The aqous acrylamide-polymercarboxylate gels are formed by crosslinking water soluble
acrylamide polymers with a Cr(III) carboxylate complex crosslinking agent (Sydansk
1990) The water soluble acrylamide polymer can be polyacrylamide partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide or tert-polymer containing acrylamide Acrylamide-polymerCr(III)
carboxylate gels can be used for near wellbore total shutoff treatments where matrix rock is
to be treated These are stable at elevated temperatures and they are stable and rigid at
225degF at elevated temperature These new matrix of gels are functional in the presence of
high salinity water at elevated temperatures (Sydansk 1988)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
27
2435 Polyacrylamide-aluminum citrate gel system
The aluminum citrate solution form gels with anionic polyacrylamide under certain
conditions Cationic polymers do not form gels with aluminum under similar conditions
The low pH aluminum system begins crosslinking with polymer solution immediately
even before it can be injected This prevents in depth penetration of the plugging solution
Because aluminum is known to be amphoteric in aqueous solution they can crosslink at
high pH environment
2436 Polyacrylamide-polyethyleneimine gel system
These gels are rigid and non-flowing at polyacrylamide concentration of 7 and 9 These
are thermally stable at 100degC and a permeability reduction of more than 94 was realized
indicating the possibility of using this system in profile modification jobs or water shutoff
2437 KUSP1-monoethylphthalate systemKUSP1-boric acid gel system
KUSP1 is a biopolymer that is extracted from a medium after the growth of the bacterium
cellumonasflavigena It is nontoxic and exhibit viscosities on the order of 2-3 cP at 25degC
KUSP1 is soluble in alkali but forms a gel with monoethylphthalate ester and permeability
reduction by treatment with the KUSP1-MEP system is stable to brine flow for periods of
up to six months Alkaline KUSP1 can also form gel with boric acid and the gelation time
of the KUSP1-boric acid system could be regulated up to several days by selection of pH
and boric acid concentrations (Vossoughi and Buller 1991)
2438 Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine gel
system
Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine system at acidic
conditions the gelation time was short and the gel did not last for a longer period of time
Chapter 2 Literature Review
28
High viscosity is obtained at high initial values This system can be used where formation
brine contains high concentration of divalent cations (ranges from 10000 to 15000 mgl)
Iron (III) can react with the polymer and accelerated the gelation process and produce a gel
that breaks over a short periods of time (Al-Muntasheri 2007) Hence it should not be used
after acid treatment jobs especially in sandstone reservoirs as the possibility of iron
concentration is high in the well bore area which can cause premature setting of gel This
system can be used at a temperature less than 140degC (Al-Muntasheri 2007 2006 2008)
2439 Polyacrylamide-phenol-formaldehyde gel systemspolyacrylamide-resorcinol
formaldehyde gel system
Phenol-Formaldehyde polymer gels system is an attractive tool fluid shutoff or profile
modification in high temperature formations By selecting between different polymer
compositions reasonable flexibility in the gelation time can be achieved over the
temperature range from 60degC to at least 140degC (Bryant et al 1997 Mahto et al 2009
2010) Choice of polymer composition permits the control of the gelation time and the
gelants display good injectivity even when the residence time approaches the gelation time
(Zhuang et al 2000 Banerjee et al 2006) Cross-linking occurs over a wide range of pH
and is insensitive to lithology (Seright and Martin 1993 Dovan et al 1997)
24310 Polyacrylamide-hydroquinone-hexamine gel system
Hexamethylenetetramine (HMTA) undergoes hydrolysis to produce methyldiol and
ammonia Methyldiol compound is very much unstable Hence it looses water molecules to
produce formaldehyde Thus formed formaldehyde is then reacting with hydroquinone
Hydroquinone undergoes electrophilic substitution reaction to produce 2356
tetramethylol hydroquinone (intermediate) Then intermediate react with partially
hydrolyzed polyacrylamide (PHPA) polymer Hence form a large viscous molecule Hence
OHmacr in methylol group of intermediate and H+ from amide group of polymer are leaving as
Chapter 2 Literature Review
29
a water molecule while producing N-C crosslinker (Dovan et al 1997 Gwaish et al 2008
Mahto and Sheikh 2009)
Table 22 Summary of thermally stable gels
Sl
No
Polymers Crosslinkers Comments
1 Polyacrylamide low mol wt
(Bryant et al 1996)
Cr(III) Acetate 5 or more polymer
needed
2 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Lockhart and Albonico 1994)
Cr(III) Molonate Slower gelation rate
than with Cr(III)
Acetate
3 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Bryant et al 1997 1997)
Phenol and
Formaldehyde
Ligands such as
citrate oxalate
lactate stabilized the
gel
4 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Gawish et al 2008)
Hydroquinone amp
Hexamethylenetetramine
2 sodium
carbonate needed
for softening and
stability
5 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Moradi 2000)
Terephthaladehyde
dihydroxynaphthalene
HMTA etc
Stable gel
6 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer (Moradi 2000)
Phenol formaldehyde Stable gel
7 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer
(Moradi 2000)
Phenyl acetate phenyl
salicylate etc with
HMTA
Stable gel lower
toxicity than phenol
amp formaldehyde gel
8 Acrylic esteracrylic acid Polyethyleneimine Stable gel required
Chapter 2 Literature Review
30
copolymer
(Moradi 2000)
larger concentration
amp cooling at below
93degC
9 Resorcinol
(Mahto et al 2009)
Formaldehyde Water like viscosity
of gelant is plus
toxicity is a problem
10 Scleroglucan
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Stable gel the
polymer is very
expensive
11 Lignosulfate
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Expensive gel due to
high chromium
required
12 Alcaligenes biopolymer PVA
(Moradi 2000)
Na+ phenol amp aldehyde Stable gel in pH
range of 7-8 higher
concentration of
polymer and
crosslinkers needed
13 PVA-polyvinylamide copolymer
(Hoskin and Shu 1989)
Dialdehydes or
polyaldehydes
Not widely used
14 Copolymer tert butyle acylate
(Al-Muntasheri et al 2006
2007)
Polyethyleneimine
15 Partially hydrolysed
polyacrylamide (Jia et al 2010
2011)
Polyethyleneimine
Chapter 2 Literature Review
31
25 SELECTION CRITERIA OF WELLS FOR GEL TREATMENT
Polymer gels can be applied to both injection and production wells (Al-Muntasheri et al
2010 Canbolat and Parlaktuna 2012) The objective of treating injection well is to
improve vertical injection profile resulting in more efficient distribution of injected water
(avery et al 1987) The production well treatment is to improve areal efficiency and to
reduce water oil ratio by reducing water channeling in the near wellbore region
(Giangiacomo 2001 Larson et al 1999 Ghafoori et al 2008) The following criterions
for candidate selection of injection and production wells are reported in the literature
(Maghsood and Bringham 1984 Sharma et al 2009)
251 Selection criteria for injection wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Low secondary oil recovery due to poor sweep efficiency that is high degree of
reservoir heterogeneity
(b) Pre-matured water breakthrough of producing wells
(c) Evidence of direct injector to producer channeling through fractures bugs or high
matrix permeability rock
(d) High injection rate associated with low well head pressure
252 Selection criteria for production wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Recovery calculations indicate that considerable mobile oil remains that could be
recovered most cost effectively if a blocking agent could be realistically placed in the
proper location
(b) High water oil ratio (WOR) values are observed
(c) The source of excess water production is identified (ie using profiles logs or
tracers)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
32
(d) The candidate well exhibits high productivity
26 DESIGNING GEL JOB FOR OIL FIELD APPLICATION
Gel volume is to be designed for both injection and production wells
261 Injection well
When cross flow occurs between thief zone and low permeability oil bearing zone a large
volume of gel is to be injected so that gel penetrates significant distance into the thief zone
(Romero et al 2003) In case where there is no cross flow ie thief zone is separated by an
impermeable barrierlayer from oil bearing zone a small volume of gel is placed near the
wellbore (Glenat et al 1996) Gel volume can be designed in two ways one is based on
filling a portion of channel volume from injector to producer and another is based on
distance from the injection well up to which the gel is to be placed (Parez et al 2001
Sarkissian et al 2005)
262 Production well
There are no definite design criteria available for bulk volume for producing well
treatment Gels with higher polymer concentrations are used in producing well (vs
injection well) treatment because the gel has to withstand high differential pressure in the
direction of producing wellbore (Glenat et al 1996 Giangiacomo 2001) Based on field
experience the following guidelines have been given
(a) Gel volume is equivalent to the volume of fluid that the well can produce in 24 hours
in a pumped-off condition
(b) Gel volume is based on 50 feet radius and thief zone thickness 0
(c) Gel volume is based on 50-200 barrels of gel per perforated foot
Chapter 2 Literature Review
33
26 CONCLUSIONS
The conclusion of the study provided strong evidence that stable gels can be produced
under harsh environmental conditions with organic and inorganic crosslinkers which may
be used for the profile modification jobs in the oil fields These crosslinkers typically
produced gels at temperature ranges from 40 degC to 140 degC and salinity up to 60000 ppm
They are generally less toxic then chromium acetate phenol and formaldehyde croslinkers
The majority of the crosslinkers are readily available at prices not much higher than the
toxic crosslinkers
Chapter 2 Literature Review
12
2215 Dehydration
Gels dehydrate when exposed to a high pressure gradient Dehydration causes shrinkage in
gel volume and loss of water
222 Gelation mechanism of most useful polymer gel systems used for profile
modification jobs
2221 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide and chromium
(III) gel system
Chromium (III) forms a complex ion in solution and reacts by a ligand-exchange reaction
with the carboxylate or hydrolysed group on the polymer molecules to form crosslinks
resulting in a network or gel In this gelation mechanism where one Cr (III) interacts two
carboxylic groups (Jain et al 2005)
C
CH
CH2
CH
C
O
CrOO
P
P
NH2
O
O C
CH
CH2
CHCH
O
P
NH2
P
Partially Hydrolyzed Polyacrlamide + Cr (III)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
13
2222 Gelation mechanism of polyacrylamide tert-butyl acrylate (PAtBA) copolymer
with polyethyleneimine (PEI)
There is two gelation mechanism involve for polyacrylamide tert-butyl acrylate (PAtBA)
copolymer with polyethyleneimine (PEI)
First is the formation of covalent bonds between the carbonyl carbon at the ester group and
an imine nitrogen from PEI
Figure 22 Cross-linking reaction with PEI through ester carbonyl carbon
(Hardy et al 1999 Al-Muntasheri et al 2007)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
14
Second is the PEI nitrogens form covalent bonds with the carbonyl carbons at the amide
group of PAtBA through a transamidation reaction
Figure 23 Cross-linking reaction with PEI through transamidation of the amide
group (Reddy et al 2003 Al-Muntasheri et al 2007)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
15
2223 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide-hexamine-
hydroquinone gel system (Yadav and Mahto 2013)
The hexamine on hydrolysis yields formaldehyde which then combines with hydroquinone
and form 2 3 5 6 tetramethylol hydroquinone Further partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide reacts with 2 3 5 6 tetramethylol hydroquinone and forms three
dimensional networks of polymer gel the different steps of which are as follows
Step I
In the initial step hexamine hydrolyses to yield formaldehyde
N
N N+ H2O CH2 OH +
O
C
H H
Formaldehyde
Hexamine
N
6 OH 4 NH3
_ H2O
Step II
Formaldehyde produced in step-I then react with hydroquinone to form a condensed
structure known as 2 3 5 6-tetramethylolhydroquinone
+
O
C
H H
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
Hydroquinone Formaldehyde 2 3 5 6-Tetramethylol Hydroquinone
OH
OH
4
Chapter 2 Literature Review
16
Step III
The condensed molecule formed in step-II then reacts with PHPA to form the 3-
dimensional gel structure which helps in profile modification jobs
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide
Partially Hydrolized Polyacrylamide (PHPA)
Amide
O-
Na+
+
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
2 3 5 6-Tetramethylol Hydroquinone
R
R
o N
H
H
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
HO
Water
Crosslinking 3-D gel structure
Chapter 2 Literature Review
17
2224 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide-hexamine-
pyrocatechol gel system (Yadav and Mahto 2012)
The hexamine on hydrolysis yields formaldehyde which then combines with pyrocatechol
and form 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol Further partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide reacts with 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol and forms three
dimensional networks of polymer gel the different steps of which are as follows
Step I
In the initial step hexamine hydrolyses to yield formaldehyde
N
N N+ H2O CH2 OH +
O
C
H H
Formaldehyde
Hexamine
N
6 OH 4 NH3
_ H2O
Chapter 2 Literature Review
18
Step II
Formaldehyde produced in step-I then react with pyrocatechol to form a condensed
structure known as 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol
+
O
C
H H
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
Pyrocatechol Formaldehyde 3 4 5 6 Tetramethylol Pyrocatechol
OH
4OH
Step III
The condensed molecule formed in step-II then reacts with PHPA to form the 3-
dimensional gel structure which helps in profile modification jobs
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide
Partially Hydrolized Polyacrylamide (PHPA)
Amide
O-
Na+
+
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
3 4 5 6 Tetramethylol Pyrocatechol
Chapter 2 Literature Review
19
R
R
o N
H
H
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
HO
Water
Crosslinking 3-D gel structure 3-D Structure of polymer gel
23 MATHEMATICAL FLOW MODELS FOR THE RHEOLOGICAL BEHAVIOR
OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS
Several rheological models are reported in literature for the determination of rheological
behavior of polymer gel solutions (Kelessidis and Maglione 2006 Park and Song 2010)
The Bingham model is expressed as
τ = τ + kγ
Fluids that exhibit Bingham plastic behavior are characterized by a yield point (τ0) and a
plastic viscosity (μp) that is independent of the shear rate
There are several rheological models that involve three or more adjustable parameters It is
necessary to include a third parameter to describe the flow of the fluids in the upper or
lower Newtonian region as well as the Power law region The Herschel-Bulkley model
Chapter 2 Literature Review
20
corrects this deficiency by replacing the plastic viscosity term in the Bingham model with a
Power law expression as follows
τ = τ + kγ
τ ndash Shear stress Pa
τ0 ndash Yield point Pa
K ndash Consistency index Pasn
γ ndash Shear rate s-1
n ndash Flow behavior index
The parameters K and n are similar to those of power law model For fluids having a yield
stress however the calculated values of n and K will be different from those calculated
using power law model The parameter τ0 is the fluidrsquos yield stress at zero shear rate In
theory this yield stress is identical to the Bingham plastic yield point (YP) though its
calculated value is different The model is reduce to the Bingham plastic model when n=1
and reduces to the power law rheological model when τ0=0
In a general way the rheological model proposed by Mizrahi-Berk may be gives a good fit
with most of the rheograms of polymer gel systems
τ = τ + kγ
While the power index of the shear rate (n) is generally less than 1 to show a shear-thinning
behavior neither the consistency index nor yield stress from the models shows any pattern
with the solids content
A nonlinear relation exits between the shear stress and the shear rate above the yield stress
There are a number of rheological models used to describe this behavior RobertsonndashStiff
(Ohen and Bick 2011) proposed a three-parameter yield-pseudo-plastic model for relating
the shear stress to the shear rate may be used in determination of rheological behavior of
polymer gel system as follows
Chapter 2 Literature Review
21
τ = k (γ + C)
Where k C and n are model parameters The RobertsonndashStiff model includes the
Newtonian Bingham plastic and power law models as special cases
24 DEVELOPMENT OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS USING DIFFERENT
CROSS-LINKERS
Cross-linked polymers have been widely used for profile modification jobs over the last
decades (Mahto and Sharma 2010)
241 Polymers used for profile modification jobs
The most commonly used polymers are the following
2411 PolyacrylamidePartially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
These are water soluble polymer whose monomeric unit is the acrylamide molecule The
polyacrylamide has undergoes partially hydrolysis which causes anionic carboxyl group to
be scattered along the backbone chain (Wever et al 2011) The polymers are called
partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamide is between 1x106 to 8x106 The size of the molecules
about 01 to 03 micro meters By hydrolysis in a caustic water solution some of the
CONH2 group react to form carbyl group (COOH)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
22
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide Amide
O-
Na+
Figure 24 Chemical structure of partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
2412 Xanthan gum
Xanthan gum is a polysaccharide with a a-D-glucose backbone like cellulose but every
second glucose unit is attached to a triaccharide consisting of mannose glucuronic acid
and mannose The mannose closest to the backbone has an acetic acid ester on carbon 6
and the mannose at the end of the triaccharide is linked through carbons 6 and 4 to the
second carbon of pyruvic acid Xanthan gum is produced by the bacterium Xanthomonas
campestris which is found on crucifereous vegetables such as cabbage and cauliflower
The negatively charged carboxyl group on the side chains because the molecules to form
very viscous fluids when mixed with water (Chatterji and Borchardt 1981 Taylor and
Nasr-El-Din 1998)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
23
Figure 25 Chemical structure of xanthan gum (Song et al 2006)
2413 Copolymers
The main copolymers used in profile modification jobs are copolymer of acrylamide ter
polymer with N-vinyle pyrrolidone and 2-acrylamide-2-methyl-1-propanesulfonic acid
(PAAm-VP-AMPS) amphoteric copolymer polyacrylonitrile and lignin sulphonate
Table 21 Properties of polyacrylamide and xanthan gum polymers
Sl
No
Property Polyacrylamide Xanthan Gum
1 Transition Metal
Cations
Easily crosslinked Easily crosslinked
2 Shear stability Undergoes irreversible
shear degradation
Reversible shear thining
Chapter 2 Literature Review
24
3 Thermal stability Maximum use upto 225-
250 (degF)
Maximum use 160-170 (degF)
4 Hydrolytic
stability
Hydrolysis promoted by
acid or base Partially
hydrolyzed product more
sensitive to Ca+2 Mg+2
Hydrolytic de-
polymerization promoted by
acid or base especially at
high temperature
5 Oxidative
stability
Susceptible Particularly susceptible
especially at high
temperature
6 Brine tolerance Very limited especially to
Ca+2 Mg+2
Good tolerance to mono and
divalent captions
7 Microbial
degradation
Susceptible to attack by
yeast fungi bacteria
Very susceptible in aerobic
conditions
242 Cross linkers used for profile modification jobs
Crosslinkers are the chemical compound which formed stable three dimensional structures
with high molecular weight polymers like polyacrylamide and xanthan gum
The cross-linkers used in cross-linking of the high molecular weight polymers are the
following
2421 Metallic crosslinkers
The most common metallic crosslinkers are Al+3 Cr+6 Cr+3 zirconium titanium boron etc
2422 Organic crosslinkers
Two classes of organic cross-linkers namely phenolic and aldehydes are used for profile
modification jobs The different cross-linkers in the phenolic group are phenol
hydroquinone resorcinol phenyl acetate salicylic alcohol furfuryl alcohol etc In the
Chapter 2 Literature Review
25
aldehyde group main crosslinkers are formaldehyde paraformaldehyde hexamethylene
tetra mine etc
243 Emerging developments of cross linked polymer gel systems
Polymer gel systems have emerged as one of the most effective conformance solution for
controlling of excessive water production worldwide The different cross-linked polymer
gel systems are the following (Moradi 2000 Mahto and Sharma 2010)
2431 Polyacrylamide-chromium (III) gel system
The short gelation time of Cr(III)-acetatepolymer composition at elevated temperature
limit their application to reservoirs that are at relatively at lower temperatures (Sydansk and
Southwell 2000) The existing gelation characteristics of these systems have limited
control over the gelation time of the polymer solutions at elevated temperature For the
delay in gelation time at elevated temperature chromium (IV) or formaldehyde are used but
their use in the field is complicated by significant health and environmental issues At
present many organic ligands are used for their delaying power with Cr(III)polymer and
Cr(OAc)3 polymer solutions and provides outstanding control over the gelation time over
60-135degC With the use of this gelation time spanning the range from several hours to one
month or more at temperature up to 120degC The most interesting features of the ligands like
glycolate malonate and salicylate are their gelation delaying power and cost which
provides gelation delays of 12 to 33 times longer than acetate The other ligands include
oxalate citrate maleate and EDTA which are characteristic by their extremely strong Cr
(III) binding capacity and are found to block gelation entirely (Lane 1998 Jain et al
2004)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
26
2432 Polyacrylamide-chromium (IV)-thiourea gel system
The chromium (VI)-Thiourea-polyacrylamide gels form as the result of two chemical
reactions First chromium (VI) is reduced to chromium (III) by thiourea Second the
produced chromium (III) reacts with carboxylate groups on the partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide to form a crosslinked gel The pH range for the reduction of chromium (VI)
to chromium (III) by thiourea is in the range of 40 to 50 Gel times on the order of days to
weeks can be achieved which is desirable to allow proper placement of the gel system in
the formation Another option is to use chromium (III) ligands like acetate lactate or
manolate
2433 Xanthan-Cr(III) gel system
The chromium (III)-xanthan gel systems have been widely recommended for matrix
treatment because they are shear thinning inject easily and have been claimed to reheal
after shearing (Chang et al 1985 1988 Kolnes et al 1991 Liang et al 1992 Nagra et
al 1996) The initial gelation rate of xanthan-chromium gel system is inversely
proportional to the hydrogen ion concentration and is strongly affected by pH in the porous
matrix (Storm et al 1991)
2434 Acrylamide-polymerchromium (III)-carboxylate gel system
The aqous acrylamide-polymercarboxylate gels are formed by crosslinking water soluble
acrylamide polymers with a Cr(III) carboxylate complex crosslinking agent (Sydansk
1990) The water soluble acrylamide polymer can be polyacrylamide partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide or tert-polymer containing acrylamide Acrylamide-polymerCr(III)
carboxylate gels can be used for near wellbore total shutoff treatments where matrix rock is
to be treated These are stable at elevated temperatures and they are stable and rigid at
225degF at elevated temperature These new matrix of gels are functional in the presence of
high salinity water at elevated temperatures (Sydansk 1988)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
27
2435 Polyacrylamide-aluminum citrate gel system
The aluminum citrate solution form gels with anionic polyacrylamide under certain
conditions Cationic polymers do not form gels with aluminum under similar conditions
The low pH aluminum system begins crosslinking with polymer solution immediately
even before it can be injected This prevents in depth penetration of the plugging solution
Because aluminum is known to be amphoteric in aqueous solution they can crosslink at
high pH environment
2436 Polyacrylamide-polyethyleneimine gel system
These gels are rigid and non-flowing at polyacrylamide concentration of 7 and 9 These
are thermally stable at 100degC and a permeability reduction of more than 94 was realized
indicating the possibility of using this system in profile modification jobs or water shutoff
2437 KUSP1-monoethylphthalate systemKUSP1-boric acid gel system
KUSP1 is a biopolymer that is extracted from a medium after the growth of the bacterium
cellumonasflavigena It is nontoxic and exhibit viscosities on the order of 2-3 cP at 25degC
KUSP1 is soluble in alkali but forms a gel with monoethylphthalate ester and permeability
reduction by treatment with the KUSP1-MEP system is stable to brine flow for periods of
up to six months Alkaline KUSP1 can also form gel with boric acid and the gelation time
of the KUSP1-boric acid system could be regulated up to several days by selection of pH
and boric acid concentrations (Vossoughi and Buller 1991)
2438 Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine gel
system
Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine system at acidic
conditions the gelation time was short and the gel did not last for a longer period of time
Chapter 2 Literature Review
28
High viscosity is obtained at high initial values This system can be used where formation
brine contains high concentration of divalent cations (ranges from 10000 to 15000 mgl)
Iron (III) can react with the polymer and accelerated the gelation process and produce a gel
that breaks over a short periods of time (Al-Muntasheri 2007) Hence it should not be used
after acid treatment jobs especially in sandstone reservoirs as the possibility of iron
concentration is high in the well bore area which can cause premature setting of gel This
system can be used at a temperature less than 140degC (Al-Muntasheri 2007 2006 2008)
2439 Polyacrylamide-phenol-formaldehyde gel systemspolyacrylamide-resorcinol
formaldehyde gel system
Phenol-Formaldehyde polymer gels system is an attractive tool fluid shutoff or profile
modification in high temperature formations By selecting between different polymer
compositions reasonable flexibility in the gelation time can be achieved over the
temperature range from 60degC to at least 140degC (Bryant et al 1997 Mahto et al 2009
2010) Choice of polymer composition permits the control of the gelation time and the
gelants display good injectivity even when the residence time approaches the gelation time
(Zhuang et al 2000 Banerjee et al 2006) Cross-linking occurs over a wide range of pH
and is insensitive to lithology (Seright and Martin 1993 Dovan et al 1997)
24310 Polyacrylamide-hydroquinone-hexamine gel system
Hexamethylenetetramine (HMTA) undergoes hydrolysis to produce methyldiol and
ammonia Methyldiol compound is very much unstable Hence it looses water molecules to
produce formaldehyde Thus formed formaldehyde is then reacting with hydroquinone
Hydroquinone undergoes electrophilic substitution reaction to produce 2356
tetramethylol hydroquinone (intermediate) Then intermediate react with partially
hydrolyzed polyacrylamide (PHPA) polymer Hence form a large viscous molecule Hence
OHmacr in methylol group of intermediate and H+ from amide group of polymer are leaving as
Chapter 2 Literature Review
29
a water molecule while producing N-C crosslinker (Dovan et al 1997 Gwaish et al 2008
Mahto and Sheikh 2009)
Table 22 Summary of thermally stable gels
Sl
No
Polymers Crosslinkers Comments
1 Polyacrylamide low mol wt
(Bryant et al 1996)
Cr(III) Acetate 5 or more polymer
needed
2 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Lockhart and Albonico 1994)
Cr(III) Molonate Slower gelation rate
than with Cr(III)
Acetate
3 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Bryant et al 1997 1997)
Phenol and
Formaldehyde
Ligands such as
citrate oxalate
lactate stabilized the
gel
4 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Gawish et al 2008)
Hydroquinone amp
Hexamethylenetetramine
2 sodium
carbonate needed
for softening and
stability
5 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Moradi 2000)
Terephthaladehyde
dihydroxynaphthalene
HMTA etc
Stable gel
6 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer (Moradi 2000)
Phenol formaldehyde Stable gel
7 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer
(Moradi 2000)
Phenyl acetate phenyl
salicylate etc with
HMTA
Stable gel lower
toxicity than phenol
amp formaldehyde gel
8 Acrylic esteracrylic acid Polyethyleneimine Stable gel required
Chapter 2 Literature Review
30
copolymer
(Moradi 2000)
larger concentration
amp cooling at below
93degC
9 Resorcinol
(Mahto et al 2009)
Formaldehyde Water like viscosity
of gelant is plus
toxicity is a problem
10 Scleroglucan
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Stable gel the
polymer is very
expensive
11 Lignosulfate
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Expensive gel due to
high chromium
required
12 Alcaligenes biopolymer PVA
(Moradi 2000)
Na+ phenol amp aldehyde Stable gel in pH
range of 7-8 higher
concentration of
polymer and
crosslinkers needed
13 PVA-polyvinylamide copolymer
(Hoskin and Shu 1989)
Dialdehydes or
polyaldehydes
Not widely used
14 Copolymer tert butyle acylate
(Al-Muntasheri et al 2006
2007)
Polyethyleneimine
15 Partially hydrolysed
polyacrylamide (Jia et al 2010
2011)
Polyethyleneimine
Chapter 2 Literature Review
31
25 SELECTION CRITERIA OF WELLS FOR GEL TREATMENT
Polymer gels can be applied to both injection and production wells (Al-Muntasheri et al
2010 Canbolat and Parlaktuna 2012) The objective of treating injection well is to
improve vertical injection profile resulting in more efficient distribution of injected water
(avery et al 1987) The production well treatment is to improve areal efficiency and to
reduce water oil ratio by reducing water channeling in the near wellbore region
(Giangiacomo 2001 Larson et al 1999 Ghafoori et al 2008) The following criterions
for candidate selection of injection and production wells are reported in the literature
(Maghsood and Bringham 1984 Sharma et al 2009)
251 Selection criteria for injection wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Low secondary oil recovery due to poor sweep efficiency that is high degree of
reservoir heterogeneity
(b) Pre-matured water breakthrough of producing wells
(c) Evidence of direct injector to producer channeling through fractures bugs or high
matrix permeability rock
(d) High injection rate associated with low well head pressure
252 Selection criteria for production wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Recovery calculations indicate that considerable mobile oil remains that could be
recovered most cost effectively if a blocking agent could be realistically placed in the
proper location
(b) High water oil ratio (WOR) values are observed
(c) The source of excess water production is identified (ie using profiles logs or
tracers)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
32
(d) The candidate well exhibits high productivity
26 DESIGNING GEL JOB FOR OIL FIELD APPLICATION
Gel volume is to be designed for both injection and production wells
261 Injection well
When cross flow occurs between thief zone and low permeability oil bearing zone a large
volume of gel is to be injected so that gel penetrates significant distance into the thief zone
(Romero et al 2003) In case where there is no cross flow ie thief zone is separated by an
impermeable barrierlayer from oil bearing zone a small volume of gel is placed near the
wellbore (Glenat et al 1996) Gel volume can be designed in two ways one is based on
filling a portion of channel volume from injector to producer and another is based on
distance from the injection well up to which the gel is to be placed (Parez et al 2001
Sarkissian et al 2005)
262 Production well
There are no definite design criteria available for bulk volume for producing well
treatment Gels with higher polymer concentrations are used in producing well (vs
injection well) treatment because the gel has to withstand high differential pressure in the
direction of producing wellbore (Glenat et al 1996 Giangiacomo 2001) Based on field
experience the following guidelines have been given
(a) Gel volume is equivalent to the volume of fluid that the well can produce in 24 hours
in a pumped-off condition
(b) Gel volume is based on 50 feet radius and thief zone thickness 0
(c) Gel volume is based on 50-200 barrels of gel per perforated foot
Chapter 2 Literature Review
33
26 CONCLUSIONS
The conclusion of the study provided strong evidence that stable gels can be produced
under harsh environmental conditions with organic and inorganic crosslinkers which may
be used for the profile modification jobs in the oil fields These crosslinkers typically
produced gels at temperature ranges from 40 degC to 140 degC and salinity up to 60000 ppm
They are generally less toxic then chromium acetate phenol and formaldehyde croslinkers
The majority of the crosslinkers are readily available at prices not much higher than the
toxic crosslinkers
Chapter 2 Literature Review
13
2222 Gelation mechanism of polyacrylamide tert-butyl acrylate (PAtBA) copolymer
with polyethyleneimine (PEI)
There is two gelation mechanism involve for polyacrylamide tert-butyl acrylate (PAtBA)
copolymer with polyethyleneimine (PEI)
First is the formation of covalent bonds between the carbonyl carbon at the ester group and
an imine nitrogen from PEI
Figure 22 Cross-linking reaction with PEI through ester carbonyl carbon
(Hardy et al 1999 Al-Muntasheri et al 2007)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
14
Second is the PEI nitrogens form covalent bonds with the carbonyl carbons at the amide
group of PAtBA through a transamidation reaction
Figure 23 Cross-linking reaction with PEI through transamidation of the amide
group (Reddy et al 2003 Al-Muntasheri et al 2007)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
15
2223 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide-hexamine-
hydroquinone gel system (Yadav and Mahto 2013)
The hexamine on hydrolysis yields formaldehyde which then combines with hydroquinone
and form 2 3 5 6 tetramethylol hydroquinone Further partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide reacts with 2 3 5 6 tetramethylol hydroquinone and forms three
dimensional networks of polymer gel the different steps of which are as follows
Step I
In the initial step hexamine hydrolyses to yield formaldehyde
N
N N+ H2O CH2 OH +
O
C
H H
Formaldehyde
Hexamine
N
6 OH 4 NH3
_ H2O
Step II
Formaldehyde produced in step-I then react with hydroquinone to form a condensed
structure known as 2 3 5 6-tetramethylolhydroquinone
+
O
C
H H
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
Hydroquinone Formaldehyde 2 3 5 6-Tetramethylol Hydroquinone
OH
OH
4
Chapter 2 Literature Review
16
Step III
The condensed molecule formed in step-II then reacts with PHPA to form the 3-
dimensional gel structure which helps in profile modification jobs
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide
Partially Hydrolized Polyacrylamide (PHPA)
Amide
O-
Na+
+
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
2 3 5 6-Tetramethylol Hydroquinone
R
R
o N
H
H
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
HO
Water
Crosslinking 3-D gel structure
Chapter 2 Literature Review
17
2224 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide-hexamine-
pyrocatechol gel system (Yadav and Mahto 2012)
The hexamine on hydrolysis yields formaldehyde which then combines with pyrocatechol
and form 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol Further partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide reacts with 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol and forms three
dimensional networks of polymer gel the different steps of which are as follows
Step I
In the initial step hexamine hydrolyses to yield formaldehyde
N
N N+ H2O CH2 OH +
O
C
H H
Formaldehyde
Hexamine
N
6 OH 4 NH3
_ H2O
Chapter 2 Literature Review
18
Step II
Formaldehyde produced in step-I then react with pyrocatechol to form a condensed
structure known as 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol
+
O
C
H H
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
Pyrocatechol Formaldehyde 3 4 5 6 Tetramethylol Pyrocatechol
OH
4OH
Step III
The condensed molecule formed in step-II then reacts with PHPA to form the 3-
dimensional gel structure which helps in profile modification jobs
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide
Partially Hydrolized Polyacrylamide (PHPA)
Amide
O-
Na+
+
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
3 4 5 6 Tetramethylol Pyrocatechol
Chapter 2 Literature Review
19
R
R
o N
H
H
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
HO
Water
Crosslinking 3-D gel structure 3-D Structure of polymer gel
23 MATHEMATICAL FLOW MODELS FOR THE RHEOLOGICAL BEHAVIOR
OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS
Several rheological models are reported in literature for the determination of rheological
behavior of polymer gel solutions (Kelessidis and Maglione 2006 Park and Song 2010)
The Bingham model is expressed as
τ = τ + kγ
Fluids that exhibit Bingham plastic behavior are characterized by a yield point (τ0) and a
plastic viscosity (μp) that is independent of the shear rate
There are several rheological models that involve three or more adjustable parameters It is
necessary to include a third parameter to describe the flow of the fluids in the upper or
lower Newtonian region as well as the Power law region The Herschel-Bulkley model
Chapter 2 Literature Review
20
corrects this deficiency by replacing the plastic viscosity term in the Bingham model with a
Power law expression as follows
τ = τ + kγ
τ ndash Shear stress Pa
τ0 ndash Yield point Pa
K ndash Consistency index Pasn
γ ndash Shear rate s-1
n ndash Flow behavior index
The parameters K and n are similar to those of power law model For fluids having a yield
stress however the calculated values of n and K will be different from those calculated
using power law model The parameter τ0 is the fluidrsquos yield stress at zero shear rate In
theory this yield stress is identical to the Bingham plastic yield point (YP) though its
calculated value is different The model is reduce to the Bingham plastic model when n=1
and reduces to the power law rheological model when τ0=0
In a general way the rheological model proposed by Mizrahi-Berk may be gives a good fit
with most of the rheograms of polymer gel systems
τ = τ + kγ
While the power index of the shear rate (n) is generally less than 1 to show a shear-thinning
behavior neither the consistency index nor yield stress from the models shows any pattern
with the solids content
A nonlinear relation exits between the shear stress and the shear rate above the yield stress
There are a number of rheological models used to describe this behavior RobertsonndashStiff
(Ohen and Bick 2011) proposed a three-parameter yield-pseudo-plastic model for relating
the shear stress to the shear rate may be used in determination of rheological behavior of
polymer gel system as follows
Chapter 2 Literature Review
21
τ = k (γ + C)
Where k C and n are model parameters The RobertsonndashStiff model includes the
Newtonian Bingham plastic and power law models as special cases
24 DEVELOPMENT OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS USING DIFFERENT
CROSS-LINKERS
Cross-linked polymers have been widely used for profile modification jobs over the last
decades (Mahto and Sharma 2010)
241 Polymers used for profile modification jobs
The most commonly used polymers are the following
2411 PolyacrylamidePartially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
These are water soluble polymer whose monomeric unit is the acrylamide molecule The
polyacrylamide has undergoes partially hydrolysis which causes anionic carboxyl group to
be scattered along the backbone chain (Wever et al 2011) The polymers are called
partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamide is between 1x106 to 8x106 The size of the molecules
about 01 to 03 micro meters By hydrolysis in a caustic water solution some of the
CONH2 group react to form carbyl group (COOH)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
22
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide Amide
O-
Na+
Figure 24 Chemical structure of partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
2412 Xanthan gum
Xanthan gum is a polysaccharide with a a-D-glucose backbone like cellulose but every
second glucose unit is attached to a triaccharide consisting of mannose glucuronic acid
and mannose The mannose closest to the backbone has an acetic acid ester on carbon 6
and the mannose at the end of the triaccharide is linked through carbons 6 and 4 to the
second carbon of pyruvic acid Xanthan gum is produced by the bacterium Xanthomonas
campestris which is found on crucifereous vegetables such as cabbage and cauliflower
The negatively charged carboxyl group on the side chains because the molecules to form
very viscous fluids when mixed with water (Chatterji and Borchardt 1981 Taylor and
Nasr-El-Din 1998)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
23
Figure 25 Chemical structure of xanthan gum (Song et al 2006)
2413 Copolymers
The main copolymers used in profile modification jobs are copolymer of acrylamide ter
polymer with N-vinyle pyrrolidone and 2-acrylamide-2-methyl-1-propanesulfonic acid
(PAAm-VP-AMPS) amphoteric copolymer polyacrylonitrile and lignin sulphonate
Table 21 Properties of polyacrylamide and xanthan gum polymers
Sl
No
Property Polyacrylamide Xanthan Gum
1 Transition Metal
Cations
Easily crosslinked Easily crosslinked
2 Shear stability Undergoes irreversible
shear degradation
Reversible shear thining
Chapter 2 Literature Review
24
3 Thermal stability Maximum use upto 225-
250 (degF)
Maximum use 160-170 (degF)
4 Hydrolytic
stability
Hydrolysis promoted by
acid or base Partially
hydrolyzed product more
sensitive to Ca+2 Mg+2
Hydrolytic de-
polymerization promoted by
acid or base especially at
high temperature
5 Oxidative
stability
Susceptible Particularly susceptible
especially at high
temperature
6 Brine tolerance Very limited especially to
Ca+2 Mg+2
Good tolerance to mono and
divalent captions
7 Microbial
degradation
Susceptible to attack by
yeast fungi bacteria
Very susceptible in aerobic
conditions
242 Cross linkers used for profile modification jobs
Crosslinkers are the chemical compound which formed stable three dimensional structures
with high molecular weight polymers like polyacrylamide and xanthan gum
The cross-linkers used in cross-linking of the high molecular weight polymers are the
following
2421 Metallic crosslinkers
The most common metallic crosslinkers are Al+3 Cr+6 Cr+3 zirconium titanium boron etc
2422 Organic crosslinkers
Two classes of organic cross-linkers namely phenolic and aldehydes are used for profile
modification jobs The different cross-linkers in the phenolic group are phenol
hydroquinone resorcinol phenyl acetate salicylic alcohol furfuryl alcohol etc In the
Chapter 2 Literature Review
25
aldehyde group main crosslinkers are formaldehyde paraformaldehyde hexamethylene
tetra mine etc
243 Emerging developments of cross linked polymer gel systems
Polymer gel systems have emerged as one of the most effective conformance solution for
controlling of excessive water production worldwide The different cross-linked polymer
gel systems are the following (Moradi 2000 Mahto and Sharma 2010)
2431 Polyacrylamide-chromium (III) gel system
The short gelation time of Cr(III)-acetatepolymer composition at elevated temperature
limit their application to reservoirs that are at relatively at lower temperatures (Sydansk and
Southwell 2000) The existing gelation characteristics of these systems have limited
control over the gelation time of the polymer solutions at elevated temperature For the
delay in gelation time at elevated temperature chromium (IV) or formaldehyde are used but
their use in the field is complicated by significant health and environmental issues At
present many organic ligands are used for their delaying power with Cr(III)polymer and
Cr(OAc)3 polymer solutions and provides outstanding control over the gelation time over
60-135degC With the use of this gelation time spanning the range from several hours to one
month or more at temperature up to 120degC The most interesting features of the ligands like
glycolate malonate and salicylate are their gelation delaying power and cost which
provides gelation delays of 12 to 33 times longer than acetate The other ligands include
oxalate citrate maleate and EDTA which are characteristic by their extremely strong Cr
(III) binding capacity and are found to block gelation entirely (Lane 1998 Jain et al
2004)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
26
2432 Polyacrylamide-chromium (IV)-thiourea gel system
The chromium (VI)-Thiourea-polyacrylamide gels form as the result of two chemical
reactions First chromium (VI) is reduced to chromium (III) by thiourea Second the
produced chromium (III) reacts with carboxylate groups on the partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide to form a crosslinked gel The pH range for the reduction of chromium (VI)
to chromium (III) by thiourea is in the range of 40 to 50 Gel times on the order of days to
weeks can be achieved which is desirable to allow proper placement of the gel system in
the formation Another option is to use chromium (III) ligands like acetate lactate or
manolate
2433 Xanthan-Cr(III) gel system
The chromium (III)-xanthan gel systems have been widely recommended for matrix
treatment because they are shear thinning inject easily and have been claimed to reheal
after shearing (Chang et al 1985 1988 Kolnes et al 1991 Liang et al 1992 Nagra et
al 1996) The initial gelation rate of xanthan-chromium gel system is inversely
proportional to the hydrogen ion concentration and is strongly affected by pH in the porous
matrix (Storm et al 1991)
2434 Acrylamide-polymerchromium (III)-carboxylate gel system
The aqous acrylamide-polymercarboxylate gels are formed by crosslinking water soluble
acrylamide polymers with a Cr(III) carboxylate complex crosslinking agent (Sydansk
1990) The water soluble acrylamide polymer can be polyacrylamide partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide or tert-polymer containing acrylamide Acrylamide-polymerCr(III)
carboxylate gels can be used for near wellbore total shutoff treatments where matrix rock is
to be treated These are stable at elevated temperatures and they are stable and rigid at
225degF at elevated temperature These new matrix of gels are functional in the presence of
high salinity water at elevated temperatures (Sydansk 1988)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
27
2435 Polyacrylamide-aluminum citrate gel system
The aluminum citrate solution form gels with anionic polyacrylamide under certain
conditions Cationic polymers do not form gels with aluminum under similar conditions
The low pH aluminum system begins crosslinking with polymer solution immediately
even before it can be injected This prevents in depth penetration of the plugging solution
Because aluminum is known to be amphoteric in aqueous solution they can crosslink at
high pH environment
2436 Polyacrylamide-polyethyleneimine gel system
These gels are rigid and non-flowing at polyacrylamide concentration of 7 and 9 These
are thermally stable at 100degC and a permeability reduction of more than 94 was realized
indicating the possibility of using this system in profile modification jobs or water shutoff
2437 KUSP1-monoethylphthalate systemKUSP1-boric acid gel system
KUSP1 is a biopolymer that is extracted from a medium after the growth of the bacterium
cellumonasflavigena It is nontoxic and exhibit viscosities on the order of 2-3 cP at 25degC
KUSP1 is soluble in alkali but forms a gel with monoethylphthalate ester and permeability
reduction by treatment with the KUSP1-MEP system is stable to brine flow for periods of
up to six months Alkaline KUSP1 can also form gel with boric acid and the gelation time
of the KUSP1-boric acid system could be regulated up to several days by selection of pH
and boric acid concentrations (Vossoughi and Buller 1991)
2438 Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine gel
system
Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine system at acidic
conditions the gelation time was short and the gel did not last for a longer period of time
Chapter 2 Literature Review
28
High viscosity is obtained at high initial values This system can be used where formation
brine contains high concentration of divalent cations (ranges from 10000 to 15000 mgl)
Iron (III) can react with the polymer and accelerated the gelation process and produce a gel
that breaks over a short periods of time (Al-Muntasheri 2007) Hence it should not be used
after acid treatment jobs especially in sandstone reservoirs as the possibility of iron
concentration is high in the well bore area which can cause premature setting of gel This
system can be used at a temperature less than 140degC (Al-Muntasheri 2007 2006 2008)
2439 Polyacrylamide-phenol-formaldehyde gel systemspolyacrylamide-resorcinol
formaldehyde gel system
Phenol-Formaldehyde polymer gels system is an attractive tool fluid shutoff or profile
modification in high temperature formations By selecting between different polymer
compositions reasonable flexibility in the gelation time can be achieved over the
temperature range from 60degC to at least 140degC (Bryant et al 1997 Mahto et al 2009
2010) Choice of polymer composition permits the control of the gelation time and the
gelants display good injectivity even when the residence time approaches the gelation time
(Zhuang et al 2000 Banerjee et al 2006) Cross-linking occurs over a wide range of pH
and is insensitive to lithology (Seright and Martin 1993 Dovan et al 1997)
24310 Polyacrylamide-hydroquinone-hexamine gel system
Hexamethylenetetramine (HMTA) undergoes hydrolysis to produce methyldiol and
ammonia Methyldiol compound is very much unstable Hence it looses water molecules to
produce formaldehyde Thus formed formaldehyde is then reacting with hydroquinone
Hydroquinone undergoes electrophilic substitution reaction to produce 2356
tetramethylol hydroquinone (intermediate) Then intermediate react with partially
hydrolyzed polyacrylamide (PHPA) polymer Hence form a large viscous molecule Hence
OHmacr in methylol group of intermediate and H+ from amide group of polymer are leaving as
Chapter 2 Literature Review
29
a water molecule while producing N-C crosslinker (Dovan et al 1997 Gwaish et al 2008
Mahto and Sheikh 2009)
Table 22 Summary of thermally stable gels
Sl
No
Polymers Crosslinkers Comments
1 Polyacrylamide low mol wt
(Bryant et al 1996)
Cr(III) Acetate 5 or more polymer
needed
2 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Lockhart and Albonico 1994)
Cr(III) Molonate Slower gelation rate
than with Cr(III)
Acetate
3 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Bryant et al 1997 1997)
Phenol and
Formaldehyde
Ligands such as
citrate oxalate
lactate stabilized the
gel
4 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Gawish et al 2008)
Hydroquinone amp
Hexamethylenetetramine
2 sodium
carbonate needed
for softening and
stability
5 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Moradi 2000)
Terephthaladehyde
dihydroxynaphthalene
HMTA etc
Stable gel
6 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer (Moradi 2000)
Phenol formaldehyde Stable gel
7 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer
(Moradi 2000)
Phenyl acetate phenyl
salicylate etc with
HMTA
Stable gel lower
toxicity than phenol
amp formaldehyde gel
8 Acrylic esteracrylic acid Polyethyleneimine Stable gel required
Chapter 2 Literature Review
30
copolymer
(Moradi 2000)
larger concentration
amp cooling at below
93degC
9 Resorcinol
(Mahto et al 2009)
Formaldehyde Water like viscosity
of gelant is plus
toxicity is a problem
10 Scleroglucan
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Stable gel the
polymer is very
expensive
11 Lignosulfate
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Expensive gel due to
high chromium
required
12 Alcaligenes biopolymer PVA
(Moradi 2000)
Na+ phenol amp aldehyde Stable gel in pH
range of 7-8 higher
concentration of
polymer and
crosslinkers needed
13 PVA-polyvinylamide copolymer
(Hoskin and Shu 1989)
Dialdehydes or
polyaldehydes
Not widely used
14 Copolymer tert butyle acylate
(Al-Muntasheri et al 2006
2007)
Polyethyleneimine
15 Partially hydrolysed
polyacrylamide (Jia et al 2010
2011)
Polyethyleneimine
Chapter 2 Literature Review
31
25 SELECTION CRITERIA OF WELLS FOR GEL TREATMENT
Polymer gels can be applied to both injection and production wells (Al-Muntasheri et al
2010 Canbolat and Parlaktuna 2012) The objective of treating injection well is to
improve vertical injection profile resulting in more efficient distribution of injected water
(avery et al 1987) The production well treatment is to improve areal efficiency and to
reduce water oil ratio by reducing water channeling in the near wellbore region
(Giangiacomo 2001 Larson et al 1999 Ghafoori et al 2008) The following criterions
for candidate selection of injection and production wells are reported in the literature
(Maghsood and Bringham 1984 Sharma et al 2009)
251 Selection criteria for injection wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Low secondary oil recovery due to poor sweep efficiency that is high degree of
reservoir heterogeneity
(b) Pre-matured water breakthrough of producing wells
(c) Evidence of direct injector to producer channeling through fractures bugs or high
matrix permeability rock
(d) High injection rate associated with low well head pressure
252 Selection criteria for production wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Recovery calculations indicate that considerable mobile oil remains that could be
recovered most cost effectively if a blocking agent could be realistically placed in the
proper location
(b) High water oil ratio (WOR) values are observed
(c) The source of excess water production is identified (ie using profiles logs or
tracers)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
32
(d) The candidate well exhibits high productivity
26 DESIGNING GEL JOB FOR OIL FIELD APPLICATION
Gel volume is to be designed for both injection and production wells
261 Injection well
When cross flow occurs between thief zone and low permeability oil bearing zone a large
volume of gel is to be injected so that gel penetrates significant distance into the thief zone
(Romero et al 2003) In case where there is no cross flow ie thief zone is separated by an
impermeable barrierlayer from oil bearing zone a small volume of gel is placed near the
wellbore (Glenat et al 1996) Gel volume can be designed in two ways one is based on
filling a portion of channel volume from injector to producer and another is based on
distance from the injection well up to which the gel is to be placed (Parez et al 2001
Sarkissian et al 2005)
262 Production well
There are no definite design criteria available for bulk volume for producing well
treatment Gels with higher polymer concentrations are used in producing well (vs
injection well) treatment because the gel has to withstand high differential pressure in the
direction of producing wellbore (Glenat et al 1996 Giangiacomo 2001) Based on field
experience the following guidelines have been given
(a) Gel volume is equivalent to the volume of fluid that the well can produce in 24 hours
in a pumped-off condition
(b) Gel volume is based on 50 feet radius and thief zone thickness 0
(c) Gel volume is based on 50-200 barrels of gel per perforated foot
Chapter 2 Literature Review
33
26 CONCLUSIONS
The conclusion of the study provided strong evidence that stable gels can be produced
under harsh environmental conditions with organic and inorganic crosslinkers which may
be used for the profile modification jobs in the oil fields These crosslinkers typically
produced gels at temperature ranges from 40 degC to 140 degC and salinity up to 60000 ppm
They are generally less toxic then chromium acetate phenol and formaldehyde croslinkers
The majority of the crosslinkers are readily available at prices not much higher than the
toxic crosslinkers
Chapter 2 Literature Review
14
Second is the PEI nitrogens form covalent bonds with the carbonyl carbons at the amide
group of PAtBA through a transamidation reaction
Figure 23 Cross-linking reaction with PEI through transamidation of the amide
group (Reddy et al 2003 Al-Muntasheri et al 2007)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
15
2223 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide-hexamine-
hydroquinone gel system (Yadav and Mahto 2013)
The hexamine on hydrolysis yields formaldehyde which then combines with hydroquinone
and form 2 3 5 6 tetramethylol hydroquinone Further partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide reacts with 2 3 5 6 tetramethylol hydroquinone and forms three
dimensional networks of polymer gel the different steps of which are as follows
Step I
In the initial step hexamine hydrolyses to yield formaldehyde
N
N N+ H2O CH2 OH +
O
C
H H
Formaldehyde
Hexamine
N
6 OH 4 NH3
_ H2O
Step II
Formaldehyde produced in step-I then react with hydroquinone to form a condensed
structure known as 2 3 5 6-tetramethylolhydroquinone
+
O
C
H H
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
Hydroquinone Formaldehyde 2 3 5 6-Tetramethylol Hydroquinone
OH
OH
4
Chapter 2 Literature Review
16
Step III
The condensed molecule formed in step-II then reacts with PHPA to form the 3-
dimensional gel structure which helps in profile modification jobs
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide
Partially Hydrolized Polyacrylamide (PHPA)
Amide
O-
Na+
+
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
2 3 5 6-Tetramethylol Hydroquinone
R
R
o N
H
H
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
HO
Water
Crosslinking 3-D gel structure
Chapter 2 Literature Review
17
2224 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide-hexamine-
pyrocatechol gel system (Yadav and Mahto 2012)
The hexamine on hydrolysis yields formaldehyde which then combines with pyrocatechol
and form 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol Further partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide reacts with 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol and forms three
dimensional networks of polymer gel the different steps of which are as follows
Step I
In the initial step hexamine hydrolyses to yield formaldehyde
N
N N+ H2O CH2 OH +
O
C
H H
Formaldehyde
Hexamine
N
6 OH 4 NH3
_ H2O
Chapter 2 Literature Review
18
Step II
Formaldehyde produced in step-I then react with pyrocatechol to form a condensed
structure known as 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol
+
O
C
H H
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
Pyrocatechol Formaldehyde 3 4 5 6 Tetramethylol Pyrocatechol
OH
4OH
Step III
The condensed molecule formed in step-II then reacts with PHPA to form the 3-
dimensional gel structure which helps in profile modification jobs
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide
Partially Hydrolized Polyacrylamide (PHPA)
Amide
O-
Na+
+
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
3 4 5 6 Tetramethylol Pyrocatechol
Chapter 2 Literature Review
19
R
R
o N
H
H
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
HO
Water
Crosslinking 3-D gel structure 3-D Structure of polymer gel
23 MATHEMATICAL FLOW MODELS FOR THE RHEOLOGICAL BEHAVIOR
OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS
Several rheological models are reported in literature for the determination of rheological
behavior of polymer gel solutions (Kelessidis and Maglione 2006 Park and Song 2010)
The Bingham model is expressed as
τ = τ + kγ
Fluids that exhibit Bingham plastic behavior are characterized by a yield point (τ0) and a
plastic viscosity (μp) that is independent of the shear rate
There are several rheological models that involve three or more adjustable parameters It is
necessary to include a third parameter to describe the flow of the fluids in the upper or
lower Newtonian region as well as the Power law region The Herschel-Bulkley model
Chapter 2 Literature Review
20
corrects this deficiency by replacing the plastic viscosity term in the Bingham model with a
Power law expression as follows
τ = τ + kγ
τ ndash Shear stress Pa
τ0 ndash Yield point Pa
K ndash Consistency index Pasn
γ ndash Shear rate s-1
n ndash Flow behavior index
The parameters K and n are similar to those of power law model For fluids having a yield
stress however the calculated values of n and K will be different from those calculated
using power law model The parameter τ0 is the fluidrsquos yield stress at zero shear rate In
theory this yield stress is identical to the Bingham plastic yield point (YP) though its
calculated value is different The model is reduce to the Bingham plastic model when n=1
and reduces to the power law rheological model when τ0=0
In a general way the rheological model proposed by Mizrahi-Berk may be gives a good fit
with most of the rheograms of polymer gel systems
τ = τ + kγ
While the power index of the shear rate (n) is generally less than 1 to show a shear-thinning
behavior neither the consistency index nor yield stress from the models shows any pattern
with the solids content
A nonlinear relation exits between the shear stress and the shear rate above the yield stress
There are a number of rheological models used to describe this behavior RobertsonndashStiff
(Ohen and Bick 2011) proposed a three-parameter yield-pseudo-plastic model for relating
the shear stress to the shear rate may be used in determination of rheological behavior of
polymer gel system as follows
Chapter 2 Literature Review
21
τ = k (γ + C)
Where k C and n are model parameters The RobertsonndashStiff model includes the
Newtonian Bingham plastic and power law models as special cases
24 DEVELOPMENT OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS USING DIFFERENT
CROSS-LINKERS
Cross-linked polymers have been widely used for profile modification jobs over the last
decades (Mahto and Sharma 2010)
241 Polymers used for profile modification jobs
The most commonly used polymers are the following
2411 PolyacrylamidePartially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
These are water soluble polymer whose monomeric unit is the acrylamide molecule The
polyacrylamide has undergoes partially hydrolysis which causes anionic carboxyl group to
be scattered along the backbone chain (Wever et al 2011) The polymers are called
partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamide is between 1x106 to 8x106 The size of the molecules
about 01 to 03 micro meters By hydrolysis in a caustic water solution some of the
CONH2 group react to form carbyl group (COOH)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
22
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide Amide
O-
Na+
Figure 24 Chemical structure of partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
2412 Xanthan gum
Xanthan gum is a polysaccharide with a a-D-glucose backbone like cellulose but every
second glucose unit is attached to a triaccharide consisting of mannose glucuronic acid
and mannose The mannose closest to the backbone has an acetic acid ester on carbon 6
and the mannose at the end of the triaccharide is linked through carbons 6 and 4 to the
second carbon of pyruvic acid Xanthan gum is produced by the bacterium Xanthomonas
campestris which is found on crucifereous vegetables such as cabbage and cauliflower
The negatively charged carboxyl group on the side chains because the molecules to form
very viscous fluids when mixed with water (Chatterji and Borchardt 1981 Taylor and
Nasr-El-Din 1998)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
23
Figure 25 Chemical structure of xanthan gum (Song et al 2006)
2413 Copolymers
The main copolymers used in profile modification jobs are copolymer of acrylamide ter
polymer with N-vinyle pyrrolidone and 2-acrylamide-2-methyl-1-propanesulfonic acid
(PAAm-VP-AMPS) amphoteric copolymer polyacrylonitrile and lignin sulphonate
Table 21 Properties of polyacrylamide and xanthan gum polymers
Sl
No
Property Polyacrylamide Xanthan Gum
1 Transition Metal
Cations
Easily crosslinked Easily crosslinked
2 Shear stability Undergoes irreversible
shear degradation
Reversible shear thining
Chapter 2 Literature Review
24
3 Thermal stability Maximum use upto 225-
250 (degF)
Maximum use 160-170 (degF)
4 Hydrolytic
stability
Hydrolysis promoted by
acid or base Partially
hydrolyzed product more
sensitive to Ca+2 Mg+2
Hydrolytic de-
polymerization promoted by
acid or base especially at
high temperature
5 Oxidative
stability
Susceptible Particularly susceptible
especially at high
temperature
6 Brine tolerance Very limited especially to
Ca+2 Mg+2
Good tolerance to mono and
divalent captions
7 Microbial
degradation
Susceptible to attack by
yeast fungi bacteria
Very susceptible in aerobic
conditions
242 Cross linkers used for profile modification jobs
Crosslinkers are the chemical compound which formed stable three dimensional structures
with high molecular weight polymers like polyacrylamide and xanthan gum
The cross-linkers used in cross-linking of the high molecular weight polymers are the
following
2421 Metallic crosslinkers
The most common metallic crosslinkers are Al+3 Cr+6 Cr+3 zirconium titanium boron etc
2422 Organic crosslinkers
Two classes of organic cross-linkers namely phenolic and aldehydes are used for profile
modification jobs The different cross-linkers in the phenolic group are phenol
hydroquinone resorcinol phenyl acetate salicylic alcohol furfuryl alcohol etc In the
Chapter 2 Literature Review
25
aldehyde group main crosslinkers are formaldehyde paraformaldehyde hexamethylene
tetra mine etc
243 Emerging developments of cross linked polymer gel systems
Polymer gel systems have emerged as one of the most effective conformance solution for
controlling of excessive water production worldwide The different cross-linked polymer
gel systems are the following (Moradi 2000 Mahto and Sharma 2010)
2431 Polyacrylamide-chromium (III) gel system
The short gelation time of Cr(III)-acetatepolymer composition at elevated temperature
limit their application to reservoirs that are at relatively at lower temperatures (Sydansk and
Southwell 2000) The existing gelation characteristics of these systems have limited
control over the gelation time of the polymer solutions at elevated temperature For the
delay in gelation time at elevated temperature chromium (IV) or formaldehyde are used but
their use in the field is complicated by significant health and environmental issues At
present many organic ligands are used for their delaying power with Cr(III)polymer and
Cr(OAc)3 polymer solutions and provides outstanding control over the gelation time over
60-135degC With the use of this gelation time spanning the range from several hours to one
month or more at temperature up to 120degC The most interesting features of the ligands like
glycolate malonate and salicylate are their gelation delaying power and cost which
provides gelation delays of 12 to 33 times longer than acetate The other ligands include
oxalate citrate maleate and EDTA which are characteristic by their extremely strong Cr
(III) binding capacity and are found to block gelation entirely (Lane 1998 Jain et al
2004)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
26
2432 Polyacrylamide-chromium (IV)-thiourea gel system
The chromium (VI)-Thiourea-polyacrylamide gels form as the result of two chemical
reactions First chromium (VI) is reduced to chromium (III) by thiourea Second the
produced chromium (III) reacts with carboxylate groups on the partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide to form a crosslinked gel The pH range for the reduction of chromium (VI)
to chromium (III) by thiourea is in the range of 40 to 50 Gel times on the order of days to
weeks can be achieved which is desirable to allow proper placement of the gel system in
the formation Another option is to use chromium (III) ligands like acetate lactate or
manolate
2433 Xanthan-Cr(III) gel system
The chromium (III)-xanthan gel systems have been widely recommended for matrix
treatment because they are shear thinning inject easily and have been claimed to reheal
after shearing (Chang et al 1985 1988 Kolnes et al 1991 Liang et al 1992 Nagra et
al 1996) The initial gelation rate of xanthan-chromium gel system is inversely
proportional to the hydrogen ion concentration and is strongly affected by pH in the porous
matrix (Storm et al 1991)
2434 Acrylamide-polymerchromium (III)-carboxylate gel system
The aqous acrylamide-polymercarboxylate gels are formed by crosslinking water soluble
acrylamide polymers with a Cr(III) carboxylate complex crosslinking agent (Sydansk
1990) The water soluble acrylamide polymer can be polyacrylamide partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide or tert-polymer containing acrylamide Acrylamide-polymerCr(III)
carboxylate gels can be used for near wellbore total shutoff treatments where matrix rock is
to be treated These are stable at elevated temperatures and they are stable and rigid at
225degF at elevated temperature These new matrix of gels are functional in the presence of
high salinity water at elevated temperatures (Sydansk 1988)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
27
2435 Polyacrylamide-aluminum citrate gel system
The aluminum citrate solution form gels with anionic polyacrylamide under certain
conditions Cationic polymers do not form gels with aluminum under similar conditions
The low pH aluminum system begins crosslinking with polymer solution immediately
even before it can be injected This prevents in depth penetration of the plugging solution
Because aluminum is known to be amphoteric in aqueous solution they can crosslink at
high pH environment
2436 Polyacrylamide-polyethyleneimine gel system
These gels are rigid and non-flowing at polyacrylamide concentration of 7 and 9 These
are thermally stable at 100degC and a permeability reduction of more than 94 was realized
indicating the possibility of using this system in profile modification jobs or water shutoff
2437 KUSP1-monoethylphthalate systemKUSP1-boric acid gel system
KUSP1 is a biopolymer that is extracted from a medium after the growth of the bacterium
cellumonasflavigena It is nontoxic and exhibit viscosities on the order of 2-3 cP at 25degC
KUSP1 is soluble in alkali but forms a gel with monoethylphthalate ester and permeability
reduction by treatment with the KUSP1-MEP system is stable to brine flow for periods of
up to six months Alkaline KUSP1 can also form gel with boric acid and the gelation time
of the KUSP1-boric acid system could be regulated up to several days by selection of pH
and boric acid concentrations (Vossoughi and Buller 1991)
2438 Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine gel
system
Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine system at acidic
conditions the gelation time was short and the gel did not last for a longer period of time
Chapter 2 Literature Review
28
High viscosity is obtained at high initial values This system can be used where formation
brine contains high concentration of divalent cations (ranges from 10000 to 15000 mgl)
Iron (III) can react with the polymer and accelerated the gelation process and produce a gel
that breaks over a short periods of time (Al-Muntasheri 2007) Hence it should not be used
after acid treatment jobs especially in sandstone reservoirs as the possibility of iron
concentration is high in the well bore area which can cause premature setting of gel This
system can be used at a temperature less than 140degC (Al-Muntasheri 2007 2006 2008)
2439 Polyacrylamide-phenol-formaldehyde gel systemspolyacrylamide-resorcinol
formaldehyde gel system
Phenol-Formaldehyde polymer gels system is an attractive tool fluid shutoff or profile
modification in high temperature formations By selecting between different polymer
compositions reasonable flexibility in the gelation time can be achieved over the
temperature range from 60degC to at least 140degC (Bryant et al 1997 Mahto et al 2009
2010) Choice of polymer composition permits the control of the gelation time and the
gelants display good injectivity even when the residence time approaches the gelation time
(Zhuang et al 2000 Banerjee et al 2006) Cross-linking occurs over a wide range of pH
and is insensitive to lithology (Seright and Martin 1993 Dovan et al 1997)
24310 Polyacrylamide-hydroquinone-hexamine gel system
Hexamethylenetetramine (HMTA) undergoes hydrolysis to produce methyldiol and
ammonia Methyldiol compound is very much unstable Hence it looses water molecules to
produce formaldehyde Thus formed formaldehyde is then reacting with hydroquinone
Hydroquinone undergoes electrophilic substitution reaction to produce 2356
tetramethylol hydroquinone (intermediate) Then intermediate react with partially
hydrolyzed polyacrylamide (PHPA) polymer Hence form a large viscous molecule Hence
OHmacr in methylol group of intermediate and H+ from amide group of polymer are leaving as
Chapter 2 Literature Review
29
a water molecule while producing N-C crosslinker (Dovan et al 1997 Gwaish et al 2008
Mahto and Sheikh 2009)
Table 22 Summary of thermally stable gels
Sl
No
Polymers Crosslinkers Comments
1 Polyacrylamide low mol wt
(Bryant et al 1996)
Cr(III) Acetate 5 or more polymer
needed
2 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Lockhart and Albonico 1994)
Cr(III) Molonate Slower gelation rate
than with Cr(III)
Acetate
3 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Bryant et al 1997 1997)
Phenol and
Formaldehyde
Ligands such as
citrate oxalate
lactate stabilized the
gel
4 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Gawish et al 2008)
Hydroquinone amp
Hexamethylenetetramine
2 sodium
carbonate needed
for softening and
stability
5 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Moradi 2000)
Terephthaladehyde
dihydroxynaphthalene
HMTA etc
Stable gel
6 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer (Moradi 2000)
Phenol formaldehyde Stable gel
7 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer
(Moradi 2000)
Phenyl acetate phenyl
salicylate etc with
HMTA
Stable gel lower
toxicity than phenol
amp formaldehyde gel
8 Acrylic esteracrylic acid Polyethyleneimine Stable gel required
Chapter 2 Literature Review
30
copolymer
(Moradi 2000)
larger concentration
amp cooling at below
93degC
9 Resorcinol
(Mahto et al 2009)
Formaldehyde Water like viscosity
of gelant is plus
toxicity is a problem
10 Scleroglucan
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Stable gel the
polymer is very
expensive
11 Lignosulfate
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Expensive gel due to
high chromium
required
12 Alcaligenes biopolymer PVA
(Moradi 2000)
Na+ phenol amp aldehyde Stable gel in pH
range of 7-8 higher
concentration of
polymer and
crosslinkers needed
13 PVA-polyvinylamide copolymer
(Hoskin and Shu 1989)
Dialdehydes or
polyaldehydes
Not widely used
14 Copolymer tert butyle acylate
(Al-Muntasheri et al 2006
2007)
Polyethyleneimine
15 Partially hydrolysed
polyacrylamide (Jia et al 2010
2011)
Polyethyleneimine
Chapter 2 Literature Review
31
25 SELECTION CRITERIA OF WELLS FOR GEL TREATMENT
Polymer gels can be applied to both injection and production wells (Al-Muntasheri et al
2010 Canbolat and Parlaktuna 2012) The objective of treating injection well is to
improve vertical injection profile resulting in more efficient distribution of injected water
(avery et al 1987) The production well treatment is to improve areal efficiency and to
reduce water oil ratio by reducing water channeling in the near wellbore region
(Giangiacomo 2001 Larson et al 1999 Ghafoori et al 2008) The following criterions
for candidate selection of injection and production wells are reported in the literature
(Maghsood and Bringham 1984 Sharma et al 2009)
251 Selection criteria for injection wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Low secondary oil recovery due to poor sweep efficiency that is high degree of
reservoir heterogeneity
(b) Pre-matured water breakthrough of producing wells
(c) Evidence of direct injector to producer channeling through fractures bugs or high
matrix permeability rock
(d) High injection rate associated with low well head pressure
252 Selection criteria for production wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Recovery calculations indicate that considerable mobile oil remains that could be
recovered most cost effectively if a blocking agent could be realistically placed in the
proper location
(b) High water oil ratio (WOR) values are observed
(c) The source of excess water production is identified (ie using profiles logs or
tracers)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
32
(d) The candidate well exhibits high productivity
26 DESIGNING GEL JOB FOR OIL FIELD APPLICATION
Gel volume is to be designed for both injection and production wells
261 Injection well
When cross flow occurs between thief zone and low permeability oil bearing zone a large
volume of gel is to be injected so that gel penetrates significant distance into the thief zone
(Romero et al 2003) In case where there is no cross flow ie thief zone is separated by an
impermeable barrierlayer from oil bearing zone a small volume of gel is placed near the
wellbore (Glenat et al 1996) Gel volume can be designed in two ways one is based on
filling a portion of channel volume from injector to producer and another is based on
distance from the injection well up to which the gel is to be placed (Parez et al 2001
Sarkissian et al 2005)
262 Production well
There are no definite design criteria available for bulk volume for producing well
treatment Gels with higher polymer concentrations are used in producing well (vs
injection well) treatment because the gel has to withstand high differential pressure in the
direction of producing wellbore (Glenat et al 1996 Giangiacomo 2001) Based on field
experience the following guidelines have been given
(a) Gel volume is equivalent to the volume of fluid that the well can produce in 24 hours
in a pumped-off condition
(b) Gel volume is based on 50 feet radius and thief zone thickness 0
(c) Gel volume is based on 50-200 barrels of gel per perforated foot
Chapter 2 Literature Review
33
26 CONCLUSIONS
The conclusion of the study provided strong evidence that stable gels can be produced
under harsh environmental conditions with organic and inorganic crosslinkers which may
be used for the profile modification jobs in the oil fields These crosslinkers typically
produced gels at temperature ranges from 40 degC to 140 degC and salinity up to 60000 ppm
They are generally less toxic then chromium acetate phenol and formaldehyde croslinkers
The majority of the crosslinkers are readily available at prices not much higher than the
toxic crosslinkers
Chapter 2 Literature Review
15
2223 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide-hexamine-
hydroquinone gel system (Yadav and Mahto 2013)
The hexamine on hydrolysis yields formaldehyde which then combines with hydroquinone
and form 2 3 5 6 tetramethylol hydroquinone Further partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide reacts with 2 3 5 6 tetramethylol hydroquinone and forms three
dimensional networks of polymer gel the different steps of which are as follows
Step I
In the initial step hexamine hydrolyses to yield formaldehyde
N
N N+ H2O CH2 OH +
O
C
H H
Formaldehyde
Hexamine
N
6 OH 4 NH3
_ H2O
Step II
Formaldehyde produced in step-I then react with hydroquinone to form a condensed
structure known as 2 3 5 6-tetramethylolhydroquinone
+
O
C
H H
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
Hydroquinone Formaldehyde 2 3 5 6-Tetramethylol Hydroquinone
OH
OH
4
Chapter 2 Literature Review
16
Step III
The condensed molecule formed in step-II then reacts with PHPA to form the 3-
dimensional gel structure which helps in profile modification jobs
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide
Partially Hydrolized Polyacrylamide (PHPA)
Amide
O-
Na+
+
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
2 3 5 6-Tetramethylol Hydroquinone
R
R
o N
H
H
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
HO
Water
Crosslinking 3-D gel structure
Chapter 2 Literature Review
17
2224 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide-hexamine-
pyrocatechol gel system (Yadav and Mahto 2012)
The hexamine on hydrolysis yields formaldehyde which then combines with pyrocatechol
and form 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol Further partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide reacts with 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol and forms three
dimensional networks of polymer gel the different steps of which are as follows
Step I
In the initial step hexamine hydrolyses to yield formaldehyde
N
N N+ H2O CH2 OH +
O
C
H H
Formaldehyde
Hexamine
N
6 OH 4 NH3
_ H2O
Chapter 2 Literature Review
18
Step II
Formaldehyde produced in step-I then react with pyrocatechol to form a condensed
structure known as 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol
+
O
C
H H
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
Pyrocatechol Formaldehyde 3 4 5 6 Tetramethylol Pyrocatechol
OH
4OH
Step III
The condensed molecule formed in step-II then reacts with PHPA to form the 3-
dimensional gel structure which helps in profile modification jobs
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide
Partially Hydrolized Polyacrylamide (PHPA)
Amide
O-
Na+
+
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
3 4 5 6 Tetramethylol Pyrocatechol
Chapter 2 Literature Review
19
R
R
o N
H
H
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
HO
Water
Crosslinking 3-D gel structure 3-D Structure of polymer gel
23 MATHEMATICAL FLOW MODELS FOR THE RHEOLOGICAL BEHAVIOR
OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS
Several rheological models are reported in literature for the determination of rheological
behavior of polymer gel solutions (Kelessidis and Maglione 2006 Park and Song 2010)
The Bingham model is expressed as
τ = τ + kγ
Fluids that exhibit Bingham plastic behavior are characterized by a yield point (τ0) and a
plastic viscosity (μp) that is independent of the shear rate
There are several rheological models that involve three or more adjustable parameters It is
necessary to include a third parameter to describe the flow of the fluids in the upper or
lower Newtonian region as well as the Power law region The Herschel-Bulkley model
Chapter 2 Literature Review
20
corrects this deficiency by replacing the plastic viscosity term in the Bingham model with a
Power law expression as follows
τ = τ + kγ
τ ndash Shear stress Pa
τ0 ndash Yield point Pa
K ndash Consistency index Pasn
γ ndash Shear rate s-1
n ndash Flow behavior index
The parameters K and n are similar to those of power law model For fluids having a yield
stress however the calculated values of n and K will be different from those calculated
using power law model The parameter τ0 is the fluidrsquos yield stress at zero shear rate In
theory this yield stress is identical to the Bingham plastic yield point (YP) though its
calculated value is different The model is reduce to the Bingham plastic model when n=1
and reduces to the power law rheological model when τ0=0
In a general way the rheological model proposed by Mizrahi-Berk may be gives a good fit
with most of the rheograms of polymer gel systems
τ = τ + kγ
While the power index of the shear rate (n) is generally less than 1 to show a shear-thinning
behavior neither the consistency index nor yield stress from the models shows any pattern
with the solids content
A nonlinear relation exits between the shear stress and the shear rate above the yield stress
There are a number of rheological models used to describe this behavior RobertsonndashStiff
(Ohen and Bick 2011) proposed a three-parameter yield-pseudo-plastic model for relating
the shear stress to the shear rate may be used in determination of rheological behavior of
polymer gel system as follows
Chapter 2 Literature Review
21
τ = k (γ + C)
Where k C and n are model parameters The RobertsonndashStiff model includes the
Newtonian Bingham plastic and power law models as special cases
24 DEVELOPMENT OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS USING DIFFERENT
CROSS-LINKERS
Cross-linked polymers have been widely used for profile modification jobs over the last
decades (Mahto and Sharma 2010)
241 Polymers used for profile modification jobs
The most commonly used polymers are the following
2411 PolyacrylamidePartially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
These are water soluble polymer whose monomeric unit is the acrylamide molecule The
polyacrylamide has undergoes partially hydrolysis which causes anionic carboxyl group to
be scattered along the backbone chain (Wever et al 2011) The polymers are called
partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamide is between 1x106 to 8x106 The size of the molecules
about 01 to 03 micro meters By hydrolysis in a caustic water solution some of the
CONH2 group react to form carbyl group (COOH)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
22
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide Amide
O-
Na+
Figure 24 Chemical structure of partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
2412 Xanthan gum
Xanthan gum is a polysaccharide with a a-D-glucose backbone like cellulose but every
second glucose unit is attached to a triaccharide consisting of mannose glucuronic acid
and mannose The mannose closest to the backbone has an acetic acid ester on carbon 6
and the mannose at the end of the triaccharide is linked through carbons 6 and 4 to the
second carbon of pyruvic acid Xanthan gum is produced by the bacterium Xanthomonas
campestris which is found on crucifereous vegetables such as cabbage and cauliflower
The negatively charged carboxyl group on the side chains because the molecules to form
very viscous fluids when mixed with water (Chatterji and Borchardt 1981 Taylor and
Nasr-El-Din 1998)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
23
Figure 25 Chemical structure of xanthan gum (Song et al 2006)
2413 Copolymers
The main copolymers used in profile modification jobs are copolymer of acrylamide ter
polymer with N-vinyle pyrrolidone and 2-acrylamide-2-methyl-1-propanesulfonic acid
(PAAm-VP-AMPS) amphoteric copolymer polyacrylonitrile and lignin sulphonate
Table 21 Properties of polyacrylamide and xanthan gum polymers
Sl
No
Property Polyacrylamide Xanthan Gum
1 Transition Metal
Cations
Easily crosslinked Easily crosslinked
2 Shear stability Undergoes irreversible
shear degradation
Reversible shear thining
Chapter 2 Literature Review
24
3 Thermal stability Maximum use upto 225-
250 (degF)
Maximum use 160-170 (degF)
4 Hydrolytic
stability
Hydrolysis promoted by
acid or base Partially
hydrolyzed product more
sensitive to Ca+2 Mg+2
Hydrolytic de-
polymerization promoted by
acid or base especially at
high temperature
5 Oxidative
stability
Susceptible Particularly susceptible
especially at high
temperature
6 Brine tolerance Very limited especially to
Ca+2 Mg+2
Good tolerance to mono and
divalent captions
7 Microbial
degradation
Susceptible to attack by
yeast fungi bacteria
Very susceptible in aerobic
conditions
242 Cross linkers used for profile modification jobs
Crosslinkers are the chemical compound which formed stable three dimensional structures
with high molecular weight polymers like polyacrylamide and xanthan gum
The cross-linkers used in cross-linking of the high molecular weight polymers are the
following
2421 Metallic crosslinkers
The most common metallic crosslinkers are Al+3 Cr+6 Cr+3 zirconium titanium boron etc
2422 Organic crosslinkers
Two classes of organic cross-linkers namely phenolic and aldehydes are used for profile
modification jobs The different cross-linkers in the phenolic group are phenol
hydroquinone resorcinol phenyl acetate salicylic alcohol furfuryl alcohol etc In the
Chapter 2 Literature Review
25
aldehyde group main crosslinkers are formaldehyde paraformaldehyde hexamethylene
tetra mine etc
243 Emerging developments of cross linked polymer gel systems
Polymer gel systems have emerged as one of the most effective conformance solution for
controlling of excessive water production worldwide The different cross-linked polymer
gel systems are the following (Moradi 2000 Mahto and Sharma 2010)
2431 Polyacrylamide-chromium (III) gel system
The short gelation time of Cr(III)-acetatepolymer composition at elevated temperature
limit their application to reservoirs that are at relatively at lower temperatures (Sydansk and
Southwell 2000) The existing gelation characteristics of these systems have limited
control over the gelation time of the polymer solutions at elevated temperature For the
delay in gelation time at elevated temperature chromium (IV) or formaldehyde are used but
their use in the field is complicated by significant health and environmental issues At
present many organic ligands are used for their delaying power with Cr(III)polymer and
Cr(OAc)3 polymer solutions and provides outstanding control over the gelation time over
60-135degC With the use of this gelation time spanning the range from several hours to one
month or more at temperature up to 120degC The most interesting features of the ligands like
glycolate malonate and salicylate are their gelation delaying power and cost which
provides gelation delays of 12 to 33 times longer than acetate The other ligands include
oxalate citrate maleate and EDTA which are characteristic by their extremely strong Cr
(III) binding capacity and are found to block gelation entirely (Lane 1998 Jain et al
2004)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
26
2432 Polyacrylamide-chromium (IV)-thiourea gel system
The chromium (VI)-Thiourea-polyacrylamide gels form as the result of two chemical
reactions First chromium (VI) is reduced to chromium (III) by thiourea Second the
produced chromium (III) reacts with carboxylate groups on the partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide to form a crosslinked gel The pH range for the reduction of chromium (VI)
to chromium (III) by thiourea is in the range of 40 to 50 Gel times on the order of days to
weeks can be achieved which is desirable to allow proper placement of the gel system in
the formation Another option is to use chromium (III) ligands like acetate lactate or
manolate
2433 Xanthan-Cr(III) gel system
The chromium (III)-xanthan gel systems have been widely recommended for matrix
treatment because they are shear thinning inject easily and have been claimed to reheal
after shearing (Chang et al 1985 1988 Kolnes et al 1991 Liang et al 1992 Nagra et
al 1996) The initial gelation rate of xanthan-chromium gel system is inversely
proportional to the hydrogen ion concentration and is strongly affected by pH in the porous
matrix (Storm et al 1991)
2434 Acrylamide-polymerchromium (III)-carboxylate gel system
The aqous acrylamide-polymercarboxylate gels are formed by crosslinking water soluble
acrylamide polymers with a Cr(III) carboxylate complex crosslinking agent (Sydansk
1990) The water soluble acrylamide polymer can be polyacrylamide partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide or tert-polymer containing acrylamide Acrylamide-polymerCr(III)
carboxylate gels can be used for near wellbore total shutoff treatments where matrix rock is
to be treated These are stable at elevated temperatures and they are stable and rigid at
225degF at elevated temperature These new matrix of gels are functional in the presence of
high salinity water at elevated temperatures (Sydansk 1988)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
27
2435 Polyacrylamide-aluminum citrate gel system
The aluminum citrate solution form gels with anionic polyacrylamide under certain
conditions Cationic polymers do not form gels with aluminum under similar conditions
The low pH aluminum system begins crosslinking with polymer solution immediately
even before it can be injected This prevents in depth penetration of the plugging solution
Because aluminum is known to be amphoteric in aqueous solution they can crosslink at
high pH environment
2436 Polyacrylamide-polyethyleneimine gel system
These gels are rigid and non-flowing at polyacrylamide concentration of 7 and 9 These
are thermally stable at 100degC and a permeability reduction of more than 94 was realized
indicating the possibility of using this system in profile modification jobs or water shutoff
2437 KUSP1-monoethylphthalate systemKUSP1-boric acid gel system
KUSP1 is a biopolymer that is extracted from a medium after the growth of the bacterium
cellumonasflavigena It is nontoxic and exhibit viscosities on the order of 2-3 cP at 25degC
KUSP1 is soluble in alkali but forms a gel with monoethylphthalate ester and permeability
reduction by treatment with the KUSP1-MEP system is stable to brine flow for periods of
up to six months Alkaline KUSP1 can also form gel with boric acid and the gelation time
of the KUSP1-boric acid system could be regulated up to several days by selection of pH
and boric acid concentrations (Vossoughi and Buller 1991)
2438 Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine gel
system
Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine system at acidic
conditions the gelation time was short and the gel did not last for a longer period of time
Chapter 2 Literature Review
28
High viscosity is obtained at high initial values This system can be used where formation
brine contains high concentration of divalent cations (ranges from 10000 to 15000 mgl)
Iron (III) can react with the polymer and accelerated the gelation process and produce a gel
that breaks over a short periods of time (Al-Muntasheri 2007) Hence it should not be used
after acid treatment jobs especially in sandstone reservoirs as the possibility of iron
concentration is high in the well bore area which can cause premature setting of gel This
system can be used at a temperature less than 140degC (Al-Muntasheri 2007 2006 2008)
2439 Polyacrylamide-phenol-formaldehyde gel systemspolyacrylamide-resorcinol
formaldehyde gel system
Phenol-Formaldehyde polymer gels system is an attractive tool fluid shutoff or profile
modification in high temperature formations By selecting between different polymer
compositions reasonable flexibility in the gelation time can be achieved over the
temperature range from 60degC to at least 140degC (Bryant et al 1997 Mahto et al 2009
2010) Choice of polymer composition permits the control of the gelation time and the
gelants display good injectivity even when the residence time approaches the gelation time
(Zhuang et al 2000 Banerjee et al 2006) Cross-linking occurs over a wide range of pH
and is insensitive to lithology (Seright and Martin 1993 Dovan et al 1997)
24310 Polyacrylamide-hydroquinone-hexamine gel system
Hexamethylenetetramine (HMTA) undergoes hydrolysis to produce methyldiol and
ammonia Methyldiol compound is very much unstable Hence it looses water molecules to
produce formaldehyde Thus formed formaldehyde is then reacting with hydroquinone
Hydroquinone undergoes electrophilic substitution reaction to produce 2356
tetramethylol hydroquinone (intermediate) Then intermediate react with partially
hydrolyzed polyacrylamide (PHPA) polymer Hence form a large viscous molecule Hence
OHmacr in methylol group of intermediate and H+ from amide group of polymer are leaving as
Chapter 2 Literature Review
29
a water molecule while producing N-C crosslinker (Dovan et al 1997 Gwaish et al 2008
Mahto and Sheikh 2009)
Table 22 Summary of thermally stable gels
Sl
No
Polymers Crosslinkers Comments
1 Polyacrylamide low mol wt
(Bryant et al 1996)
Cr(III) Acetate 5 or more polymer
needed
2 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Lockhart and Albonico 1994)
Cr(III) Molonate Slower gelation rate
than with Cr(III)
Acetate
3 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Bryant et al 1997 1997)
Phenol and
Formaldehyde
Ligands such as
citrate oxalate
lactate stabilized the
gel
4 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Gawish et al 2008)
Hydroquinone amp
Hexamethylenetetramine
2 sodium
carbonate needed
for softening and
stability
5 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Moradi 2000)
Terephthaladehyde
dihydroxynaphthalene
HMTA etc
Stable gel
6 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer (Moradi 2000)
Phenol formaldehyde Stable gel
7 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer
(Moradi 2000)
Phenyl acetate phenyl
salicylate etc with
HMTA
Stable gel lower
toxicity than phenol
amp formaldehyde gel
8 Acrylic esteracrylic acid Polyethyleneimine Stable gel required
Chapter 2 Literature Review
30
copolymer
(Moradi 2000)
larger concentration
amp cooling at below
93degC
9 Resorcinol
(Mahto et al 2009)
Formaldehyde Water like viscosity
of gelant is plus
toxicity is a problem
10 Scleroglucan
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Stable gel the
polymer is very
expensive
11 Lignosulfate
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Expensive gel due to
high chromium
required
12 Alcaligenes biopolymer PVA
(Moradi 2000)
Na+ phenol amp aldehyde Stable gel in pH
range of 7-8 higher
concentration of
polymer and
crosslinkers needed
13 PVA-polyvinylamide copolymer
(Hoskin and Shu 1989)
Dialdehydes or
polyaldehydes
Not widely used
14 Copolymer tert butyle acylate
(Al-Muntasheri et al 2006
2007)
Polyethyleneimine
15 Partially hydrolysed
polyacrylamide (Jia et al 2010
2011)
Polyethyleneimine
Chapter 2 Literature Review
31
25 SELECTION CRITERIA OF WELLS FOR GEL TREATMENT
Polymer gels can be applied to both injection and production wells (Al-Muntasheri et al
2010 Canbolat and Parlaktuna 2012) The objective of treating injection well is to
improve vertical injection profile resulting in more efficient distribution of injected water
(avery et al 1987) The production well treatment is to improve areal efficiency and to
reduce water oil ratio by reducing water channeling in the near wellbore region
(Giangiacomo 2001 Larson et al 1999 Ghafoori et al 2008) The following criterions
for candidate selection of injection and production wells are reported in the literature
(Maghsood and Bringham 1984 Sharma et al 2009)
251 Selection criteria for injection wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Low secondary oil recovery due to poor sweep efficiency that is high degree of
reservoir heterogeneity
(b) Pre-matured water breakthrough of producing wells
(c) Evidence of direct injector to producer channeling through fractures bugs or high
matrix permeability rock
(d) High injection rate associated with low well head pressure
252 Selection criteria for production wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Recovery calculations indicate that considerable mobile oil remains that could be
recovered most cost effectively if a blocking agent could be realistically placed in the
proper location
(b) High water oil ratio (WOR) values are observed
(c) The source of excess water production is identified (ie using profiles logs or
tracers)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
32
(d) The candidate well exhibits high productivity
26 DESIGNING GEL JOB FOR OIL FIELD APPLICATION
Gel volume is to be designed for both injection and production wells
261 Injection well
When cross flow occurs between thief zone and low permeability oil bearing zone a large
volume of gel is to be injected so that gel penetrates significant distance into the thief zone
(Romero et al 2003) In case where there is no cross flow ie thief zone is separated by an
impermeable barrierlayer from oil bearing zone a small volume of gel is placed near the
wellbore (Glenat et al 1996) Gel volume can be designed in two ways one is based on
filling a portion of channel volume from injector to producer and another is based on
distance from the injection well up to which the gel is to be placed (Parez et al 2001
Sarkissian et al 2005)
262 Production well
There are no definite design criteria available for bulk volume for producing well
treatment Gels with higher polymer concentrations are used in producing well (vs
injection well) treatment because the gel has to withstand high differential pressure in the
direction of producing wellbore (Glenat et al 1996 Giangiacomo 2001) Based on field
experience the following guidelines have been given
(a) Gel volume is equivalent to the volume of fluid that the well can produce in 24 hours
in a pumped-off condition
(b) Gel volume is based on 50 feet radius and thief zone thickness 0
(c) Gel volume is based on 50-200 barrels of gel per perforated foot
Chapter 2 Literature Review
33
26 CONCLUSIONS
The conclusion of the study provided strong evidence that stable gels can be produced
under harsh environmental conditions with organic and inorganic crosslinkers which may
be used for the profile modification jobs in the oil fields These crosslinkers typically
produced gels at temperature ranges from 40 degC to 140 degC and salinity up to 60000 ppm
They are generally less toxic then chromium acetate phenol and formaldehyde croslinkers
The majority of the crosslinkers are readily available at prices not much higher than the
toxic crosslinkers
Chapter 2 Literature Review
16
Step III
The condensed molecule formed in step-II then reacts with PHPA to form the 3-
dimensional gel structure which helps in profile modification jobs
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide
Partially Hydrolized Polyacrylamide (PHPA)
Amide
O-
Na+
+
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
2 3 5 6-Tetramethylol Hydroquinone
R
R
o N
H
H
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
HO
Water
Crosslinking 3-D gel structure
Chapter 2 Literature Review
17
2224 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide-hexamine-
pyrocatechol gel system (Yadav and Mahto 2012)
The hexamine on hydrolysis yields formaldehyde which then combines with pyrocatechol
and form 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol Further partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide reacts with 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol and forms three
dimensional networks of polymer gel the different steps of which are as follows
Step I
In the initial step hexamine hydrolyses to yield formaldehyde
N
N N+ H2O CH2 OH +
O
C
H H
Formaldehyde
Hexamine
N
6 OH 4 NH3
_ H2O
Chapter 2 Literature Review
18
Step II
Formaldehyde produced in step-I then react with pyrocatechol to form a condensed
structure known as 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol
+
O
C
H H
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
Pyrocatechol Formaldehyde 3 4 5 6 Tetramethylol Pyrocatechol
OH
4OH
Step III
The condensed molecule formed in step-II then reacts with PHPA to form the 3-
dimensional gel structure which helps in profile modification jobs
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide
Partially Hydrolized Polyacrylamide (PHPA)
Amide
O-
Na+
+
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
3 4 5 6 Tetramethylol Pyrocatechol
Chapter 2 Literature Review
19
R
R
o N
H
H
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
HO
Water
Crosslinking 3-D gel structure 3-D Structure of polymer gel
23 MATHEMATICAL FLOW MODELS FOR THE RHEOLOGICAL BEHAVIOR
OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS
Several rheological models are reported in literature for the determination of rheological
behavior of polymer gel solutions (Kelessidis and Maglione 2006 Park and Song 2010)
The Bingham model is expressed as
τ = τ + kγ
Fluids that exhibit Bingham plastic behavior are characterized by a yield point (τ0) and a
plastic viscosity (μp) that is independent of the shear rate
There are several rheological models that involve three or more adjustable parameters It is
necessary to include a third parameter to describe the flow of the fluids in the upper or
lower Newtonian region as well as the Power law region The Herschel-Bulkley model
Chapter 2 Literature Review
20
corrects this deficiency by replacing the plastic viscosity term in the Bingham model with a
Power law expression as follows
τ = τ + kγ
τ ndash Shear stress Pa
τ0 ndash Yield point Pa
K ndash Consistency index Pasn
γ ndash Shear rate s-1
n ndash Flow behavior index
The parameters K and n are similar to those of power law model For fluids having a yield
stress however the calculated values of n and K will be different from those calculated
using power law model The parameter τ0 is the fluidrsquos yield stress at zero shear rate In
theory this yield stress is identical to the Bingham plastic yield point (YP) though its
calculated value is different The model is reduce to the Bingham plastic model when n=1
and reduces to the power law rheological model when τ0=0
In a general way the rheological model proposed by Mizrahi-Berk may be gives a good fit
with most of the rheograms of polymer gel systems
τ = τ + kγ
While the power index of the shear rate (n) is generally less than 1 to show a shear-thinning
behavior neither the consistency index nor yield stress from the models shows any pattern
with the solids content
A nonlinear relation exits between the shear stress and the shear rate above the yield stress
There are a number of rheological models used to describe this behavior RobertsonndashStiff
(Ohen and Bick 2011) proposed a three-parameter yield-pseudo-plastic model for relating
the shear stress to the shear rate may be used in determination of rheological behavior of
polymer gel system as follows
Chapter 2 Literature Review
21
τ = k (γ + C)
Where k C and n are model parameters The RobertsonndashStiff model includes the
Newtonian Bingham plastic and power law models as special cases
24 DEVELOPMENT OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS USING DIFFERENT
CROSS-LINKERS
Cross-linked polymers have been widely used for profile modification jobs over the last
decades (Mahto and Sharma 2010)
241 Polymers used for profile modification jobs
The most commonly used polymers are the following
2411 PolyacrylamidePartially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
These are water soluble polymer whose monomeric unit is the acrylamide molecule The
polyacrylamide has undergoes partially hydrolysis which causes anionic carboxyl group to
be scattered along the backbone chain (Wever et al 2011) The polymers are called
partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamide is between 1x106 to 8x106 The size of the molecules
about 01 to 03 micro meters By hydrolysis in a caustic water solution some of the
CONH2 group react to form carbyl group (COOH)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
22
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide Amide
O-
Na+
Figure 24 Chemical structure of partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
2412 Xanthan gum
Xanthan gum is a polysaccharide with a a-D-glucose backbone like cellulose but every
second glucose unit is attached to a triaccharide consisting of mannose glucuronic acid
and mannose The mannose closest to the backbone has an acetic acid ester on carbon 6
and the mannose at the end of the triaccharide is linked through carbons 6 and 4 to the
second carbon of pyruvic acid Xanthan gum is produced by the bacterium Xanthomonas
campestris which is found on crucifereous vegetables such as cabbage and cauliflower
The negatively charged carboxyl group on the side chains because the molecules to form
very viscous fluids when mixed with water (Chatterji and Borchardt 1981 Taylor and
Nasr-El-Din 1998)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
23
Figure 25 Chemical structure of xanthan gum (Song et al 2006)
2413 Copolymers
The main copolymers used in profile modification jobs are copolymer of acrylamide ter
polymer with N-vinyle pyrrolidone and 2-acrylamide-2-methyl-1-propanesulfonic acid
(PAAm-VP-AMPS) amphoteric copolymer polyacrylonitrile and lignin sulphonate
Table 21 Properties of polyacrylamide and xanthan gum polymers
Sl
No
Property Polyacrylamide Xanthan Gum
1 Transition Metal
Cations
Easily crosslinked Easily crosslinked
2 Shear stability Undergoes irreversible
shear degradation
Reversible shear thining
Chapter 2 Literature Review
24
3 Thermal stability Maximum use upto 225-
250 (degF)
Maximum use 160-170 (degF)
4 Hydrolytic
stability
Hydrolysis promoted by
acid or base Partially
hydrolyzed product more
sensitive to Ca+2 Mg+2
Hydrolytic de-
polymerization promoted by
acid or base especially at
high temperature
5 Oxidative
stability
Susceptible Particularly susceptible
especially at high
temperature
6 Brine tolerance Very limited especially to
Ca+2 Mg+2
Good tolerance to mono and
divalent captions
7 Microbial
degradation
Susceptible to attack by
yeast fungi bacteria
Very susceptible in aerobic
conditions
242 Cross linkers used for profile modification jobs
Crosslinkers are the chemical compound which formed stable three dimensional structures
with high molecular weight polymers like polyacrylamide and xanthan gum
The cross-linkers used in cross-linking of the high molecular weight polymers are the
following
2421 Metallic crosslinkers
The most common metallic crosslinkers are Al+3 Cr+6 Cr+3 zirconium titanium boron etc
2422 Organic crosslinkers
Two classes of organic cross-linkers namely phenolic and aldehydes are used for profile
modification jobs The different cross-linkers in the phenolic group are phenol
hydroquinone resorcinol phenyl acetate salicylic alcohol furfuryl alcohol etc In the
Chapter 2 Literature Review
25
aldehyde group main crosslinkers are formaldehyde paraformaldehyde hexamethylene
tetra mine etc
243 Emerging developments of cross linked polymer gel systems
Polymer gel systems have emerged as one of the most effective conformance solution for
controlling of excessive water production worldwide The different cross-linked polymer
gel systems are the following (Moradi 2000 Mahto and Sharma 2010)
2431 Polyacrylamide-chromium (III) gel system
The short gelation time of Cr(III)-acetatepolymer composition at elevated temperature
limit their application to reservoirs that are at relatively at lower temperatures (Sydansk and
Southwell 2000) The existing gelation characteristics of these systems have limited
control over the gelation time of the polymer solutions at elevated temperature For the
delay in gelation time at elevated temperature chromium (IV) or formaldehyde are used but
their use in the field is complicated by significant health and environmental issues At
present many organic ligands are used for their delaying power with Cr(III)polymer and
Cr(OAc)3 polymer solutions and provides outstanding control over the gelation time over
60-135degC With the use of this gelation time spanning the range from several hours to one
month or more at temperature up to 120degC The most interesting features of the ligands like
glycolate malonate and salicylate are their gelation delaying power and cost which
provides gelation delays of 12 to 33 times longer than acetate The other ligands include
oxalate citrate maleate and EDTA which are characteristic by their extremely strong Cr
(III) binding capacity and are found to block gelation entirely (Lane 1998 Jain et al
2004)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
26
2432 Polyacrylamide-chromium (IV)-thiourea gel system
The chromium (VI)-Thiourea-polyacrylamide gels form as the result of two chemical
reactions First chromium (VI) is reduced to chromium (III) by thiourea Second the
produced chromium (III) reacts with carboxylate groups on the partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide to form a crosslinked gel The pH range for the reduction of chromium (VI)
to chromium (III) by thiourea is in the range of 40 to 50 Gel times on the order of days to
weeks can be achieved which is desirable to allow proper placement of the gel system in
the formation Another option is to use chromium (III) ligands like acetate lactate or
manolate
2433 Xanthan-Cr(III) gel system
The chromium (III)-xanthan gel systems have been widely recommended for matrix
treatment because they are shear thinning inject easily and have been claimed to reheal
after shearing (Chang et al 1985 1988 Kolnes et al 1991 Liang et al 1992 Nagra et
al 1996) The initial gelation rate of xanthan-chromium gel system is inversely
proportional to the hydrogen ion concentration and is strongly affected by pH in the porous
matrix (Storm et al 1991)
2434 Acrylamide-polymerchromium (III)-carboxylate gel system
The aqous acrylamide-polymercarboxylate gels are formed by crosslinking water soluble
acrylamide polymers with a Cr(III) carboxylate complex crosslinking agent (Sydansk
1990) The water soluble acrylamide polymer can be polyacrylamide partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide or tert-polymer containing acrylamide Acrylamide-polymerCr(III)
carboxylate gels can be used for near wellbore total shutoff treatments where matrix rock is
to be treated These are stable at elevated temperatures and they are stable and rigid at
225degF at elevated temperature These new matrix of gels are functional in the presence of
high salinity water at elevated temperatures (Sydansk 1988)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
27
2435 Polyacrylamide-aluminum citrate gel system
The aluminum citrate solution form gels with anionic polyacrylamide under certain
conditions Cationic polymers do not form gels with aluminum under similar conditions
The low pH aluminum system begins crosslinking with polymer solution immediately
even before it can be injected This prevents in depth penetration of the plugging solution
Because aluminum is known to be amphoteric in aqueous solution they can crosslink at
high pH environment
2436 Polyacrylamide-polyethyleneimine gel system
These gels are rigid and non-flowing at polyacrylamide concentration of 7 and 9 These
are thermally stable at 100degC and a permeability reduction of more than 94 was realized
indicating the possibility of using this system in profile modification jobs or water shutoff
2437 KUSP1-monoethylphthalate systemKUSP1-boric acid gel system
KUSP1 is a biopolymer that is extracted from a medium after the growth of the bacterium
cellumonasflavigena It is nontoxic and exhibit viscosities on the order of 2-3 cP at 25degC
KUSP1 is soluble in alkali but forms a gel with monoethylphthalate ester and permeability
reduction by treatment with the KUSP1-MEP system is stable to brine flow for periods of
up to six months Alkaline KUSP1 can also form gel with boric acid and the gelation time
of the KUSP1-boric acid system could be regulated up to several days by selection of pH
and boric acid concentrations (Vossoughi and Buller 1991)
2438 Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine gel
system
Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine system at acidic
conditions the gelation time was short and the gel did not last for a longer period of time
Chapter 2 Literature Review
28
High viscosity is obtained at high initial values This system can be used where formation
brine contains high concentration of divalent cations (ranges from 10000 to 15000 mgl)
Iron (III) can react with the polymer and accelerated the gelation process and produce a gel
that breaks over a short periods of time (Al-Muntasheri 2007) Hence it should not be used
after acid treatment jobs especially in sandstone reservoirs as the possibility of iron
concentration is high in the well bore area which can cause premature setting of gel This
system can be used at a temperature less than 140degC (Al-Muntasheri 2007 2006 2008)
2439 Polyacrylamide-phenol-formaldehyde gel systemspolyacrylamide-resorcinol
formaldehyde gel system
Phenol-Formaldehyde polymer gels system is an attractive tool fluid shutoff or profile
modification in high temperature formations By selecting between different polymer
compositions reasonable flexibility in the gelation time can be achieved over the
temperature range from 60degC to at least 140degC (Bryant et al 1997 Mahto et al 2009
2010) Choice of polymer composition permits the control of the gelation time and the
gelants display good injectivity even when the residence time approaches the gelation time
(Zhuang et al 2000 Banerjee et al 2006) Cross-linking occurs over a wide range of pH
and is insensitive to lithology (Seright and Martin 1993 Dovan et al 1997)
24310 Polyacrylamide-hydroquinone-hexamine gel system
Hexamethylenetetramine (HMTA) undergoes hydrolysis to produce methyldiol and
ammonia Methyldiol compound is very much unstable Hence it looses water molecules to
produce formaldehyde Thus formed formaldehyde is then reacting with hydroquinone
Hydroquinone undergoes electrophilic substitution reaction to produce 2356
tetramethylol hydroquinone (intermediate) Then intermediate react with partially
hydrolyzed polyacrylamide (PHPA) polymer Hence form a large viscous molecule Hence
OHmacr in methylol group of intermediate and H+ from amide group of polymer are leaving as
Chapter 2 Literature Review
29
a water molecule while producing N-C crosslinker (Dovan et al 1997 Gwaish et al 2008
Mahto and Sheikh 2009)
Table 22 Summary of thermally stable gels
Sl
No
Polymers Crosslinkers Comments
1 Polyacrylamide low mol wt
(Bryant et al 1996)
Cr(III) Acetate 5 or more polymer
needed
2 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Lockhart and Albonico 1994)
Cr(III) Molonate Slower gelation rate
than with Cr(III)
Acetate
3 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Bryant et al 1997 1997)
Phenol and
Formaldehyde
Ligands such as
citrate oxalate
lactate stabilized the
gel
4 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Gawish et al 2008)
Hydroquinone amp
Hexamethylenetetramine
2 sodium
carbonate needed
for softening and
stability
5 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Moradi 2000)
Terephthaladehyde
dihydroxynaphthalene
HMTA etc
Stable gel
6 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer (Moradi 2000)
Phenol formaldehyde Stable gel
7 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer
(Moradi 2000)
Phenyl acetate phenyl
salicylate etc with
HMTA
Stable gel lower
toxicity than phenol
amp formaldehyde gel
8 Acrylic esteracrylic acid Polyethyleneimine Stable gel required
Chapter 2 Literature Review
30
copolymer
(Moradi 2000)
larger concentration
amp cooling at below
93degC
9 Resorcinol
(Mahto et al 2009)
Formaldehyde Water like viscosity
of gelant is plus
toxicity is a problem
10 Scleroglucan
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Stable gel the
polymer is very
expensive
11 Lignosulfate
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Expensive gel due to
high chromium
required
12 Alcaligenes biopolymer PVA
(Moradi 2000)
Na+ phenol amp aldehyde Stable gel in pH
range of 7-8 higher
concentration of
polymer and
crosslinkers needed
13 PVA-polyvinylamide copolymer
(Hoskin and Shu 1989)
Dialdehydes or
polyaldehydes
Not widely used
14 Copolymer tert butyle acylate
(Al-Muntasheri et al 2006
2007)
Polyethyleneimine
15 Partially hydrolysed
polyacrylamide (Jia et al 2010
2011)
Polyethyleneimine
Chapter 2 Literature Review
31
25 SELECTION CRITERIA OF WELLS FOR GEL TREATMENT
Polymer gels can be applied to both injection and production wells (Al-Muntasheri et al
2010 Canbolat and Parlaktuna 2012) The objective of treating injection well is to
improve vertical injection profile resulting in more efficient distribution of injected water
(avery et al 1987) The production well treatment is to improve areal efficiency and to
reduce water oil ratio by reducing water channeling in the near wellbore region
(Giangiacomo 2001 Larson et al 1999 Ghafoori et al 2008) The following criterions
for candidate selection of injection and production wells are reported in the literature
(Maghsood and Bringham 1984 Sharma et al 2009)
251 Selection criteria for injection wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Low secondary oil recovery due to poor sweep efficiency that is high degree of
reservoir heterogeneity
(b) Pre-matured water breakthrough of producing wells
(c) Evidence of direct injector to producer channeling through fractures bugs or high
matrix permeability rock
(d) High injection rate associated with low well head pressure
252 Selection criteria for production wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Recovery calculations indicate that considerable mobile oil remains that could be
recovered most cost effectively if a blocking agent could be realistically placed in the
proper location
(b) High water oil ratio (WOR) values are observed
(c) The source of excess water production is identified (ie using profiles logs or
tracers)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
32
(d) The candidate well exhibits high productivity
26 DESIGNING GEL JOB FOR OIL FIELD APPLICATION
Gel volume is to be designed for both injection and production wells
261 Injection well
When cross flow occurs between thief zone and low permeability oil bearing zone a large
volume of gel is to be injected so that gel penetrates significant distance into the thief zone
(Romero et al 2003) In case where there is no cross flow ie thief zone is separated by an
impermeable barrierlayer from oil bearing zone a small volume of gel is placed near the
wellbore (Glenat et al 1996) Gel volume can be designed in two ways one is based on
filling a portion of channel volume from injector to producer and another is based on
distance from the injection well up to which the gel is to be placed (Parez et al 2001
Sarkissian et al 2005)
262 Production well
There are no definite design criteria available for bulk volume for producing well
treatment Gels with higher polymer concentrations are used in producing well (vs
injection well) treatment because the gel has to withstand high differential pressure in the
direction of producing wellbore (Glenat et al 1996 Giangiacomo 2001) Based on field
experience the following guidelines have been given
(a) Gel volume is equivalent to the volume of fluid that the well can produce in 24 hours
in a pumped-off condition
(b) Gel volume is based on 50 feet radius and thief zone thickness 0
(c) Gel volume is based on 50-200 barrels of gel per perforated foot
Chapter 2 Literature Review
33
26 CONCLUSIONS
The conclusion of the study provided strong evidence that stable gels can be produced
under harsh environmental conditions with organic and inorganic crosslinkers which may
be used for the profile modification jobs in the oil fields These crosslinkers typically
produced gels at temperature ranges from 40 degC to 140 degC and salinity up to 60000 ppm
They are generally less toxic then chromium acetate phenol and formaldehyde croslinkers
The majority of the crosslinkers are readily available at prices not much higher than the
toxic crosslinkers
Chapter 2 Literature Review
17
2224 Gelation mechanism of partially hydrolysed polyacrylamide-hexamine-
pyrocatechol gel system (Yadav and Mahto 2012)
The hexamine on hydrolysis yields formaldehyde which then combines with pyrocatechol
and form 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol Further partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide reacts with 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol and forms three
dimensional networks of polymer gel the different steps of which are as follows
Step I
In the initial step hexamine hydrolyses to yield formaldehyde
N
N N+ H2O CH2 OH +
O
C
H H
Formaldehyde
Hexamine
N
6 OH 4 NH3
_ H2O
Chapter 2 Literature Review
18
Step II
Formaldehyde produced in step-I then react with pyrocatechol to form a condensed
structure known as 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol
+
O
C
H H
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
Pyrocatechol Formaldehyde 3 4 5 6 Tetramethylol Pyrocatechol
OH
4OH
Step III
The condensed molecule formed in step-II then reacts with PHPA to form the 3-
dimensional gel structure which helps in profile modification jobs
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide
Partially Hydrolized Polyacrylamide (PHPA)
Amide
O-
Na+
+
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
3 4 5 6 Tetramethylol Pyrocatechol
Chapter 2 Literature Review
19
R
R
o N
H
H
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
HO
Water
Crosslinking 3-D gel structure 3-D Structure of polymer gel
23 MATHEMATICAL FLOW MODELS FOR THE RHEOLOGICAL BEHAVIOR
OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS
Several rheological models are reported in literature for the determination of rheological
behavior of polymer gel solutions (Kelessidis and Maglione 2006 Park and Song 2010)
The Bingham model is expressed as
τ = τ + kγ
Fluids that exhibit Bingham plastic behavior are characterized by a yield point (τ0) and a
plastic viscosity (μp) that is independent of the shear rate
There are several rheological models that involve three or more adjustable parameters It is
necessary to include a third parameter to describe the flow of the fluids in the upper or
lower Newtonian region as well as the Power law region The Herschel-Bulkley model
Chapter 2 Literature Review
20
corrects this deficiency by replacing the plastic viscosity term in the Bingham model with a
Power law expression as follows
τ = τ + kγ
τ ndash Shear stress Pa
τ0 ndash Yield point Pa
K ndash Consistency index Pasn
γ ndash Shear rate s-1
n ndash Flow behavior index
The parameters K and n are similar to those of power law model For fluids having a yield
stress however the calculated values of n and K will be different from those calculated
using power law model The parameter τ0 is the fluidrsquos yield stress at zero shear rate In
theory this yield stress is identical to the Bingham plastic yield point (YP) though its
calculated value is different The model is reduce to the Bingham plastic model when n=1
and reduces to the power law rheological model when τ0=0
In a general way the rheological model proposed by Mizrahi-Berk may be gives a good fit
with most of the rheograms of polymer gel systems
τ = τ + kγ
While the power index of the shear rate (n) is generally less than 1 to show a shear-thinning
behavior neither the consistency index nor yield stress from the models shows any pattern
with the solids content
A nonlinear relation exits between the shear stress and the shear rate above the yield stress
There are a number of rheological models used to describe this behavior RobertsonndashStiff
(Ohen and Bick 2011) proposed a three-parameter yield-pseudo-plastic model for relating
the shear stress to the shear rate may be used in determination of rheological behavior of
polymer gel system as follows
Chapter 2 Literature Review
21
τ = k (γ + C)
Where k C and n are model parameters The RobertsonndashStiff model includes the
Newtonian Bingham plastic and power law models as special cases
24 DEVELOPMENT OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS USING DIFFERENT
CROSS-LINKERS
Cross-linked polymers have been widely used for profile modification jobs over the last
decades (Mahto and Sharma 2010)
241 Polymers used for profile modification jobs
The most commonly used polymers are the following
2411 PolyacrylamidePartially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
These are water soluble polymer whose monomeric unit is the acrylamide molecule The
polyacrylamide has undergoes partially hydrolysis which causes anionic carboxyl group to
be scattered along the backbone chain (Wever et al 2011) The polymers are called
partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamide is between 1x106 to 8x106 The size of the molecules
about 01 to 03 micro meters By hydrolysis in a caustic water solution some of the
CONH2 group react to form carbyl group (COOH)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
22
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide Amide
O-
Na+
Figure 24 Chemical structure of partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
2412 Xanthan gum
Xanthan gum is a polysaccharide with a a-D-glucose backbone like cellulose but every
second glucose unit is attached to a triaccharide consisting of mannose glucuronic acid
and mannose The mannose closest to the backbone has an acetic acid ester on carbon 6
and the mannose at the end of the triaccharide is linked through carbons 6 and 4 to the
second carbon of pyruvic acid Xanthan gum is produced by the bacterium Xanthomonas
campestris which is found on crucifereous vegetables such as cabbage and cauliflower
The negatively charged carboxyl group on the side chains because the molecules to form
very viscous fluids when mixed with water (Chatterji and Borchardt 1981 Taylor and
Nasr-El-Din 1998)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
23
Figure 25 Chemical structure of xanthan gum (Song et al 2006)
2413 Copolymers
The main copolymers used in profile modification jobs are copolymer of acrylamide ter
polymer with N-vinyle pyrrolidone and 2-acrylamide-2-methyl-1-propanesulfonic acid
(PAAm-VP-AMPS) amphoteric copolymer polyacrylonitrile and lignin sulphonate
Table 21 Properties of polyacrylamide and xanthan gum polymers
Sl
No
Property Polyacrylamide Xanthan Gum
1 Transition Metal
Cations
Easily crosslinked Easily crosslinked
2 Shear stability Undergoes irreversible
shear degradation
Reversible shear thining
Chapter 2 Literature Review
24
3 Thermal stability Maximum use upto 225-
250 (degF)
Maximum use 160-170 (degF)
4 Hydrolytic
stability
Hydrolysis promoted by
acid or base Partially
hydrolyzed product more
sensitive to Ca+2 Mg+2
Hydrolytic de-
polymerization promoted by
acid or base especially at
high temperature
5 Oxidative
stability
Susceptible Particularly susceptible
especially at high
temperature
6 Brine tolerance Very limited especially to
Ca+2 Mg+2
Good tolerance to mono and
divalent captions
7 Microbial
degradation
Susceptible to attack by
yeast fungi bacteria
Very susceptible in aerobic
conditions
242 Cross linkers used for profile modification jobs
Crosslinkers are the chemical compound which formed stable three dimensional structures
with high molecular weight polymers like polyacrylamide and xanthan gum
The cross-linkers used in cross-linking of the high molecular weight polymers are the
following
2421 Metallic crosslinkers
The most common metallic crosslinkers are Al+3 Cr+6 Cr+3 zirconium titanium boron etc
2422 Organic crosslinkers
Two classes of organic cross-linkers namely phenolic and aldehydes are used for profile
modification jobs The different cross-linkers in the phenolic group are phenol
hydroquinone resorcinol phenyl acetate salicylic alcohol furfuryl alcohol etc In the
Chapter 2 Literature Review
25
aldehyde group main crosslinkers are formaldehyde paraformaldehyde hexamethylene
tetra mine etc
243 Emerging developments of cross linked polymer gel systems
Polymer gel systems have emerged as one of the most effective conformance solution for
controlling of excessive water production worldwide The different cross-linked polymer
gel systems are the following (Moradi 2000 Mahto and Sharma 2010)
2431 Polyacrylamide-chromium (III) gel system
The short gelation time of Cr(III)-acetatepolymer composition at elevated temperature
limit their application to reservoirs that are at relatively at lower temperatures (Sydansk and
Southwell 2000) The existing gelation characteristics of these systems have limited
control over the gelation time of the polymer solutions at elevated temperature For the
delay in gelation time at elevated temperature chromium (IV) or formaldehyde are used but
their use in the field is complicated by significant health and environmental issues At
present many organic ligands are used for their delaying power with Cr(III)polymer and
Cr(OAc)3 polymer solutions and provides outstanding control over the gelation time over
60-135degC With the use of this gelation time spanning the range from several hours to one
month or more at temperature up to 120degC The most interesting features of the ligands like
glycolate malonate and salicylate are their gelation delaying power and cost which
provides gelation delays of 12 to 33 times longer than acetate The other ligands include
oxalate citrate maleate and EDTA which are characteristic by their extremely strong Cr
(III) binding capacity and are found to block gelation entirely (Lane 1998 Jain et al
2004)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
26
2432 Polyacrylamide-chromium (IV)-thiourea gel system
The chromium (VI)-Thiourea-polyacrylamide gels form as the result of two chemical
reactions First chromium (VI) is reduced to chromium (III) by thiourea Second the
produced chromium (III) reacts with carboxylate groups on the partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide to form a crosslinked gel The pH range for the reduction of chromium (VI)
to chromium (III) by thiourea is in the range of 40 to 50 Gel times on the order of days to
weeks can be achieved which is desirable to allow proper placement of the gel system in
the formation Another option is to use chromium (III) ligands like acetate lactate or
manolate
2433 Xanthan-Cr(III) gel system
The chromium (III)-xanthan gel systems have been widely recommended for matrix
treatment because they are shear thinning inject easily and have been claimed to reheal
after shearing (Chang et al 1985 1988 Kolnes et al 1991 Liang et al 1992 Nagra et
al 1996) The initial gelation rate of xanthan-chromium gel system is inversely
proportional to the hydrogen ion concentration and is strongly affected by pH in the porous
matrix (Storm et al 1991)
2434 Acrylamide-polymerchromium (III)-carboxylate gel system
The aqous acrylamide-polymercarboxylate gels are formed by crosslinking water soluble
acrylamide polymers with a Cr(III) carboxylate complex crosslinking agent (Sydansk
1990) The water soluble acrylamide polymer can be polyacrylamide partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide or tert-polymer containing acrylamide Acrylamide-polymerCr(III)
carboxylate gels can be used for near wellbore total shutoff treatments where matrix rock is
to be treated These are stable at elevated temperatures and they are stable and rigid at
225degF at elevated temperature These new matrix of gels are functional in the presence of
high salinity water at elevated temperatures (Sydansk 1988)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
27
2435 Polyacrylamide-aluminum citrate gel system
The aluminum citrate solution form gels with anionic polyacrylamide under certain
conditions Cationic polymers do not form gels with aluminum under similar conditions
The low pH aluminum system begins crosslinking with polymer solution immediately
even before it can be injected This prevents in depth penetration of the plugging solution
Because aluminum is known to be amphoteric in aqueous solution they can crosslink at
high pH environment
2436 Polyacrylamide-polyethyleneimine gel system
These gels are rigid and non-flowing at polyacrylamide concentration of 7 and 9 These
are thermally stable at 100degC and a permeability reduction of more than 94 was realized
indicating the possibility of using this system in profile modification jobs or water shutoff
2437 KUSP1-monoethylphthalate systemKUSP1-boric acid gel system
KUSP1 is a biopolymer that is extracted from a medium after the growth of the bacterium
cellumonasflavigena It is nontoxic and exhibit viscosities on the order of 2-3 cP at 25degC
KUSP1 is soluble in alkali but forms a gel with monoethylphthalate ester and permeability
reduction by treatment with the KUSP1-MEP system is stable to brine flow for periods of
up to six months Alkaline KUSP1 can also form gel with boric acid and the gelation time
of the KUSP1-boric acid system could be regulated up to several days by selection of pH
and boric acid concentrations (Vossoughi and Buller 1991)
2438 Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine gel
system
Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine system at acidic
conditions the gelation time was short and the gel did not last for a longer period of time
Chapter 2 Literature Review
28
High viscosity is obtained at high initial values This system can be used where formation
brine contains high concentration of divalent cations (ranges from 10000 to 15000 mgl)
Iron (III) can react with the polymer and accelerated the gelation process and produce a gel
that breaks over a short periods of time (Al-Muntasheri 2007) Hence it should not be used
after acid treatment jobs especially in sandstone reservoirs as the possibility of iron
concentration is high in the well bore area which can cause premature setting of gel This
system can be used at a temperature less than 140degC (Al-Muntasheri 2007 2006 2008)
2439 Polyacrylamide-phenol-formaldehyde gel systemspolyacrylamide-resorcinol
formaldehyde gel system
Phenol-Formaldehyde polymer gels system is an attractive tool fluid shutoff or profile
modification in high temperature formations By selecting between different polymer
compositions reasonable flexibility in the gelation time can be achieved over the
temperature range from 60degC to at least 140degC (Bryant et al 1997 Mahto et al 2009
2010) Choice of polymer composition permits the control of the gelation time and the
gelants display good injectivity even when the residence time approaches the gelation time
(Zhuang et al 2000 Banerjee et al 2006) Cross-linking occurs over a wide range of pH
and is insensitive to lithology (Seright and Martin 1993 Dovan et al 1997)
24310 Polyacrylamide-hydroquinone-hexamine gel system
Hexamethylenetetramine (HMTA) undergoes hydrolysis to produce methyldiol and
ammonia Methyldiol compound is very much unstable Hence it looses water molecules to
produce formaldehyde Thus formed formaldehyde is then reacting with hydroquinone
Hydroquinone undergoes electrophilic substitution reaction to produce 2356
tetramethylol hydroquinone (intermediate) Then intermediate react with partially
hydrolyzed polyacrylamide (PHPA) polymer Hence form a large viscous molecule Hence
OHmacr in methylol group of intermediate and H+ from amide group of polymer are leaving as
Chapter 2 Literature Review
29
a water molecule while producing N-C crosslinker (Dovan et al 1997 Gwaish et al 2008
Mahto and Sheikh 2009)
Table 22 Summary of thermally stable gels
Sl
No
Polymers Crosslinkers Comments
1 Polyacrylamide low mol wt
(Bryant et al 1996)
Cr(III) Acetate 5 or more polymer
needed
2 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Lockhart and Albonico 1994)
Cr(III) Molonate Slower gelation rate
than with Cr(III)
Acetate
3 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Bryant et al 1997 1997)
Phenol and
Formaldehyde
Ligands such as
citrate oxalate
lactate stabilized the
gel
4 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Gawish et al 2008)
Hydroquinone amp
Hexamethylenetetramine
2 sodium
carbonate needed
for softening and
stability
5 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Moradi 2000)
Terephthaladehyde
dihydroxynaphthalene
HMTA etc
Stable gel
6 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer (Moradi 2000)
Phenol formaldehyde Stable gel
7 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer
(Moradi 2000)
Phenyl acetate phenyl
salicylate etc with
HMTA
Stable gel lower
toxicity than phenol
amp formaldehyde gel
8 Acrylic esteracrylic acid Polyethyleneimine Stable gel required
Chapter 2 Literature Review
30
copolymer
(Moradi 2000)
larger concentration
amp cooling at below
93degC
9 Resorcinol
(Mahto et al 2009)
Formaldehyde Water like viscosity
of gelant is plus
toxicity is a problem
10 Scleroglucan
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Stable gel the
polymer is very
expensive
11 Lignosulfate
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Expensive gel due to
high chromium
required
12 Alcaligenes biopolymer PVA
(Moradi 2000)
Na+ phenol amp aldehyde Stable gel in pH
range of 7-8 higher
concentration of
polymer and
crosslinkers needed
13 PVA-polyvinylamide copolymer
(Hoskin and Shu 1989)
Dialdehydes or
polyaldehydes
Not widely used
14 Copolymer tert butyle acylate
(Al-Muntasheri et al 2006
2007)
Polyethyleneimine
15 Partially hydrolysed
polyacrylamide (Jia et al 2010
2011)
Polyethyleneimine
Chapter 2 Literature Review
31
25 SELECTION CRITERIA OF WELLS FOR GEL TREATMENT
Polymer gels can be applied to both injection and production wells (Al-Muntasheri et al
2010 Canbolat and Parlaktuna 2012) The objective of treating injection well is to
improve vertical injection profile resulting in more efficient distribution of injected water
(avery et al 1987) The production well treatment is to improve areal efficiency and to
reduce water oil ratio by reducing water channeling in the near wellbore region
(Giangiacomo 2001 Larson et al 1999 Ghafoori et al 2008) The following criterions
for candidate selection of injection and production wells are reported in the literature
(Maghsood and Bringham 1984 Sharma et al 2009)
251 Selection criteria for injection wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Low secondary oil recovery due to poor sweep efficiency that is high degree of
reservoir heterogeneity
(b) Pre-matured water breakthrough of producing wells
(c) Evidence of direct injector to producer channeling through fractures bugs or high
matrix permeability rock
(d) High injection rate associated with low well head pressure
252 Selection criteria for production wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Recovery calculations indicate that considerable mobile oil remains that could be
recovered most cost effectively if a blocking agent could be realistically placed in the
proper location
(b) High water oil ratio (WOR) values are observed
(c) The source of excess water production is identified (ie using profiles logs or
tracers)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
32
(d) The candidate well exhibits high productivity
26 DESIGNING GEL JOB FOR OIL FIELD APPLICATION
Gel volume is to be designed for both injection and production wells
261 Injection well
When cross flow occurs between thief zone and low permeability oil bearing zone a large
volume of gel is to be injected so that gel penetrates significant distance into the thief zone
(Romero et al 2003) In case where there is no cross flow ie thief zone is separated by an
impermeable barrierlayer from oil bearing zone a small volume of gel is placed near the
wellbore (Glenat et al 1996) Gel volume can be designed in two ways one is based on
filling a portion of channel volume from injector to producer and another is based on
distance from the injection well up to which the gel is to be placed (Parez et al 2001
Sarkissian et al 2005)
262 Production well
There are no definite design criteria available for bulk volume for producing well
treatment Gels with higher polymer concentrations are used in producing well (vs
injection well) treatment because the gel has to withstand high differential pressure in the
direction of producing wellbore (Glenat et al 1996 Giangiacomo 2001) Based on field
experience the following guidelines have been given
(a) Gel volume is equivalent to the volume of fluid that the well can produce in 24 hours
in a pumped-off condition
(b) Gel volume is based on 50 feet radius and thief zone thickness 0
(c) Gel volume is based on 50-200 barrels of gel per perforated foot
Chapter 2 Literature Review
33
26 CONCLUSIONS
The conclusion of the study provided strong evidence that stable gels can be produced
under harsh environmental conditions with organic and inorganic crosslinkers which may
be used for the profile modification jobs in the oil fields These crosslinkers typically
produced gels at temperature ranges from 40 degC to 140 degC and salinity up to 60000 ppm
They are generally less toxic then chromium acetate phenol and formaldehyde croslinkers
The majority of the crosslinkers are readily available at prices not much higher than the
toxic crosslinkers
Chapter 2 Literature Review
18
Step II
Formaldehyde produced in step-I then react with pyrocatechol to form a condensed
structure known as 3 4 5 6-tetramethylol pyrocatechol
+
O
C
H H
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
Pyrocatechol Formaldehyde 3 4 5 6 Tetramethylol Pyrocatechol
OH
4OH
Step III
The condensed molecule formed in step-II then reacts with PHPA to form the 3-
dimensional gel structure which helps in profile modification jobs
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide
Partially Hydrolized Polyacrylamide (PHPA)
Amide
O-
Na+
+
OH
OH
OH
OHHO
HO
3 4 5 6 Tetramethylol Pyrocatechol
Chapter 2 Literature Review
19
R
R
o N
H
H
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
HO
Water
Crosslinking 3-D gel structure 3-D Structure of polymer gel
23 MATHEMATICAL FLOW MODELS FOR THE RHEOLOGICAL BEHAVIOR
OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS
Several rheological models are reported in literature for the determination of rheological
behavior of polymer gel solutions (Kelessidis and Maglione 2006 Park and Song 2010)
The Bingham model is expressed as
τ = τ + kγ
Fluids that exhibit Bingham plastic behavior are characterized by a yield point (τ0) and a
plastic viscosity (μp) that is independent of the shear rate
There are several rheological models that involve three or more adjustable parameters It is
necessary to include a third parameter to describe the flow of the fluids in the upper or
lower Newtonian region as well as the Power law region The Herschel-Bulkley model
Chapter 2 Literature Review
20
corrects this deficiency by replacing the plastic viscosity term in the Bingham model with a
Power law expression as follows
τ = τ + kγ
τ ndash Shear stress Pa
τ0 ndash Yield point Pa
K ndash Consistency index Pasn
γ ndash Shear rate s-1
n ndash Flow behavior index
The parameters K and n are similar to those of power law model For fluids having a yield
stress however the calculated values of n and K will be different from those calculated
using power law model The parameter τ0 is the fluidrsquos yield stress at zero shear rate In
theory this yield stress is identical to the Bingham plastic yield point (YP) though its
calculated value is different The model is reduce to the Bingham plastic model when n=1
and reduces to the power law rheological model when τ0=0
In a general way the rheological model proposed by Mizrahi-Berk may be gives a good fit
with most of the rheograms of polymer gel systems
τ = τ + kγ
While the power index of the shear rate (n) is generally less than 1 to show a shear-thinning
behavior neither the consistency index nor yield stress from the models shows any pattern
with the solids content
A nonlinear relation exits between the shear stress and the shear rate above the yield stress
There are a number of rheological models used to describe this behavior RobertsonndashStiff
(Ohen and Bick 2011) proposed a three-parameter yield-pseudo-plastic model for relating
the shear stress to the shear rate may be used in determination of rheological behavior of
polymer gel system as follows
Chapter 2 Literature Review
21
τ = k (γ + C)
Where k C and n are model parameters The RobertsonndashStiff model includes the
Newtonian Bingham plastic and power law models as special cases
24 DEVELOPMENT OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS USING DIFFERENT
CROSS-LINKERS
Cross-linked polymers have been widely used for profile modification jobs over the last
decades (Mahto and Sharma 2010)
241 Polymers used for profile modification jobs
The most commonly used polymers are the following
2411 PolyacrylamidePartially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
These are water soluble polymer whose monomeric unit is the acrylamide molecule The
polyacrylamide has undergoes partially hydrolysis which causes anionic carboxyl group to
be scattered along the backbone chain (Wever et al 2011) The polymers are called
partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamide is between 1x106 to 8x106 The size of the molecules
about 01 to 03 micro meters By hydrolysis in a caustic water solution some of the
CONH2 group react to form carbyl group (COOH)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
22
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide Amide
O-
Na+
Figure 24 Chemical structure of partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
2412 Xanthan gum
Xanthan gum is a polysaccharide with a a-D-glucose backbone like cellulose but every
second glucose unit is attached to a triaccharide consisting of mannose glucuronic acid
and mannose The mannose closest to the backbone has an acetic acid ester on carbon 6
and the mannose at the end of the triaccharide is linked through carbons 6 and 4 to the
second carbon of pyruvic acid Xanthan gum is produced by the bacterium Xanthomonas
campestris which is found on crucifereous vegetables such as cabbage and cauliflower
The negatively charged carboxyl group on the side chains because the molecules to form
very viscous fluids when mixed with water (Chatterji and Borchardt 1981 Taylor and
Nasr-El-Din 1998)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
23
Figure 25 Chemical structure of xanthan gum (Song et al 2006)
2413 Copolymers
The main copolymers used in profile modification jobs are copolymer of acrylamide ter
polymer with N-vinyle pyrrolidone and 2-acrylamide-2-methyl-1-propanesulfonic acid
(PAAm-VP-AMPS) amphoteric copolymer polyacrylonitrile and lignin sulphonate
Table 21 Properties of polyacrylamide and xanthan gum polymers
Sl
No
Property Polyacrylamide Xanthan Gum
1 Transition Metal
Cations
Easily crosslinked Easily crosslinked
2 Shear stability Undergoes irreversible
shear degradation
Reversible shear thining
Chapter 2 Literature Review
24
3 Thermal stability Maximum use upto 225-
250 (degF)
Maximum use 160-170 (degF)
4 Hydrolytic
stability
Hydrolysis promoted by
acid or base Partially
hydrolyzed product more
sensitive to Ca+2 Mg+2
Hydrolytic de-
polymerization promoted by
acid or base especially at
high temperature
5 Oxidative
stability
Susceptible Particularly susceptible
especially at high
temperature
6 Brine tolerance Very limited especially to
Ca+2 Mg+2
Good tolerance to mono and
divalent captions
7 Microbial
degradation
Susceptible to attack by
yeast fungi bacteria
Very susceptible in aerobic
conditions
242 Cross linkers used for profile modification jobs
Crosslinkers are the chemical compound which formed stable three dimensional structures
with high molecular weight polymers like polyacrylamide and xanthan gum
The cross-linkers used in cross-linking of the high molecular weight polymers are the
following
2421 Metallic crosslinkers
The most common metallic crosslinkers are Al+3 Cr+6 Cr+3 zirconium titanium boron etc
2422 Organic crosslinkers
Two classes of organic cross-linkers namely phenolic and aldehydes are used for profile
modification jobs The different cross-linkers in the phenolic group are phenol
hydroquinone resorcinol phenyl acetate salicylic alcohol furfuryl alcohol etc In the
Chapter 2 Literature Review
25
aldehyde group main crosslinkers are formaldehyde paraformaldehyde hexamethylene
tetra mine etc
243 Emerging developments of cross linked polymer gel systems
Polymer gel systems have emerged as one of the most effective conformance solution for
controlling of excessive water production worldwide The different cross-linked polymer
gel systems are the following (Moradi 2000 Mahto and Sharma 2010)
2431 Polyacrylamide-chromium (III) gel system
The short gelation time of Cr(III)-acetatepolymer composition at elevated temperature
limit their application to reservoirs that are at relatively at lower temperatures (Sydansk and
Southwell 2000) The existing gelation characteristics of these systems have limited
control over the gelation time of the polymer solutions at elevated temperature For the
delay in gelation time at elevated temperature chromium (IV) or formaldehyde are used but
their use in the field is complicated by significant health and environmental issues At
present many organic ligands are used for their delaying power with Cr(III)polymer and
Cr(OAc)3 polymer solutions and provides outstanding control over the gelation time over
60-135degC With the use of this gelation time spanning the range from several hours to one
month or more at temperature up to 120degC The most interesting features of the ligands like
glycolate malonate and salicylate are their gelation delaying power and cost which
provides gelation delays of 12 to 33 times longer than acetate The other ligands include
oxalate citrate maleate and EDTA which are characteristic by their extremely strong Cr
(III) binding capacity and are found to block gelation entirely (Lane 1998 Jain et al
2004)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
26
2432 Polyacrylamide-chromium (IV)-thiourea gel system
The chromium (VI)-Thiourea-polyacrylamide gels form as the result of two chemical
reactions First chromium (VI) is reduced to chromium (III) by thiourea Second the
produced chromium (III) reacts with carboxylate groups on the partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide to form a crosslinked gel The pH range for the reduction of chromium (VI)
to chromium (III) by thiourea is in the range of 40 to 50 Gel times on the order of days to
weeks can be achieved which is desirable to allow proper placement of the gel system in
the formation Another option is to use chromium (III) ligands like acetate lactate or
manolate
2433 Xanthan-Cr(III) gel system
The chromium (III)-xanthan gel systems have been widely recommended for matrix
treatment because they are shear thinning inject easily and have been claimed to reheal
after shearing (Chang et al 1985 1988 Kolnes et al 1991 Liang et al 1992 Nagra et
al 1996) The initial gelation rate of xanthan-chromium gel system is inversely
proportional to the hydrogen ion concentration and is strongly affected by pH in the porous
matrix (Storm et al 1991)
2434 Acrylamide-polymerchromium (III)-carboxylate gel system
The aqous acrylamide-polymercarboxylate gels are formed by crosslinking water soluble
acrylamide polymers with a Cr(III) carboxylate complex crosslinking agent (Sydansk
1990) The water soluble acrylamide polymer can be polyacrylamide partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide or tert-polymer containing acrylamide Acrylamide-polymerCr(III)
carboxylate gels can be used for near wellbore total shutoff treatments where matrix rock is
to be treated These are stable at elevated temperatures and they are stable and rigid at
225degF at elevated temperature These new matrix of gels are functional in the presence of
high salinity water at elevated temperatures (Sydansk 1988)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
27
2435 Polyacrylamide-aluminum citrate gel system
The aluminum citrate solution form gels with anionic polyacrylamide under certain
conditions Cationic polymers do not form gels with aluminum under similar conditions
The low pH aluminum system begins crosslinking with polymer solution immediately
even before it can be injected This prevents in depth penetration of the plugging solution
Because aluminum is known to be amphoteric in aqueous solution they can crosslink at
high pH environment
2436 Polyacrylamide-polyethyleneimine gel system
These gels are rigid and non-flowing at polyacrylamide concentration of 7 and 9 These
are thermally stable at 100degC and a permeability reduction of more than 94 was realized
indicating the possibility of using this system in profile modification jobs or water shutoff
2437 KUSP1-monoethylphthalate systemKUSP1-boric acid gel system
KUSP1 is a biopolymer that is extracted from a medium after the growth of the bacterium
cellumonasflavigena It is nontoxic and exhibit viscosities on the order of 2-3 cP at 25degC
KUSP1 is soluble in alkali but forms a gel with monoethylphthalate ester and permeability
reduction by treatment with the KUSP1-MEP system is stable to brine flow for periods of
up to six months Alkaline KUSP1 can also form gel with boric acid and the gelation time
of the KUSP1-boric acid system could be regulated up to several days by selection of pH
and boric acid concentrations (Vossoughi and Buller 1991)
2438 Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine gel
system
Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine system at acidic
conditions the gelation time was short and the gel did not last for a longer period of time
Chapter 2 Literature Review
28
High viscosity is obtained at high initial values This system can be used where formation
brine contains high concentration of divalent cations (ranges from 10000 to 15000 mgl)
Iron (III) can react with the polymer and accelerated the gelation process and produce a gel
that breaks over a short periods of time (Al-Muntasheri 2007) Hence it should not be used
after acid treatment jobs especially in sandstone reservoirs as the possibility of iron
concentration is high in the well bore area which can cause premature setting of gel This
system can be used at a temperature less than 140degC (Al-Muntasheri 2007 2006 2008)
2439 Polyacrylamide-phenol-formaldehyde gel systemspolyacrylamide-resorcinol
formaldehyde gel system
Phenol-Formaldehyde polymer gels system is an attractive tool fluid shutoff or profile
modification in high temperature formations By selecting between different polymer
compositions reasonable flexibility in the gelation time can be achieved over the
temperature range from 60degC to at least 140degC (Bryant et al 1997 Mahto et al 2009
2010) Choice of polymer composition permits the control of the gelation time and the
gelants display good injectivity even when the residence time approaches the gelation time
(Zhuang et al 2000 Banerjee et al 2006) Cross-linking occurs over a wide range of pH
and is insensitive to lithology (Seright and Martin 1993 Dovan et al 1997)
24310 Polyacrylamide-hydroquinone-hexamine gel system
Hexamethylenetetramine (HMTA) undergoes hydrolysis to produce methyldiol and
ammonia Methyldiol compound is very much unstable Hence it looses water molecules to
produce formaldehyde Thus formed formaldehyde is then reacting with hydroquinone
Hydroquinone undergoes electrophilic substitution reaction to produce 2356
tetramethylol hydroquinone (intermediate) Then intermediate react with partially
hydrolyzed polyacrylamide (PHPA) polymer Hence form a large viscous molecule Hence
OHmacr in methylol group of intermediate and H+ from amide group of polymer are leaving as
Chapter 2 Literature Review
29
a water molecule while producing N-C crosslinker (Dovan et al 1997 Gwaish et al 2008
Mahto and Sheikh 2009)
Table 22 Summary of thermally stable gels
Sl
No
Polymers Crosslinkers Comments
1 Polyacrylamide low mol wt
(Bryant et al 1996)
Cr(III) Acetate 5 or more polymer
needed
2 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Lockhart and Albonico 1994)
Cr(III) Molonate Slower gelation rate
than with Cr(III)
Acetate
3 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Bryant et al 1997 1997)
Phenol and
Formaldehyde
Ligands such as
citrate oxalate
lactate stabilized the
gel
4 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Gawish et al 2008)
Hydroquinone amp
Hexamethylenetetramine
2 sodium
carbonate needed
for softening and
stability
5 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Moradi 2000)
Terephthaladehyde
dihydroxynaphthalene
HMTA etc
Stable gel
6 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer (Moradi 2000)
Phenol formaldehyde Stable gel
7 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer
(Moradi 2000)
Phenyl acetate phenyl
salicylate etc with
HMTA
Stable gel lower
toxicity than phenol
amp formaldehyde gel
8 Acrylic esteracrylic acid Polyethyleneimine Stable gel required
Chapter 2 Literature Review
30
copolymer
(Moradi 2000)
larger concentration
amp cooling at below
93degC
9 Resorcinol
(Mahto et al 2009)
Formaldehyde Water like viscosity
of gelant is plus
toxicity is a problem
10 Scleroglucan
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Stable gel the
polymer is very
expensive
11 Lignosulfate
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Expensive gel due to
high chromium
required
12 Alcaligenes biopolymer PVA
(Moradi 2000)
Na+ phenol amp aldehyde Stable gel in pH
range of 7-8 higher
concentration of
polymer and
crosslinkers needed
13 PVA-polyvinylamide copolymer
(Hoskin and Shu 1989)
Dialdehydes or
polyaldehydes
Not widely used
14 Copolymer tert butyle acylate
(Al-Muntasheri et al 2006
2007)
Polyethyleneimine
15 Partially hydrolysed
polyacrylamide (Jia et al 2010
2011)
Polyethyleneimine
Chapter 2 Literature Review
31
25 SELECTION CRITERIA OF WELLS FOR GEL TREATMENT
Polymer gels can be applied to both injection and production wells (Al-Muntasheri et al
2010 Canbolat and Parlaktuna 2012) The objective of treating injection well is to
improve vertical injection profile resulting in more efficient distribution of injected water
(avery et al 1987) The production well treatment is to improve areal efficiency and to
reduce water oil ratio by reducing water channeling in the near wellbore region
(Giangiacomo 2001 Larson et al 1999 Ghafoori et al 2008) The following criterions
for candidate selection of injection and production wells are reported in the literature
(Maghsood and Bringham 1984 Sharma et al 2009)
251 Selection criteria for injection wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Low secondary oil recovery due to poor sweep efficiency that is high degree of
reservoir heterogeneity
(b) Pre-matured water breakthrough of producing wells
(c) Evidence of direct injector to producer channeling through fractures bugs or high
matrix permeability rock
(d) High injection rate associated with low well head pressure
252 Selection criteria for production wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Recovery calculations indicate that considerable mobile oil remains that could be
recovered most cost effectively if a blocking agent could be realistically placed in the
proper location
(b) High water oil ratio (WOR) values are observed
(c) The source of excess water production is identified (ie using profiles logs or
tracers)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
32
(d) The candidate well exhibits high productivity
26 DESIGNING GEL JOB FOR OIL FIELD APPLICATION
Gel volume is to be designed for both injection and production wells
261 Injection well
When cross flow occurs between thief zone and low permeability oil bearing zone a large
volume of gel is to be injected so that gel penetrates significant distance into the thief zone
(Romero et al 2003) In case where there is no cross flow ie thief zone is separated by an
impermeable barrierlayer from oil bearing zone a small volume of gel is placed near the
wellbore (Glenat et al 1996) Gel volume can be designed in two ways one is based on
filling a portion of channel volume from injector to producer and another is based on
distance from the injection well up to which the gel is to be placed (Parez et al 2001
Sarkissian et al 2005)
262 Production well
There are no definite design criteria available for bulk volume for producing well
treatment Gels with higher polymer concentrations are used in producing well (vs
injection well) treatment because the gel has to withstand high differential pressure in the
direction of producing wellbore (Glenat et al 1996 Giangiacomo 2001) Based on field
experience the following guidelines have been given
(a) Gel volume is equivalent to the volume of fluid that the well can produce in 24 hours
in a pumped-off condition
(b) Gel volume is based on 50 feet radius and thief zone thickness 0
(c) Gel volume is based on 50-200 barrels of gel per perforated foot
Chapter 2 Literature Review
33
26 CONCLUSIONS
The conclusion of the study provided strong evidence that stable gels can be produced
under harsh environmental conditions with organic and inorganic crosslinkers which may
be used for the profile modification jobs in the oil fields These crosslinkers typically
produced gels at temperature ranges from 40 degC to 140 degC and salinity up to 60000 ppm
They are generally less toxic then chromium acetate phenol and formaldehyde croslinkers
The majority of the crosslinkers are readily available at prices not much higher than the
toxic crosslinkers
Chapter 2 Literature Review
19
R
R
o N
H
H
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
HO
Water
Crosslinking 3-D gel structure 3-D Structure of polymer gel
23 MATHEMATICAL FLOW MODELS FOR THE RHEOLOGICAL BEHAVIOR
OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS
Several rheological models are reported in literature for the determination of rheological
behavior of polymer gel solutions (Kelessidis and Maglione 2006 Park and Song 2010)
The Bingham model is expressed as
τ = τ + kγ
Fluids that exhibit Bingham plastic behavior are characterized by a yield point (τ0) and a
plastic viscosity (μp) that is independent of the shear rate
There are several rheological models that involve three or more adjustable parameters It is
necessary to include a third parameter to describe the flow of the fluids in the upper or
lower Newtonian region as well as the Power law region The Herschel-Bulkley model
Chapter 2 Literature Review
20
corrects this deficiency by replacing the plastic viscosity term in the Bingham model with a
Power law expression as follows
τ = τ + kγ
τ ndash Shear stress Pa
τ0 ndash Yield point Pa
K ndash Consistency index Pasn
γ ndash Shear rate s-1
n ndash Flow behavior index
The parameters K and n are similar to those of power law model For fluids having a yield
stress however the calculated values of n and K will be different from those calculated
using power law model The parameter τ0 is the fluidrsquos yield stress at zero shear rate In
theory this yield stress is identical to the Bingham plastic yield point (YP) though its
calculated value is different The model is reduce to the Bingham plastic model when n=1
and reduces to the power law rheological model when τ0=0
In a general way the rheological model proposed by Mizrahi-Berk may be gives a good fit
with most of the rheograms of polymer gel systems
τ = τ + kγ
While the power index of the shear rate (n) is generally less than 1 to show a shear-thinning
behavior neither the consistency index nor yield stress from the models shows any pattern
with the solids content
A nonlinear relation exits between the shear stress and the shear rate above the yield stress
There are a number of rheological models used to describe this behavior RobertsonndashStiff
(Ohen and Bick 2011) proposed a three-parameter yield-pseudo-plastic model for relating
the shear stress to the shear rate may be used in determination of rheological behavior of
polymer gel system as follows
Chapter 2 Literature Review
21
τ = k (γ + C)
Where k C and n are model parameters The RobertsonndashStiff model includes the
Newtonian Bingham plastic and power law models as special cases
24 DEVELOPMENT OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS USING DIFFERENT
CROSS-LINKERS
Cross-linked polymers have been widely used for profile modification jobs over the last
decades (Mahto and Sharma 2010)
241 Polymers used for profile modification jobs
The most commonly used polymers are the following
2411 PolyacrylamidePartially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
These are water soluble polymer whose monomeric unit is the acrylamide molecule The
polyacrylamide has undergoes partially hydrolysis which causes anionic carboxyl group to
be scattered along the backbone chain (Wever et al 2011) The polymers are called
partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamide is between 1x106 to 8x106 The size of the molecules
about 01 to 03 micro meters By hydrolysis in a caustic water solution some of the
CONH2 group react to form carbyl group (COOH)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
22
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide Amide
O-
Na+
Figure 24 Chemical structure of partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
2412 Xanthan gum
Xanthan gum is a polysaccharide with a a-D-glucose backbone like cellulose but every
second glucose unit is attached to a triaccharide consisting of mannose glucuronic acid
and mannose The mannose closest to the backbone has an acetic acid ester on carbon 6
and the mannose at the end of the triaccharide is linked through carbons 6 and 4 to the
second carbon of pyruvic acid Xanthan gum is produced by the bacterium Xanthomonas
campestris which is found on crucifereous vegetables such as cabbage and cauliflower
The negatively charged carboxyl group on the side chains because the molecules to form
very viscous fluids when mixed with water (Chatterji and Borchardt 1981 Taylor and
Nasr-El-Din 1998)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
23
Figure 25 Chemical structure of xanthan gum (Song et al 2006)
2413 Copolymers
The main copolymers used in profile modification jobs are copolymer of acrylamide ter
polymer with N-vinyle pyrrolidone and 2-acrylamide-2-methyl-1-propanesulfonic acid
(PAAm-VP-AMPS) amphoteric copolymer polyacrylonitrile and lignin sulphonate
Table 21 Properties of polyacrylamide and xanthan gum polymers
Sl
No
Property Polyacrylamide Xanthan Gum
1 Transition Metal
Cations
Easily crosslinked Easily crosslinked
2 Shear stability Undergoes irreversible
shear degradation
Reversible shear thining
Chapter 2 Literature Review
24
3 Thermal stability Maximum use upto 225-
250 (degF)
Maximum use 160-170 (degF)
4 Hydrolytic
stability
Hydrolysis promoted by
acid or base Partially
hydrolyzed product more
sensitive to Ca+2 Mg+2
Hydrolytic de-
polymerization promoted by
acid or base especially at
high temperature
5 Oxidative
stability
Susceptible Particularly susceptible
especially at high
temperature
6 Brine tolerance Very limited especially to
Ca+2 Mg+2
Good tolerance to mono and
divalent captions
7 Microbial
degradation
Susceptible to attack by
yeast fungi bacteria
Very susceptible in aerobic
conditions
242 Cross linkers used for profile modification jobs
Crosslinkers are the chemical compound which formed stable three dimensional structures
with high molecular weight polymers like polyacrylamide and xanthan gum
The cross-linkers used in cross-linking of the high molecular weight polymers are the
following
2421 Metallic crosslinkers
The most common metallic crosslinkers are Al+3 Cr+6 Cr+3 zirconium titanium boron etc
2422 Organic crosslinkers
Two classes of organic cross-linkers namely phenolic and aldehydes are used for profile
modification jobs The different cross-linkers in the phenolic group are phenol
hydroquinone resorcinol phenyl acetate salicylic alcohol furfuryl alcohol etc In the
Chapter 2 Literature Review
25
aldehyde group main crosslinkers are formaldehyde paraformaldehyde hexamethylene
tetra mine etc
243 Emerging developments of cross linked polymer gel systems
Polymer gel systems have emerged as one of the most effective conformance solution for
controlling of excessive water production worldwide The different cross-linked polymer
gel systems are the following (Moradi 2000 Mahto and Sharma 2010)
2431 Polyacrylamide-chromium (III) gel system
The short gelation time of Cr(III)-acetatepolymer composition at elevated temperature
limit their application to reservoirs that are at relatively at lower temperatures (Sydansk and
Southwell 2000) The existing gelation characteristics of these systems have limited
control over the gelation time of the polymer solutions at elevated temperature For the
delay in gelation time at elevated temperature chromium (IV) or formaldehyde are used but
their use in the field is complicated by significant health and environmental issues At
present many organic ligands are used for their delaying power with Cr(III)polymer and
Cr(OAc)3 polymer solutions and provides outstanding control over the gelation time over
60-135degC With the use of this gelation time spanning the range from several hours to one
month or more at temperature up to 120degC The most interesting features of the ligands like
glycolate malonate and salicylate are their gelation delaying power and cost which
provides gelation delays of 12 to 33 times longer than acetate The other ligands include
oxalate citrate maleate and EDTA which are characteristic by their extremely strong Cr
(III) binding capacity and are found to block gelation entirely (Lane 1998 Jain et al
2004)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
26
2432 Polyacrylamide-chromium (IV)-thiourea gel system
The chromium (VI)-Thiourea-polyacrylamide gels form as the result of two chemical
reactions First chromium (VI) is reduced to chromium (III) by thiourea Second the
produced chromium (III) reacts with carboxylate groups on the partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide to form a crosslinked gel The pH range for the reduction of chromium (VI)
to chromium (III) by thiourea is in the range of 40 to 50 Gel times on the order of days to
weeks can be achieved which is desirable to allow proper placement of the gel system in
the formation Another option is to use chromium (III) ligands like acetate lactate or
manolate
2433 Xanthan-Cr(III) gel system
The chromium (III)-xanthan gel systems have been widely recommended for matrix
treatment because they are shear thinning inject easily and have been claimed to reheal
after shearing (Chang et al 1985 1988 Kolnes et al 1991 Liang et al 1992 Nagra et
al 1996) The initial gelation rate of xanthan-chromium gel system is inversely
proportional to the hydrogen ion concentration and is strongly affected by pH in the porous
matrix (Storm et al 1991)
2434 Acrylamide-polymerchromium (III)-carboxylate gel system
The aqous acrylamide-polymercarboxylate gels are formed by crosslinking water soluble
acrylamide polymers with a Cr(III) carboxylate complex crosslinking agent (Sydansk
1990) The water soluble acrylamide polymer can be polyacrylamide partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide or tert-polymer containing acrylamide Acrylamide-polymerCr(III)
carboxylate gels can be used for near wellbore total shutoff treatments where matrix rock is
to be treated These are stable at elevated temperatures and they are stable and rigid at
225degF at elevated temperature These new matrix of gels are functional in the presence of
high salinity water at elevated temperatures (Sydansk 1988)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
27
2435 Polyacrylamide-aluminum citrate gel system
The aluminum citrate solution form gels with anionic polyacrylamide under certain
conditions Cationic polymers do not form gels with aluminum under similar conditions
The low pH aluminum system begins crosslinking with polymer solution immediately
even before it can be injected This prevents in depth penetration of the plugging solution
Because aluminum is known to be amphoteric in aqueous solution they can crosslink at
high pH environment
2436 Polyacrylamide-polyethyleneimine gel system
These gels are rigid and non-flowing at polyacrylamide concentration of 7 and 9 These
are thermally stable at 100degC and a permeability reduction of more than 94 was realized
indicating the possibility of using this system in profile modification jobs or water shutoff
2437 KUSP1-monoethylphthalate systemKUSP1-boric acid gel system
KUSP1 is a biopolymer that is extracted from a medium after the growth of the bacterium
cellumonasflavigena It is nontoxic and exhibit viscosities on the order of 2-3 cP at 25degC
KUSP1 is soluble in alkali but forms a gel with monoethylphthalate ester and permeability
reduction by treatment with the KUSP1-MEP system is stable to brine flow for periods of
up to six months Alkaline KUSP1 can also form gel with boric acid and the gelation time
of the KUSP1-boric acid system could be regulated up to several days by selection of pH
and boric acid concentrations (Vossoughi and Buller 1991)
2438 Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine gel
system
Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine system at acidic
conditions the gelation time was short and the gel did not last for a longer period of time
Chapter 2 Literature Review
28
High viscosity is obtained at high initial values This system can be used where formation
brine contains high concentration of divalent cations (ranges from 10000 to 15000 mgl)
Iron (III) can react with the polymer and accelerated the gelation process and produce a gel
that breaks over a short periods of time (Al-Muntasheri 2007) Hence it should not be used
after acid treatment jobs especially in sandstone reservoirs as the possibility of iron
concentration is high in the well bore area which can cause premature setting of gel This
system can be used at a temperature less than 140degC (Al-Muntasheri 2007 2006 2008)
2439 Polyacrylamide-phenol-formaldehyde gel systemspolyacrylamide-resorcinol
formaldehyde gel system
Phenol-Formaldehyde polymer gels system is an attractive tool fluid shutoff or profile
modification in high temperature formations By selecting between different polymer
compositions reasonable flexibility in the gelation time can be achieved over the
temperature range from 60degC to at least 140degC (Bryant et al 1997 Mahto et al 2009
2010) Choice of polymer composition permits the control of the gelation time and the
gelants display good injectivity even when the residence time approaches the gelation time
(Zhuang et al 2000 Banerjee et al 2006) Cross-linking occurs over a wide range of pH
and is insensitive to lithology (Seright and Martin 1993 Dovan et al 1997)
24310 Polyacrylamide-hydroquinone-hexamine gel system
Hexamethylenetetramine (HMTA) undergoes hydrolysis to produce methyldiol and
ammonia Methyldiol compound is very much unstable Hence it looses water molecules to
produce formaldehyde Thus formed formaldehyde is then reacting with hydroquinone
Hydroquinone undergoes electrophilic substitution reaction to produce 2356
tetramethylol hydroquinone (intermediate) Then intermediate react with partially
hydrolyzed polyacrylamide (PHPA) polymer Hence form a large viscous molecule Hence
OHmacr in methylol group of intermediate and H+ from amide group of polymer are leaving as
Chapter 2 Literature Review
29
a water molecule while producing N-C crosslinker (Dovan et al 1997 Gwaish et al 2008
Mahto and Sheikh 2009)
Table 22 Summary of thermally stable gels
Sl
No
Polymers Crosslinkers Comments
1 Polyacrylamide low mol wt
(Bryant et al 1996)
Cr(III) Acetate 5 or more polymer
needed
2 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Lockhart and Albonico 1994)
Cr(III) Molonate Slower gelation rate
than with Cr(III)
Acetate
3 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Bryant et al 1997 1997)
Phenol and
Formaldehyde
Ligands such as
citrate oxalate
lactate stabilized the
gel
4 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Gawish et al 2008)
Hydroquinone amp
Hexamethylenetetramine
2 sodium
carbonate needed
for softening and
stability
5 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Moradi 2000)
Terephthaladehyde
dihydroxynaphthalene
HMTA etc
Stable gel
6 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer (Moradi 2000)
Phenol formaldehyde Stable gel
7 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer
(Moradi 2000)
Phenyl acetate phenyl
salicylate etc with
HMTA
Stable gel lower
toxicity than phenol
amp formaldehyde gel
8 Acrylic esteracrylic acid Polyethyleneimine Stable gel required
Chapter 2 Literature Review
30
copolymer
(Moradi 2000)
larger concentration
amp cooling at below
93degC
9 Resorcinol
(Mahto et al 2009)
Formaldehyde Water like viscosity
of gelant is plus
toxicity is a problem
10 Scleroglucan
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Stable gel the
polymer is very
expensive
11 Lignosulfate
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Expensive gel due to
high chromium
required
12 Alcaligenes biopolymer PVA
(Moradi 2000)
Na+ phenol amp aldehyde Stable gel in pH
range of 7-8 higher
concentration of
polymer and
crosslinkers needed
13 PVA-polyvinylamide copolymer
(Hoskin and Shu 1989)
Dialdehydes or
polyaldehydes
Not widely used
14 Copolymer tert butyle acylate
(Al-Muntasheri et al 2006
2007)
Polyethyleneimine
15 Partially hydrolysed
polyacrylamide (Jia et al 2010
2011)
Polyethyleneimine
Chapter 2 Literature Review
31
25 SELECTION CRITERIA OF WELLS FOR GEL TREATMENT
Polymer gels can be applied to both injection and production wells (Al-Muntasheri et al
2010 Canbolat and Parlaktuna 2012) The objective of treating injection well is to
improve vertical injection profile resulting in more efficient distribution of injected water
(avery et al 1987) The production well treatment is to improve areal efficiency and to
reduce water oil ratio by reducing water channeling in the near wellbore region
(Giangiacomo 2001 Larson et al 1999 Ghafoori et al 2008) The following criterions
for candidate selection of injection and production wells are reported in the literature
(Maghsood and Bringham 1984 Sharma et al 2009)
251 Selection criteria for injection wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Low secondary oil recovery due to poor sweep efficiency that is high degree of
reservoir heterogeneity
(b) Pre-matured water breakthrough of producing wells
(c) Evidence of direct injector to producer channeling through fractures bugs or high
matrix permeability rock
(d) High injection rate associated with low well head pressure
252 Selection criteria for production wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Recovery calculations indicate that considerable mobile oil remains that could be
recovered most cost effectively if a blocking agent could be realistically placed in the
proper location
(b) High water oil ratio (WOR) values are observed
(c) The source of excess water production is identified (ie using profiles logs or
tracers)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
32
(d) The candidate well exhibits high productivity
26 DESIGNING GEL JOB FOR OIL FIELD APPLICATION
Gel volume is to be designed for both injection and production wells
261 Injection well
When cross flow occurs between thief zone and low permeability oil bearing zone a large
volume of gel is to be injected so that gel penetrates significant distance into the thief zone
(Romero et al 2003) In case where there is no cross flow ie thief zone is separated by an
impermeable barrierlayer from oil bearing zone a small volume of gel is placed near the
wellbore (Glenat et al 1996) Gel volume can be designed in two ways one is based on
filling a portion of channel volume from injector to producer and another is based on
distance from the injection well up to which the gel is to be placed (Parez et al 2001
Sarkissian et al 2005)
262 Production well
There are no definite design criteria available for bulk volume for producing well
treatment Gels with higher polymer concentrations are used in producing well (vs
injection well) treatment because the gel has to withstand high differential pressure in the
direction of producing wellbore (Glenat et al 1996 Giangiacomo 2001) Based on field
experience the following guidelines have been given
(a) Gel volume is equivalent to the volume of fluid that the well can produce in 24 hours
in a pumped-off condition
(b) Gel volume is based on 50 feet radius and thief zone thickness 0
(c) Gel volume is based on 50-200 barrels of gel per perforated foot
Chapter 2 Literature Review
33
26 CONCLUSIONS
The conclusion of the study provided strong evidence that stable gels can be produced
under harsh environmental conditions with organic and inorganic crosslinkers which may
be used for the profile modification jobs in the oil fields These crosslinkers typically
produced gels at temperature ranges from 40 degC to 140 degC and salinity up to 60000 ppm
They are generally less toxic then chromium acetate phenol and formaldehyde croslinkers
The majority of the crosslinkers are readily available at prices not much higher than the
toxic crosslinkers
Chapter 2 Literature Review
20
corrects this deficiency by replacing the plastic viscosity term in the Bingham model with a
Power law expression as follows
τ = τ + kγ
τ ndash Shear stress Pa
τ0 ndash Yield point Pa
K ndash Consistency index Pasn
γ ndash Shear rate s-1
n ndash Flow behavior index
The parameters K and n are similar to those of power law model For fluids having a yield
stress however the calculated values of n and K will be different from those calculated
using power law model The parameter τ0 is the fluidrsquos yield stress at zero shear rate In
theory this yield stress is identical to the Bingham plastic yield point (YP) though its
calculated value is different The model is reduce to the Bingham plastic model when n=1
and reduces to the power law rheological model when τ0=0
In a general way the rheological model proposed by Mizrahi-Berk may be gives a good fit
with most of the rheograms of polymer gel systems
τ = τ + kγ
While the power index of the shear rate (n) is generally less than 1 to show a shear-thinning
behavior neither the consistency index nor yield stress from the models shows any pattern
with the solids content
A nonlinear relation exits between the shear stress and the shear rate above the yield stress
There are a number of rheological models used to describe this behavior RobertsonndashStiff
(Ohen and Bick 2011) proposed a three-parameter yield-pseudo-plastic model for relating
the shear stress to the shear rate may be used in determination of rheological behavior of
polymer gel system as follows
Chapter 2 Literature Review
21
τ = k (γ + C)
Where k C and n are model parameters The RobertsonndashStiff model includes the
Newtonian Bingham plastic and power law models as special cases
24 DEVELOPMENT OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS USING DIFFERENT
CROSS-LINKERS
Cross-linked polymers have been widely used for profile modification jobs over the last
decades (Mahto and Sharma 2010)
241 Polymers used for profile modification jobs
The most commonly used polymers are the following
2411 PolyacrylamidePartially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
These are water soluble polymer whose monomeric unit is the acrylamide molecule The
polyacrylamide has undergoes partially hydrolysis which causes anionic carboxyl group to
be scattered along the backbone chain (Wever et al 2011) The polymers are called
partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamide is between 1x106 to 8x106 The size of the molecules
about 01 to 03 micro meters By hydrolysis in a caustic water solution some of the
CONH2 group react to form carbyl group (COOH)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
22
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide Amide
O-
Na+
Figure 24 Chemical structure of partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
2412 Xanthan gum
Xanthan gum is a polysaccharide with a a-D-glucose backbone like cellulose but every
second glucose unit is attached to a triaccharide consisting of mannose glucuronic acid
and mannose The mannose closest to the backbone has an acetic acid ester on carbon 6
and the mannose at the end of the triaccharide is linked through carbons 6 and 4 to the
second carbon of pyruvic acid Xanthan gum is produced by the bacterium Xanthomonas
campestris which is found on crucifereous vegetables such as cabbage and cauliflower
The negatively charged carboxyl group on the side chains because the molecules to form
very viscous fluids when mixed with water (Chatterji and Borchardt 1981 Taylor and
Nasr-El-Din 1998)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
23
Figure 25 Chemical structure of xanthan gum (Song et al 2006)
2413 Copolymers
The main copolymers used in profile modification jobs are copolymer of acrylamide ter
polymer with N-vinyle pyrrolidone and 2-acrylamide-2-methyl-1-propanesulfonic acid
(PAAm-VP-AMPS) amphoteric copolymer polyacrylonitrile and lignin sulphonate
Table 21 Properties of polyacrylamide and xanthan gum polymers
Sl
No
Property Polyacrylamide Xanthan Gum
1 Transition Metal
Cations
Easily crosslinked Easily crosslinked
2 Shear stability Undergoes irreversible
shear degradation
Reversible shear thining
Chapter 2 Literature Review
24
3 Thermal stability Maximum use upto 225-
250 (degF)
Maximum use 160-170 (degF)
4 Hydrolytic
stability
Hydrolysis promoted by
acid or base Partially
hydrolyzed product more
sensitive to Ca+2 Mg+2
Hydrolytic de-
polymerization promoted by
acid or base especially at
high temperature
5 Oxidative
stability
Susceptible Particularly susceptible
especially at high
temperature
6 Brine tolerance Very limited especially to
Ca+2 Mg+2
Good tolerance to mono and
divalent captions
7 Microbial
degradation
Susceptible to attack by
yeast fungi bacteria
Very susceptible in aerobic
conditions
242 Cross linkers used for profile modification jobs
Crosslinkers are the chemical compound which formed stable three dimensional structures
with high molecular weight polymers like polyacrylamide and xanthan gum
The cross-linkers used in cross-linking of the high molecular weight polymers are the
following
2421 Metallic crosslinkers
The most common metallic crosslinkers are Al+3 Cr+6 Cr+3 zirconium titanium boron etc
2422 Organic crosslinkers
Two classes of organic cross-linkers namely phenolic and aldehydes are used for profile
modification jobs The different cross-linkers in the phenolic group are phenol
hydroquinone resorcinol phenyl acetate salicylic alcohol furfuryl alcohol etc In the
Chapter 2 Literature Review
25
aldehyde group main crosslinkers are formaldehyde paraformaldehyde hexamethylene
tetra mine etc
243 Emerging developments of cross linked polymer gel systems
Polymer gel systems have emerged as one of the most effective conformance solution for
controlling of excessive water production worldwide The different cross-linked polymer
gel systems are the following (Moradi 2000 Mahto and Sharma 2010)
2431 Polyacrylamide-chromium (III) gel system
The short gelation time of Cr(III)-acetatepolymer composition at elevated temperature
limit their application to reservoirs that are at relatively at lower temperatures (Sydansk and
Southwell 2000) The existing gelation characteristics of these systems have limited
control over the gelation time of the polymer solutions at elevated temperature For the
delay in gelation time at elevated temperature chromium (IV) or formaldehyde are used but
their use in the field is complicated by significant health and environmental issues At
present many organic ligands are used for their delaying power with Cr(III)polymer and
Cr(OAc)3 polymer solutions and provides outstanding control over the gelation time over
60-135degC With the use of this gelation time spanning the range from several hours to one
month or more at temperature up to 120degC The most interesting features of the ligands like
glycolate malonate and salicylate are their gelation delaying power and cost which
provides gelation delays of 12 to 33 times longer than acetate The other ligands include
oxalate citrate maleate and EDTA which are characteristic by their extremely strong Cr
(III) binding capacity and are found to block gelation entirely (Lane 1998 Jain et al
2004)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
26
2432 Polyacrylamide-chromium (IV)-thiourea gel system
The chromium (VI)-Thiourea-polyacrylamide gels form as the result of two chemical
reactions First chromium (VI) is reduced to chromium (III) by thiourea Second the
produced chromium (III) reacts with carboxylate groups on the partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide to form a crosslinked gel The pH range for the reduction of chromium (VI)
to chromium (III) by thiourea is in the range of 40 to 50 Gel times on the order of days to
weeks can be achieved which is desirable to allow proper placement of the gel system in
the formation Another option is to use chromium (III) ligands like acetate lactate or
manolate
2433 Xanthan-Cr(III) gel system
The chromium (III)-xanthan gel systems have been widely recommended for matrix
treatment because they are shear thinning inject easily and have been claimed to reheal
after shearing (Chang et al 1985 1988 Kolnes et al 1991 Liang et al 1992 Nagra et
al 1996) The initial gelation rate of xanthan-chromium gel system is inversely
proportional to the hydrogen ion concentration and is strongly affected by pH in the porous
matrix (Storm et al 1991)
2434 Acrylamide-polymerchromium (III)-carboxylate gel system
The aqous acrylamide-polymercarboxylate gels are formed by crosslinking water soluble
acrylamide polymers with a Cr(III) carboxylate complex crosslinking agent (Sydansk
1990) The water soluble acrylamide polymer can be polyacrylamide partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide or tert-polymer containing acrylamide Acrylamide-polymerCr(III)
carboxylate gels can be used for near wellbore total shutoff treatments where matrix rock is
to be treated These are stable at elevated temperatures and they are stable and rigid at
225degF at elevated temperature These new matrix of gels are functional in the presence of
high salinity water at elevated temperatures (Sydansk 1988)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
27
2435 Polyacrylamide-aluminum citrate gel system
The aluminum citrate solution form gels with anionic polyacrylamide under certain
conditions Cationic polymers do not form gels with aluminum under similar conditions
The low pH aluminum system begins crosslinking with polymer solution immediately
even before it can be injected This prevents in depth penetration of the plugging solution
Because aluminum is known to be amphoteric in aqueous solution they can crosslink at
high pH environment
2436 Polyacrylamide-polyethyleneimine gel system
These gels are rigid and non-flowing at polyacrylamide concentration of 7 and 9 These
are thermally stable at 100degC and a permeability reduction of more than 94 was realized
indicating the possibility of using this system in profile modification jobs or water shutoff
2437 KUSP1-monoethylphthalate systemKUSP1-boric acid gel system
KUSP1 is a biopolymer that is extracted from a medium after the growth of the bacterium
cellumonasflavigena It is nontoxic and exhibit viscosities on the order of 2-3 cP at 25degC
KUSP1 is soluble in alkali but forms a gel with monoethylphthalate ester and permeability
reduction by treatment with the KUSP1-MEP system is stable to brine flow for periods of
up to six months Alkaline KUSP1 can also form gel with boric acid and the gelation time
of the KUSP1-boric acid system could be regulated up to several days by selection of pH
and boric acid concentrations (Vossoughi and Buller 1991)
2438 Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine gel
system
Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine system at acidic
conditions the gelation time was short and the gel did not last for a longer period of time
Chapter 2 Literature Review
28
High viscosity is obtained at high initial values This system can be used where formation
brine contains high concentration of divalent cations (ranges from 10000 to 15000 mgl)
Iron (III) can react with the polymer and accelerated the gelation process and produce a gel
that breaks over a short periods of time (Al-Muntasheri 2007) Hence it should not be used
after acid treatment jobs especially in sandstone reservoirs as the possibility of iron
concentration is high in the well bore area which can cause premature setting of gel This
system can be used at a temperature less than 140degC (Al-Muntasheri 2007 2006 2008)
2439 Polyacrylamide-phenol-formaldehyde gel systemspolyacrylamide-resorcinol
formaldehyde gel system
Phenol-Formaldehyde polymer gels system is an attractive tool fluid shutoff or profile
modification in high temperature formations By selecting between different polymer
compositions reasonable flexibility in the gelation time can be achieved over the
temperature range from 60degC to at least 140degC (Bryant et al 1997 Mahto et al 2009
2010) Choice of polymer composition permits the control of the gelation time and the
gelants display good injectivity even when the residence time approaches the gelation time
(Zhuang et al 2000 Banerjee et al 2006) Cross-linking occurs over a wide range of pH
and is insensitive to lithology (Seright and Martin 1993 Dovan et al 1997)
24310 Polyacrylamide-hydroquinone-hexamine gel system
Hexamethylenetetramine (HMTA) undergoes hydrolysis to produce methyldiol and
ammonia Methyldiol compound is very much unstable Hence it looses water molecules to
produce formaldehyde Thus formed formaldehyde is then reacting with hydroquinone
Hydroquinone undergoes electrophilic substitution reaction to produce 2356
tetramethylol hydroquinone (intermediate) Then intermediate react with partially
hydrolyzed polyacrylamide (PHPA) polymer Hence form a large viscous molecule Hence
OHmacr in methylol group of intermediate and H+ from amide group of polymer are leaving as
Chapter 2 Literature Review
29
a water molecule while producing N-C crosslinker (Dovan et al 1997 Gwaish et al 2008
Mahto and Sheikh 2009)
Table 22 Summary of thermally stable gels
Sl
No
Polymers Crosslinkers Comments
1 Polyacrylamide low mol wt
(Bryant et al 1996)
Cr(III) Acetate 5 or more polymer
needed
2 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Lockhart and Albonico 1994)
Cr(III) Molonate Slower gelation rate
than with Cr(III)
Acetate
3 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Bryant et al 1997 1997)
Phenol and
Formaldehyde
Ligands such as
citrate oxalate
lactate stabilized the
gel
4 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Gawish et al 2008)
Hydroquinone amp
Hexamethylenetetramine
2 sodium
carbonate needed
for softening and
stability
5 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Moradi 2000)
Terephthaladehyde
dihydroxynaphthalene
HMTA etc
Stable gel
6 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer (Moradi 2000)
Phenol formaldehyde Stable gel
7 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer
(Moradi 2000)
Phenyl acetate phenyl
salicylate etc with
HMTA
Stable gel lower
toxicity than phenol
amp formaldehyde gel
8 Acrylic esteracrylic acid Polyethyleneimine Stable gel required
Chapter 2 Literature Review
30
copolymer
(Moradi 2000)
larger concentration
amp cooling at below
93degC
9 Resorcinol
(Mahto et al 2009)
Formaldehyde Water like viscosity
of gelant is plus
toxicity is a problem
10 Scleroglucan
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Stable gel the
polymer is very
expensive
11 Lignosulfate
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Expensive gel due to
high chromium
required
12 Alcaligenes biopolymer PVA
(Moradi 2000)
Na+ phenol amp aldehyde Stable gel in pH
range of 7-8 higher
concentration of
polymer and
crosslinkers needed
13 PVA-polyvinylamide copolymer
(Hoskin and Shu 1989)
Dialdehydes or
polyaldehydes
Not widely used
14 Copolymer tert butyle acylate
(Al-Muntasheri et al 2006
2007)
Polyethyleneimine
15 Partially hydrolysed
polyacrylamide (Jia et al 2010
2011)
Polyethyleneimine
Chapter 2 Literature Review
31
25 SELECTION CRITERIA OF WELLS FOR GEL TREATMENT
Polymer gels can be applied to both injection and production wells (Al-Muntasheri et al
2010 Canbolat and Parlaktuna 2012) The objective of treating injection well is to
improve vertical injection profile resulting in more efficient distribution of injected water
(avery et al 1987) The production well treatment is to improve areal efficiency and to
reduce water oil ratio by reducing water channeling in the near wellbore region
(Giangiacomo 2001 Larson et al 1999 Ghafoori et al 2008) The following criterions
for candidate selection of injection and production wells are reported in the literature
(Maghsood and Bringham 1984 Sharma et al 2009)
251 Selection criteria for injection wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Low secondary oil recovery due to poor sweep efficiency that is high degree of
reservoir heterogeneity
(b) Pre-matured water breakthrough of producing wells
(c) Evidence of direct injector to producer channeling through fractures bugs or high
matrix permeability rock
(d) High injection rate associated with low well head pressure
252 Selection criteria for production wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Recovery calculations indicate that considerable mobile oil remains that could be
recovered most cost effectively if a blocking agent could be realistically placed in the
proper location
(b) High water oil ratio (WOR) values are observed
(c) The source of excess water production is identified (ie using profiles logs or
tracers)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
32
(d) The candidate well exhibits high productivity
26 DESIGNING GEL JOB FOR OIL FIELD APPLICATION
Gel volume is to be designed for both injection and production wells
261 Injection well
When cross flow occurs between thief zone and low permeability oil bearing zone a large
volume of gel is to be injected so that gel penetrates significant distance into the thief zone
(Romero et al 2003) In case where there is no cross flow ie thief zone is separated by an
impermeable barrierlayer from oil bearing zone a small volume of gel is placed near the
wellbore (Glenat et al 1996) Gel volume can be designed in two ways one is based on
filling a portion of channel volume from injector to producer and another is based on
distance from the injection well up to which the gel is to be placed (Parez et al 2001
Sarkissian et al 2005)
262 Production well
There are no definite design criteria available for bulk volume for producing well
treatment Gels with higher polymer concentrations are used in producing well (vs
injection well) treatment because the gel has to withstand high differential pressure in the
direction of producing wellbore (Glenat et al 1996 Giangiacomo 2001) Based on field
experience the following guidelines have been given
(a) Gel volume is equivalent to the volume of fluid that the well can produce in 24 hours
in a pumped-off condition
(b) Gel volume is based on 50 feet radius and thief zone thickness 0
(c) Gel volume is based on 50-200 barrels of gel per perforated foot
Chapter 2 Literature Review
33
26 CONCLUSIONS
The conclusion of the study provided strong evidence that stable gels can be produced
under harsh environmental conditions with organic and inorganic crosslinkers which may
be used for the profile modification jobs in the oil fields These crosslinkers typically
produced gels at temperature ranges from 40 degC to 140 degC and salinity up to 60000 ppm
They are generally less toxic then chromium acetate phenol and formaldehyde croslinkers
The majority of the crosslinkers are readily available at prices not much higher than the
toxic crosslinkers
Chapter 2 Literature Review
21
τ = k (γ + C)
Where k C and n are model parameters The RobertsonndashStiff model includes the
Newtonian Bingham plastic and power law models as special cases
24 DEVELOPMENT OF POLYMER GEL SYSTEMS USING DIFFERENT
CROSS-LINKERS
Cross-linked polymers have been widely used for profile modification jobs over the last
decades (Mahto and Sharma 2010)
241 Polymers used for profile modification jobs
The most commonly used polymers are the following
2411 PolyacrylamidePartially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
These are water soluble polymer whose monomeric unit is the acrylamide molecule The
polyacrylamide has undergoes partially hydrolysis which causes anionic carboxyl group to
be scattered along the backbone chain (Wever et al 2011) The polymers are called
partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamide is between 1x106 to 8x106 The size of the molecules
about 01 to 03 micro meters By hydrolysis in a caustic water solution some of the
CONH2 group react to form carbyl group (COOH)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
22
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide Amide
O-
Na+
Figure 24 Chemical structure of partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
2412 Xanthan gum
Xanthan gum is a polysaccharide with a a-D-glucose backbone like cellulose but every
second glucose unit is attached to a triaccharide consisting of mannose glucuronic acid
and mannose The mannose closest to the backbone has an acetic acid ester on carbon 6
and the mannose at the end of the triaccharide is linked through carbons 6 and 4 to the
second carbon of pyruvic acid Xanthan gum is produced by the bacterium Xanthomonas
campestris which is found on crucifereous vegetables such as cabbage and cauliflower
The negatively charged carboxyl group on the side chains because the molecules to form
very viscous fluids when mixed with water (Chatterji and Borchardt 1981 Taylor and
Nasr-El-Din 1998)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
23
Figure 25 Chemical structure of xanthan gum (Song et al 2006)
2413 Copolymers
The main copolymers used in profile modification jobs are copolymer of acrylamide ter
polymer with N-vinyle pyrrolidone and 2-acrylamide-2-methyl-1-propanesulfonic acid
(PAAm-VP-AMPS) amphoteric copolymer polyacrylonitrile and lignin sulphonate
Table 21 Properties of polyacrylamide and xanthan gum polymers
Sl
No
Property Polyacrylamide Xanthan Gum
1 Transition Metal
Cations
Easily crosslinked Easily crosslinked
2 Shear stability Undergoes irreversible
shear degradation
Reversible shear thining
Chapter 2 Literature Review
24
3 Thermal stability Maximum use upto 225-
250 (degF)
Maximum use 160-170 (degF)
4 Hydrolytic
stability
Hydrolysis promoted by
acid or base Partially
hydrolyzed product more
sensitive to Ca+2 Mg+2
Hydrolytic de-
polymerization promoted by
acid or base especially at
high temperature
5 Oxidative
stability
Susceptible Particularly susceptible
especially at high
temperature
6 Brine tolerance Very limited especially to
Ca+2 Mg+2
Good tolerance to mono and
divalent captions
7 Microbial
degradation
Susceptible to attack by
yeast fungi bacteria
Very susceptible in aerobic
conditions
242 Cross linkers used for profile modification jobs
Crosslinkers are the chemical compound which formed stable three dimensional structures
with high molecular weight polymers like polyacrylamide and xanthan gum
The cross-linkers used in cross-linking of the high molecular weight polymers are the
following
2421 Metallic crosslinkers
The most common metallic crosslinkers are Al+3 Cr+6 Cr+3 zirconium titanium boron etc
2422 Organic crosslinkers
Two classes of organic cross-linkers namely phenolic and aldehydes are used for profile
modification jobs The different cross-linkers in the phenolic group are phenol
hydroquinone resorcinol phenyl acetate salicylic alcohol furfuryl alcohol etc In the
Chapter 2 Literature Review
25
aldehyde group main crosslinkers are formaldehyde paraformaldehyde hexamethylene
tetra mine etc
243 Emerging developments of cross linked polymer gel systems
Polymer gel systems have emerged as one of the most effective conformance solution for
controlling of excessive water production worldwide The different cross-linked polymer
gel systems are the following (Moradi 2000 Mahto and Sharma 2010)
2431 Polyacrylamide-chromium (III) gel system
The short gelation time of Cr(III)-acetatepolymer composition at elevated temperature
limit their application to reservoirs that are at relatively at lower temperatures (Sydansk and
Southwell 2000) The existing gelation characteristics of these systems have limited
control over the gelation time of the polymer solutions at elevated temperature For the
delay in gelation time at elevated temperature chromium (IV) or formaldehyde are used but
their use in the field is complicated by significant health and environmental issues At
present many organic ligands are used for their delaying power with Cr(III)polymer and
Cr(OAc)3 polymer solutions and provides outstanding control over the gelation time over
60-135degC With the use of this gelation time spanning the range from several hours to one
month or more at temperature up to 120degC The most interesting features of the ligands like
glycolate malonate and salicylate are their gelation delaying power and cost which
provides gelation delays of 12 to 33 times longer than acetate The other ligands include
oxalate citrate maleate and EDTA which are characteristic by their extremely strong Cr
(III) binding capacity and are found to block gelation entirely (Lane 1998 Jain et al
2004)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
26
2432 Polyacrylamide-chromium (IV)-thiourea gel system
The chromium (VI)-Thiourea-polyacrylamide gels form as the result of two chemical
reactions First chromium (VI) is reduced to chromium (III) by thiourea Second the
produced chromium (III) reacts with carboxylate groups on the partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide to form a crosslinked gel The pH range for the reduction of chromium (VI)
to chromium (III) by thiourea is in the range of 40 to 50 Gel times on the order of days to
weeks can be achieved which is desirable to allow proper placement of the gel system in
the formation Another option is to use chromium (III) ligands like acetate lactate or
manolate
2433 Xanthan-Cr(III) gel system
The chromium (III)-xanthan gel systems have been widely recommended for matrix
treatment because they are shear thinning inject easily and have been claimed to reheal
after shearing (Chang et al 1985 1988 Kolnes et al 1991 Liang et al 1992 Nagra et
al 1996) The initial gelation rate of xanthan-chromium gel system is inversely
proportional to the hydrogen ion concentration and is strongly affected by pH in the porous
matrix (Storm et al 1991)
2434 Acrylamide-polymerchromium (III)-carboxylate gel system
The aqous acrylamide-polymercarboxylate gels are formed by crosslinking water soluble
acrylamide polymers with a Cr(III) carboxylate complex crosslinking agent (Sydansk
1990) The water soluble acrylamide polymer can be polyacrylamide partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide or tert-polymer containing acrylamide Acrylamide-polymerCr(III)
carboxylate gels can be used for near wellbore total shutoff treatments where matrix rock is
to be treated These are stable at elevated temperatures and they are stable and rigid at
225degF at elevated temperature These new matrix of gels are functional in the presence of
high salinity water at elevated temperatures (Sydansk 1988)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
27
2435 Polyacrylamide-aluminum citrate gel system
The aluminum citrate solution form gels with anionic polyacrylamide under certain
conditions Cationic polymers do not form gels with aluminum under similar conditions
The low pH aluminum system begins crosslinking with polymer solution immediately
even before it can be injected This prevents in depth penetration of the plugging solution
Because aluminum is known to be amphoteric in aqueous solution they can crosslink at
high pH environment
2436 Polyacrylamide-polyethyleneimine gel system
These gels are rigid and non-flowing at polyacrylamide concentration of 7 and 9 These
are thermally stable at 100degC and a permeability reduction of more than 94 was realized
indicating the possibility of using this system in profile modification jobs or water shutoff
2437 KUSP1-monoethylphthalate systemKUSP1-boric acid gel system
KUSP1 is a biopolymer that is extracted from a medium after the growth of the bacterium
cellumonasflavigena It is nontoxic and exhibit viscosities on the order of 2-3 cP at 25degC
KUSP1 is soluble in alkali but forms a gel with monoethylphthalate ester and permeability
reduction by treatment with the KUSP1-MEP system is stable to brine flow for periods of
up to six months Alkaline KUSP1 can also form gel with boric acid and the gelation time
of the KUSP1-boric acid system could be regulated up to several days by selection of pH
and boric acid concentrations (Vossoughi and Buller 1991)
2438 Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine gel
system
Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine system at acidic
conditions the gelation time was short and the gel did not last for a longer period of time
Chapter 2 Literature Review
28
High viscosity is obtained at high initial values This system can be used where formation
brine contains high concentration of divalent cations (ranges from 10000 to 15000 mgl)
Iron (III) can react with the polymer and accelerated the gelation process and produce a gel
that breaks over a short periods of time (Al-Muntasheri 2007) Hence it should not be used
after acid treatment jobs especially in sandstone reservoirs as the possibility of iron
concentration is high in the well bore area which can cause premature setting of gel This
system can be used at a temperature less than 140degC (Al-Muntasheri 2007 2006 2008)
2439 Polyacrylamide-phenol-formaldehyde gel systemspolyacrylamide-resorcinol
formaldehyde gel system
Phenol-Formaldehyde polymer gels system is an attractive tool fluid shutoff or profile
modification in high temperature formations By selecting between different polymer
compositions reasonable flexibility in the gelation time can be achieved over the
temperature range from 60degC to at least 140degC (Bryant et al 1997 Mahto et al 2009
2010) Choice of polymer composition permits the control of the gelation time and the
gelants display good injectivity even when the residence time approaches the gelation time
(Zhuang et al 2000 Banerjee et al 2006) Cross-linking occurs over a wide range of pH
and is insensitive to lithology (Seright and Martin 1993 Dovan et al 1997)
24310 Polyacrylamide-hydroquinone-hexamine gel system
Hexamethylenetetramine (HMTA) undergoes hydrolysis to produce methyldiol and
ammonia Methyldiol compound is very much unstable Hence it looses water molecules to
produce formaldehyde Thus formed formaldehyde is then reacting with hydroquinone
Hydroquinone undergoes electrophilic substitution reaction to produce 2356
tetramethylol hydroquinone (intermediate) Then intermediate react with partially
hydrolyzed polyacrylamide (PHPA) polymer Hence form a large viscous molecule Hence
OHmacr in methylol group of intermediate and H+ from amide group of polymer are leaving as
Chapter 2 Literature Review
29
a water molecule while producing N-C crosslinker (Dovan et al 1997 Gwaish et al 2008
Mahto and Sheikh 2009)
Table 22 Summary of thermally stable gels
Sl
No
Polymers Crosslinkers Comments
1 Polyacrylamide low mol wt
(Bryant et al 1996)
Cr(III) Acetate 5 or more polymer
needed
2 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Lockhart and Albonico 1994)
Cr(III) Molonate Slower gelation rate
than with Cr(III)
Acetate
3 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Bryant et al 1997 1997)
Phenol and
Formaldehyde
Ligands such as
citrate oxalate
lactate stabilized the
gel
4 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Gawish et al 2008)
Hydroquinone amp
Hexamethylenetetramine
2 sodium
carbonate needed
for softening and
stability
5 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Moradi 2000)
Terephthaladehyde
dihydroxynaphthalene
HMTA etc
Stable gel
6 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer (Moradi 2000)
Phenol formaldehyde Stable gel
7 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer
(Moradi 2000)
Phenyl acetate phenyl
salicylate etc with
HMTA
Stable gel lower
toxicity than phenol
amp formaldehyde gel
8 Acrylic esteracrylic acid Polyethyleneimine Stable gel required
Chapter 2 Literature Review
30
copolymer
(Moradi 2000)
larger concentration
amp cooling at below
93degC
9 Resorcinol
(Mahto et al 2009)
Formaldehyde Water like viscosity
of gelant is plus
toxicity is a problem
10 Scleroglucan
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Stable gel the
polymer is very
expensive
11 Lignosulfate
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Expensive gel due to
high chromium
required
12 Alcaligenes biopolymer PVA
(Moradi 2000)
Na+ phenol amp aldehyde Stable gel in pH
range of 7-8 higher
concentration of
polymer and
crosslinkers needed
13 PVA-polyvinylamide copolymer
(Hoskin and Shu 1989)
Dialdehydes or
polyaldehydes
Not widely used
14 Copolymer tert butyle acylate
(Al-Muntasheri et al 2006
2007)
Polyethyleneimine
15 Partially hydrolysed
polyacrylamide (Jia et al 2010
2011)
Polyethyleneimine
Chapter 2 Literature Review
31
25 SELECTION CRITERIA OF WELLS FOR GEL TREATMENT
Polymer gels can be applied to both injection and production wells (Al-Muntasheri et al
2010 Canbolat and Parlaktuna 2012) The objective of treating injection well is to
improve vertical injection profile resulting in more efficient distribution of injected water
(avery et al 1987) The production well treatment is to improve areal efficiency and to
reduce water oil ratio by reducing water channeling in the near wellbore region
(Giangiacomo 2001 Larson et al 1999 Ghafoori et al 2008) The following criterions
for candidate selection of injection and production wells are reported in the literature
(Maghsood and Bringham 1984 Sharma et al 2009)
251 Selection criteria for injection wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Low secondary oil recovery due to poor sweep efficiency that is high degree of
reservoir heterogeneity
(b) Pre-matured water breakthrough of producing wells
(c) Evidence of direct injector to producer channeling through fractures bugs or high
matrix permeability rock
(d) High injection rate associated with low well head pressure
252 Selection criteria for production wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Recovery calculations indicate that considerable mobile oil remains that could be
recovered most cost effectively if a blocking agent could be realistically placed in the
proper location
(b) High water oil ratio (WOR) values are observed
(c) The source of excess water production is identified (ie using profiles logs or
tracers)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
32
(d) The candidate well exhibits high productivity
26 DESIGNING GEL JOB FOR OIL FIELD APPLICATION
Gel volume is to be designed for both injection and production wells
261 Injection well
When cross flow occurs between thief zone and low permeability oil bearing zone a large
volume of gel is to be injected so that gel penetrates significant distance into the thief zone
(Romero et al 2003) In case where there is no cross flow ie thief zone is separated by an
impermeable barrierlayer from oil bearing zone a small volume of gel is placed near the
wellbore (Glenat et al 1996) Gel volume can be designed in two ways one is based on
filling a portion of channel volume from injector to producer and another is based on
distance from the injection well up to which the gel is to be placed (Parez et al 2001
Sarkissian et al 2005)
262 Production well
There are no definite design criteria available for bulk volume for producing well
treatment Gels with higher polymer concentrations are used in producing well (vs
injection well) treatment because the gel has to withstand high differential pressure in the
direction of producing wellbore (Glenat et al 1996 Giangiacomo 2001) Based on field
experience the following guidelines have been given
(a) Gel volume is equivalent to the volume of fluid that the well can produce in 24 hours
in a pumped-off condition
(b) Gel volume is based on 50 feet radius and thief zone thickness 0
(c) Gel volume is based on 50-200 barrels of gel per perforated foot
Chapter 2 Literature Review
33
26 CONCLUSIONS
The conclusion of the study provided strong evidence that stable gels can be produced
under harsh environmental conditions with organic and inorganic crosslinkers which may
be used for the profile modification jobs in the oil fields These crosslinkers typically
produced gels at temperature ranges from 40 degC to 140 degC and salinity up to 60000 ppm
They are generally less toxic then chromium acetate phenol and formaldehyde croslinkers
The majority of the crosslinkers are readily available at prices not much higher than the
toxic crosslinkers
Chapter 2 Literature Review
22
C C C C C C
C H C H C H
H H H H H H
ONH2 NH2 OO
Carboxylate Amide Amide
O-
Na+
Figure 24 Chemical structure of partially hydrolyzed polyacrylamides
2412 Xanthan gum
Xanthan gum is a polysaccharide with a a-D-glucose backbone like cellulose but every
second glucose unit is attached to a triaccharide consisting of mannose glucuronic acid
and mannose The mannose closest to the backbone has an acetic acid ester on carbon 6
and the mannose at the end of the triaccharide is linked through carbons 6 and 4 to the
second carbon of pyruvic acid Xanthan gum is produced by the bacterium Xanthomonas
campestris which is found on crucifereous vegetables such as cabbage and cauliflower
The negatively charged carboxyl group on the side chains because the molecules to form
very viscous fluids when mixed with water (Chatterji and Borchardt 1981 Taylor and
Nasr-El-Din 1998)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
23
Figure 25 Chemical structure of xanthan gum (Song et al 2006)
2413 Copolymers
The main copolymers used in profile modification jobs are copolymer of acrylamide ter
polymer with N-vinyle pyrrolidone and 2-acrylamide-2-methyl-1-propanesulfonic acid
(PAAm-VP-AMPS) amphoteric copolymer polyacrylonitrile and lignin sulphonate
Table 21 Properties of polyacrylamide and xanthan gum polymers
Sl
No
Property Polyacrylamide Xanthan Gum
1 Transition Metal
Cations
Easily crosslinked Easily crosslinked
2 Shear stability Undergoes irreversible
shear degradation
Reversible shear thining
Chapter 2 Literature Review
24
3 Thermal stability Maximum use upto 225-
250 (degF)
Maximum use 160-170 (degF)
4 Hydrolytic
stability
Hydrolysis promoted by
acid or base Partially
hydrolyzed product more
sensitive to Ca+2 Mg+2
Hydrolytic de-
polymerization promoted by
acid or base especially at
high temperature
5 Oxidative
stability
Susceptible Particularly susceptible
especially at high
temperature
6 Brine tolerance Very limited especially to
Ca+2 Mg+2
Good tolerance to mono and
divalent captions
7 Microbial
degradation
Susceptible to attack by
yeast fungi bacteria
Very susceptible in aerobic
conditions
242 Cross linkers used for profile modification jobs
Crosslinkers are the chemical compound which formed stable three dimensional structures
with high molecular weight polymers like polyacrylamide and xanthan gum
The cross-linkers used in cross-linking of the high molecular weight polymers are the
following
2421 Metallic crosslinkers
The most common metallic crosslinkers are Al+3 Cr+6 Cr+3 zirconium titanium boron etc
2422 Organic crosslinkers
Two classes of organic cross-linkers namely phenolic and aldehydes are used for profile
modification jobs The different cross-linkers in the phenolic group are phenol
hydroquinone resorcinol phenyl acetate salicylic alcohol furfuryl alcohol etc In the
Chapter 2 Literature Review
25
aldehyde group main crosslinkers are formaldehyde paraformaldehyde hexamethylene
tetra mine etc
243 Emerging developments of cross linked polymer gel systems
Polymer gel systems have emerged as one of the most effective conformance solution for
controlling of excessive water production worldwide The different cross-linked polymer
gel systems are the following (Moradi 2000 Mahto and Sharma 2010)
2431 Polyacrylamide-chromium (III) gel system
The short gelation time of Cr(III)-acetatepolymer composition at elevated temperature
limit their application to reservoirs that are at relatively at lower temperatures (Sydansk and
Southwell 2000) The existing gelation characteristics of these systems have limited
control over the gelation time of the polymer solutions at elevated temperature For the
delay in gelation time at elevated temperature chromium (IV) or formaldehyde are used but
their use in the field is complicated by significant health and environmental issues At
present many organic ligands are used for their delaying power with Cr(III)polymer and
Cr(OAc)3 polymer solutions and provides outstanding control over the gelation time over
60-135degC With the use of this gelation time spanning the range from several hours to one
month or more at temperature up to 120degC The most interesting features of the ligands like
glycolate malonate and salicylate are their gelation delaying power and cost which
provides gelation delays of 12 to 33 times longer than acetate The other ligands include
oxalate citrate maleate and EDTA which are characteristic by their extremely strong Cr
(III) binding capacity and are found to block gelation entirely (Lane 1998 Jain et al
2004)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
26
2432 Polyacrylamide-chromium (IV)-thiourea gel system
The chromium (VI)-Thiourea-polyacrylamide gels form as the result of two chemical
reactions First chromium (VI) is reduced to chromium (III) by thiourea Second the
produced chromium (III) reacts with carboxylate groups on the partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide to form a crosslinked gel The pH range for the reduction of chromium (VI)
to chromium (III) by thiourea is in the range of 40 to 50 Gel times on the order of days to
weeks can be achieved which is desirable to allow proper placement of the gel system in
the formation Another option is to use chromium (III) ligands like acetate lactate or
manolate
2433 Xanthan-Cr(III) gel system
The chromium (III)-xanthan gel systems have been widely recommended for matrix
treatment because they are shear thinning inject easily and have been claimed to reheal
after shearing (Chang et al 1985 1988 Kolnes et al 1991 Liang et al 1992 Nagra et
al 1996) The initial gelation rate of xanthan-chromium gel system is inversely
proportional to the hydrogen ion concentration and is strongly affected by pH in the porous
matrix (Storm et al 1991)
2434 Acrylamide-polymerchromium (III)-carboxylate gel system
The aqous acrylamide-polymercarboxylate gels are formed by crosslinking water soluble
acrylamide polymers with a Cr(III) carboxylate complex crosslinking agent (Sydansk
1990) The water soluble acrylamide polymer can be polyacrylamide partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide or tert-polymer containing acrylamide Acrylamide-polymerCr(III)
carboxylate gels can be used for near wellbore total shutoff treatments where matrix rock is
to be treated These are stable at elevated temperatures and they are stable and rigid at
225degF at elevated temperature These new matrix of gels are functional in the presence of
high salinity water at elevated temperatures (Sydansk 1988)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
27
2435 Polyacrylamide-aluminum citrate gel system
The aluminum citrate solution form gels with anionic polyacrylamide under certain
conditions Cationic polymers do not form gels with aluminum under similar conditions
The low pH aluminum system begins crosslinking with polymer solution immediately
even before it can be injected This prevents in depth penetration of the plugging solution
Because aluminum is known to be amphoteric in aqueous solution they can crosslink at
high pH environment
2436 Polyacrylamide-polyethyleneimine gel system
These gels are rigid and non-flowing at polyacrylamide concentration of 7 and 9 These
are thermally stable at 100degC and a permeability reduction of more than 94 was realized
indicating the possibility of using this system in profile modification jobs or water shutoff
2437 KUSP1-monoethylphthalate systemKUSP1-boric acid gel system
KUSP1 is a biopolymer that is extracted from a medium after the growth of the bacterium
cellumonasflavigena It is nontoxic and exhibit viscosities on the order of 2-3 cP at 25degC
KUSP1 is soluble in alkali but forms a gel with monoethylphthalate ester and permeability
reduction by treatment with the KUSP1-MEP system is stable to brine flow for periods of
up to six months Alkaline KUSP1 can also form gel with boric acid and the gelation time
of the KUSP1-boric acid system could be regulated up to several days by selection of pH
and boric acid concentrations (Vossoughi and Buller 1991)
2438 Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine gel
system
Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine system at acidic
conditions the gelation time was short and the gel did not last for a longer period of time
Chapter 2 Literature Review
28
High viscosity is obtained at high initial values This system can be used where formation
brine contains high concentration of divalent cations (ranges from 10000 to 15000 mgl)
Iron (III) can react with the polymer and accelerated the gelation process and produce a gel
that breaks over a short periods of time (Al-Muntasheri 2007) Hence it should not be used
after acid treatment jobs especially in sandstone reservoirs as the possibility of iron
concentration is high in the well bore area which can cause premature setting of gel This
system can be used at a temperature less than 140degC (Al-Muntasheri 2007 2006 2008)
2439 Polyacrylamide-phenol-formaldehyde gel systemspolyacrylamide-resorcinol
formaldehyde gel system
Phenol-Formaldehyde polymer gels system is an attractive tool fluid shutoff or profile
modification in high temperature formations By selecting between different polymer
compositions reasonable flexibility in the gelation time can be achieved over the
temperature range from 60degC to at least 140degC (Bryant et al 1997 Mahto et al 2009
2010) Choice of polymer composition permits the control of the gelation time and the
gelants display good injectivity even when the residence time approaches the gelation time
(Zhuang et al 2000 Banerjee et al 2006) Cross-linking occurs over a wide range of pH
and is insensitive to lithology (Seright and Martin 1993 Dovan et al 1997)
24310 Polyacrylamide-hydroquinone-hexamine gel system
Hexamethylenetetramine (HMTA) undergoes hydrolysis to produce methyldiol and
ammonia Methyldiol compound is very much unstable Hence it looses water molecules to
produce formaldehyde Thus formed formaldehyde is then reacting with hydroquinone
Hydroquinone undergoes electrophilic substitution reaction to produce 2356
tetramethylol hydroquinone (intermediate) Then intermediate react with partially
hydrolyzed polyacrylamide (PHPA) polymer Hence form a large viscous molecule Hence
OHmacr in methylol group of intermediate and H+ from amide group of polymer are leaving as
Chapter 2 Literature Review
29
a water molecule while producing N-C crosslinker (Dovan et al 1997 Gwaish et al 2008
Mahto and Sheikh 2009)
Table 22 Summary of thermally stable gels
Sl
No
Polymers Crosslinkers Comments
1 Polyacrylamide low mol wt
(Bryant et al 1996)
Cr(III) Acetate 5 or more polymer
needed
2 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Lockhart and Albonico 1994)
Cr(III) Molonate Slower gelation rate
than with Cr(III)
Acetate
3 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Bryant et al 1997 1997)
Phenol and
Formaldehyde
Ligands such as
citrate oxalate
lactate stabilized the
gel
4 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Gawish et al 2008)
Hydroquinone amp
Hexamethylenetetramine
2 sodium
carbonate needed
for softening and
stability
5 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Moradi 2000)
Terephthaladehyde
dihydroxynaphthalene
HMTA etc
Stable gel
6 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer (Moradi 2000)
Phenol formaldehyde Stable gel
7 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer
(Moradi 2000)
Phenyl acetate phenyl
salicylate etc with
HMTA
Stable gel lower
toxicity than phenol
amp formaldehyde gel
8 Acrylic esteracrylic acid Polyethyleneimine Stable gel required
Chapter 2 Literature Review
30
copolymer
(Moradi 2000)
larger concentration
amp cooling at below
93degC
9 Resorcinol
(Mahto et al 2009)
Formaldehyde Water like viscosity
of gelant is plus
toxicity is a problem
10 Scleroglucan
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Stable gel the
polymer is very
expensive
11 Lignosulfate
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Expensive gel due to
high chromium
required
12 Alcaligenes biopolymer PVA
(Moradi 2000)
Na+ phenol amp aldehyde Stable gel in pH
range of 7-8 higher
concentration of
polymer and
crosslinkers needed
13 PVA-polyvinylamide copolymer
(Hoskin and Shu 1989)
Dialdehydes or
polyaldehydes
Not widely used
14 Copolymer tert butyle acylate
(Al-Muntasheri et al 2006
2007)
Polyethyleneimine
15 Partially hydrolysed
polyacrylamide (Jia et al 2010
2011)
Polyethyleneimine
Chapter 2 Literature Review
31
25 SELECTION CRITERIA OF WELLS FOR GEL TREATMENT
Polymer gels can be applied to both injection and production wells (Al-Muntasheri et al
2010 Canbolat and Parlaktuna 2012) The objective of treating injection well is to
improve vertical injection profile resulting in more efficient distribution of injected water
(avery et al 1987) The production well treatment is to improve areal efficiency and to
reduce water oil ratio by reducing water channeling in the near wellbore region
(Giangiacomo 2001 Larson et al 1999 Ghafoori et al 2008) The following criterions
for candidate selection of injection and production wells are reported in the literature
(Maghsood and Bringham 1984 Sharma et al 2009)
251 Selection criteria for injection wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Low secondary oil recovery due to poor sweep efficiency that is high degree of
reservoir heterogeneity
(b) Pre-matured water breakthrough of producing wells
(c) Evidence of direct injector to producer channeling through fractures bugs or high
matrix permeability rock
(d) High injection rate associated with low well head pressure
252 Selection criteria for production wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Recovery calculations indicate that considerable mobile oil remains that could be
recovered most cost effectively if a blocking agent could be realistically placed in the
proper location
(b) High water oil ratio (WOR) values are observed
(c) The source of excess water production is identified (ie using profiles logs or
tracers)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
32
(d) The candidate well exhibits high productivity
26 DESIGNING GEL JOB FOR OIL FIELD APPLICATION
Gel volume is to be designed for both injection and production wells
261 Injection well
When cross flow occurs between thief zone and low permeability oil bearing zone a large
volume of gel is to be injected so that gel penetrates significant distance into the thief zone
(Romero et al 2003) In case where there is no cross flow ie thief zone is separated by an
impermeable barrierlayer from oil bearing zone a small volume of gel is placed near the
wellbore (Glenat et al 1996) Gel volume can be designed in two ways one is based on
filling a portion of channel volume from injector to producer and another is based on
distance from the injection well up to which the gel is to be placed (Parez et al 2001
Sarkissian et al 2005)
262 Production well
There are no definite design criteria available for bulk volume for producing well
treatment Gels with higher polymer concentrations are used in producing well (vs
injection well) treatment because the gel has to withstand high differential pressure in the
direction of producing wellbore (Glenat et al 1996 Giangiacomo 2001) Based on field
experience the following guidelines have been given
(a) Gel volume is equivalent to the volume of fluid that the well can produce in 24 hours
in a pumped-off condition
(b) Gel volume is based on 50 feet radius and thief zone thickness 0
(c) Gel volume is based on 50-200 barrels of gel per perforated foot
Chapter 2 Literature Review
33
26 CONCLUSIONS
The conclusion of the study provided strong evidence that stable gels can be produced
under harsh environmental conditions with organic and inorganic crosslinkers which may
be used for the profile modification jobs in the oil fields These crosslinkers typically
produced gels at temperature ranges from 40 degC to 140 degC and salinity up to 60000 ppm
They are generally less toxic then chromium acetate phenol and formaldehyde croslinkers
The majority of the crosslinkers are readily available at prices not much higher than the
toxic crosslinkers
Chapter 2 Literature Review
23
Figure 25 Chemical structure of xanthan gum (Song et al 2006)
2413 Copolymers
The main copolymers used in profile modification jobs are copolymer of acrylamide ter
polymer with N-vinyle pyrrolidone and 2-acrylamide-2-methyl-1-propanesulfonic acid
(PAAm-VP-AMPS) amphoteric copolymer polyacrylonitrile and lignin sulphonate
Table 21 Properties of polyacrylamide and xanthan gum polymers
Sl
No
Property Polyacrylamide Xanthan Gum
1 Transition Metal
Cations
Easily crosslinked Easily crosslinked
2 Shear stability Undergoes irreversible
shear degradation
Reversible shear thining
Chapter 2 Literature Review
24
3 Thermal stability Maximum use upto 225-
250 (degF)
Maximum use 160-170 (degF)
4 Hydrolytic
stability
Hydrolysis promoted by
acid or base Partially
hydrolyzed product more
sensitive to Ca+2 Mg+2
Hydrolytic de-
polymerization promoted by
acid or base especially at
high temperature
5 Oxidative
stability
Susceptible Particularly susceptible
especially at high
temperature
6 Brine tolerance Very limited especially to
Ca+2 Mg+2
Good tolerance to mono and
divalent captions
7 Microbial
degradation
Susceptible to attack by
yeast fungi bacteria
Very susceptible in aerobic
conditions
242 Cross linkers used for profile modification jobs
Crosslinkers are the chemical compound which formed stable three dimensional structures
with high molecular weight polymers like polyacrylamide and xanthan gum
The cross-linkers used in cross-linking of the high molecular weight polymers are the
following
2421 Metallic crosslinkers
The most common metallic crosslinkers are Al+3 Cr+6 Cr+3 zirconium titanium boron etc
2422 Organic crosslinkers
Two classes of organic cross-linkers namely phenolic and aldehydes are used for profile
modification jobs The different cross-linkers in the phenolic group are phenol
hydroquinone resorcinol phenyl acetate salicylic alcohol furfuryl alcohol etc In the
Chapter 2 Literature Review
25
aldehyde group main crosslinkers are formaldehyde paraformaldehyde hexamethylene
tetra mine etc
243 Emerging developments of cross linked polymer gel systems
Polymer gel systems have emerged as one of the most effective conformance solution for
controlling of excessive water production worldwide The different cross-linked polymer
gel systems are the following (Moradi 2000 Mahto and Sharma 2010)
2431 Polyacrylamide-chromium (III) gel system
The short gelation time of Cr(III)-acetatepolymer composition at elevated temperature
limit their application to reservoirs that are at relatively at lower temperatures (Sydansk and
Southwell 2000) The existing gelation characteristics of these systems have limited
control over the gelation time of the polymer solutions at elevated temperature For the
delay in gelation time at elevated temperature chromium (IV) or formaldehyde are used but
their use in the field is complicated by significant health and environmental issues At
present many organic ligands are used for their delaying power with Cr(III)polymer and
Cr(OAc)3 polymer solutions and provides outstanding control over the gelation time over
60-135degC With the use of this gelation time spanning the range from several hours to one
month or more at temperature up to 120degC The most interesting features of the ligands like
glycolate malonate and salicylate are their gelation delaying power and cost which
provides gelation delays of 12 to 33 times longer than acetate The other ligands include
oxalate citrate maleate and EDTA which are characteristic by their extremely strong Cr
(III) binding capacity and are found to block gelation entirely (Lane 1998 Jain et al
2004)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
26
2432 Polyacrylamide-chromium (IV)-thiourea gel system
The chromium (VI)-Thiourea-polyacrylamide gels form as the result of two chemical
reactions First chromium (VI) is reduced to chromium (III) by thiourea Second the
produced chromium (III) reacts with carboxylate groups on the partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide to form a crosslinked gel The pH range for the reduction of chromium (VI)
to chromium (III) by thiourea is in the range of 40 to 50 Gel times on the order of days to
weeks can be achieved which is desirable to allow proper placement of the gel system in
the formation Another option is to use chromium (III) ligands like acetate lactate or
manolate
2433 Xanthan-Cr(III) gel system
The chromium (III)-xanthan gel systems have been widely recommended for matrix
treatment because they are shear thinning inject easily and have been claimed to reheal
after shearing (Chang et al 1985 1988 Kolnes et al 1991 Liang et al 1992 Nagra et
al 1996) The initial gelation rate of xanthan-chromium gel system is inversely
proportional to the hydrogen ion concentration and is strongly affected by pH in the porous
matrix (Storm et al 1991)
2434 Acrylamide-polymerchromium (III)-carboxylate gel system
The aqous acrylamide-polymercarboxylate gels are formed by crosslinking water soluble
acrylamide polymers with a Cr(III) carboxylate complex crosslinking agent (Sydansk
1990) The water soluble acrylamide polymer can be polyacrylamide partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide or tert-polymer containing acrylamide Acrylamide-polymerCr(III)
carboxylate gels can be used for near wellbore total shutoff treatments where matrix rock is
to be treated These are stable at elevated temperatures and they are stable and rigid at
225degF at elevated temperature These new matrix of gels are functional in the presence of
high salinity water at elevated temperatures (Sydansk 1988)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
27
2435 Polyacrylamide-aluminum citrate gel system
The aluminum citrate solution form gels with anionic polyacrylamide under certain
conditions Cationic polymers do not form gels with aluminum under similar conditions
The low pH aluminum system begins crosslinking with polymer solution immediately
even before it can be injected This prevents in depth penetration of the plugging solution
Because aluminum is known to be amphoteric in aqueous solution they can crosslink at
high pH environment
2436 Polyacrylamide-polyethyleneimine gel system
These gels are rigid and non-flowing at polyacrylamide concentration of 7 and 9 These
are thermally stable at 100degC and a permeability reduction of more than 94 was realized
indicating the possibility of using this system in profile modification jobs or water shutoff
2437 KUSP1-monoethylphthalate systemKUSP1-boric acid gel system
KUSP1 is a biopolymer that is extracted from a medium after the growth of the bacterium
cellumonasflavigena It is nontoxic and exhibit viscosities on the order of 2-3 cP at 25degC
KUSP1 is soluble in alkali but forms a gel with monoethylphthalate ester and permeability
reduction by treatment with the KUSP1-MEP system is stable to brine flow for periods of
up to six months Alkaline KUSP1 can also form gel with boric acid and the gelation time
of the KUSP1-boric acid system could be regulated up to several days by selection of pH
and boric acid concentrations (Vossoughi and Buller 1991)
2438 Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine gel
system
Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine system at acidic
conditions the gelation time was short and the gel did not last for a longer period of time
Chapter 2 Literature Review
28
High viscosity is obtained at high initial values This system can be used where formation
brine contains high concentration of divalent cations (ranges from 10000 to 15000 mgl)
Iron (III) can react with the polymer and accelerated the gelation process and produce a gel
that breaks over a short periods of time (Al-Muntasheri 2007) Hence it should not be used
after acid treatment jobs especially in sandstone reservoirs as the possibility of iron
concentration is high in the well bore area which can cause premature setting of gel This
system can be used at a temperature less than 140degC (Al-Muntasheri 2007 2006 2008)
2439 Polyacrylamide-phenol-formaldehyde gel systemspolyacrylamide-resorcinol
formaldehyde gel system
Phenol-Formaldehyde polymer gels system is an attractive tool fluid shutoff or profile
modification in high temperature formations By selecting between different polymer
compositions reasonable flexibility in the gelation time can be achieved over the
temperature range from 60degC to at least 140degC (Bryant et al 1997 Mahto et al 2009
2010) Choice of polymer composition permits the control of the gelation time and the
gelants display good injectivity even when the residence time approaches the gelation time
(Zhuang et al 2000 Banerjee et al 2006) Cross-linking occurs over a wide range of pH
and is insensitive to lithology (Seright and Martin 1993 Dovan et al 1997)
24310 Polyacrylamide-hydroquinone-hexamine gel system
Hexamethylenetetramine (HMTA) undergoes hydrolysis to produce methyldiol and
ammonia Methyldiol compound is very much unstable Hence it looses water molecules to
produce formaldehyde Thus formed formaldehyde is then reacting with hydroquinone
Hydroquinone undergoes electrophilic substitution reaction to produce 2356
tetramethylol hydroquinone (intermediate) Then intermediate react with partially
hydrolyzed polyacrylamide (PHPA) polymer Hence form a large viscous molecule Hence
OHmacr in methylol group of intermediate and H+ from amide group of polymer are leaving as
Chapter 2 Literature Review
29
a water molecule while producing N-C crosslinker (Dovan et al 1997 Gwaish et al 2008
Mahto and Sheikh 2009)
Table 22 Summary of thermally stable gels
Sl
No
Polymers Crosslinkers Comments
1 Polyacrylamide low mol wt
(Bryant et al 1996)
Cr(III) Acetate 5 or more polymer
needed
2 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Lockhart and Albonico 1994)
Cr(III) Molonate Slower gelation rate
than with Cr(III)
Acetate
3 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Bryant et al 1997 1997)
Phenol and
Formaldehyde
Ligands such as
citrate oxalate
lactate stabilized the
gel
4 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Gawish et al 2008)
Hydroquinone amp
Hexamethylenetetramine
2 sodium
carbonate needed
for softening and
stability
5 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Moradi 2000)
Terephthaladehyde
dihydroxynaphthalene
HMTA etc
Stable gel
6 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer (Moradi 2000)
Phenol formaldehyde Stable gel
7 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer
(Moradi 2000)
Phenyl acetate phenyl
salicylate etc with
HMTA
Stable gel lower
toxicity than phenol
amp formaldehyde gel
8 Acrylic esteracrylic acid Polyethyleneimine Stable gel required
Chapter 2 Literature Review
30
copolymer
(Moradi 2000)
larger concentration
amp cooling at below
93degC
9 Resorcinol
(Mahto et al 2009)
Formaldehyde Water like viscosity
of gelant is plus
toxicity is a problem
10 Scleroglucan
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Stable gel the
polymer is very
expensive
11 Lignosulfate
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Expensive gel due to
high chromium
required
12 Alcaligenes biopolymer PVA
(Moradi 2000)
Na+ phenol amp aldehyde Stable gel in pH
range of 7-8 higher
concentration of
polymer and
crosslinkers needed
13 PVA-polyvinylamide copolymer
(Hoskin and Shu 1989)
Dialdehydes or
polyaldehydes
Not widely used
14 Copolymer tert butyle acylate
(Al-Muntasheri et al 2006
2007)
Polyethyleneimine
15 Partially hydrolysed
polyacrylamide (Jia et al 2010
2011)
Polyethyleneimine
Chapter 2 Literature Review
31
25 SELECTION CRITERIA OF WELLS FOR GEL TREATMENT
Polymer gels can be applied to both injection and production wells (Al-Muntasheri et al
2010 Canbolat and Parlaktuna 2012) The objective of treating injection well is to
improve vertical injection profile resulting in more efficient distribution of injected water
(avery et al 1987) The production well treatment is to improve areal efficiency and to
reduce water oil ratio by reducing water channeling in the near wellbore region
(Giangiacomo 2001 Larson et al 1999 Ghafoori et al 2008) The following criterions
for candidate selection of injection and production wells are reported in the literature
(Maghsood and Bringham 1984 Sharma et al 2009)
251 Selection criteria for injection wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Low secondary oil recovery due to poor sweep efficiency that is high degree of
reservoir heterogeneity
(b) Pre-matured water breakthrough of producing wells
(c) Evidence of direct injector to producer channeling through fractures bugs or high
matrix permeability rock
(d) High injection rate associated with low well head pressure
252 Selection criteria for production wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Recovery calculations indicate that considerable mobile oil remains that could be
recovered most cost effectively if a blocking agent could be realistically placed in the
proper location
(b) High water oil ratio (WOR) values are observed
(c) The source of excess water production is identified (ie using profiles logs or
tracers)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
32
(d) The candidate well exhibits high productivity
26 DESIGNING GEL JOB FOR OIL FIELD APPLICATION
Gel volume is to be designed for both injection and production wells
261 Injection well
When cross flow occurs between thief zone and low permeability oil bearing zone a large
volume of gel is to be injected so that gel penetrates significant distance into the thief zone
(Romero et al 2003) In case where there is no cross flow ie thief zone is separated by an
impermeable barrierlayer from oil bearing zone a small volume of gel is placed near the
wellbore (Glenat et al 1996) Gel volume can be designed in two ways one is based on
filling a portion of channel volume from injector to producer and another is based on
distance from the injection well up to which the gel is to be placed (Parez et al 2001
Sarkissian et al 2005)
262 Production well
There are no definite design criteria available for bulk volume for producing well
treatment Gels with higher polymer concentrations are used in producing well (vs
injection well) treatment because the gel has to withstand high differential pressure in the
direction of producing wellbore (Glenat et al 1996 Giangiacomo 2001) Based on field
experience the following guidelines have been given
(a) Gel volume is equivalent to the volume of fluid that the well can produce in 24 hours
in a pumped-off condition
(b) Gel volume is based on 50 feet radius and thief zone thickness 0
(c) Gel volume is based on 50-200 barrels of gel per perforated foot
Chapter 2 Literature Review
33
26 CONCLUSIONS
The conclusion of the study provided strong evidence that stable gels can be produced
under harsh environmental conditions with organic and inorganic crosslinkers which may
be used for the profile modification jobs in the oil fields These crosslinkers typically
produced gels at temperature ranges from 40 degC to 140 degC and salinity up to 60000 ppm
They are generally less toxic then chromium acetate phenol and formaldehyde croslinkers
The majority of the crosslinkers are readily available at prices not much higher than the
toxic crosslinkers
Chapter 2 Literature Review
24
3 Thermal stability Maximum use upto 225-
250 (degF)
Maximum use 160-170 (degF)
4 Hydrolytic
stability
Hydrolysis promoted by
acid or base Partially
hydrolyzed product more
sensitive to Ca+2 Mg+2
Hydrolytic de-
polymerization promoted by
acid or base especially at
high temperature
5 Oxidative
stability
Susceptible Particularly susceptible
especially at high
temperature
6 Brine tolerance Very limited especially to
Ca+2 Mg+2
Good tolerance to mono and
divalent captions
7 Microbial
degradation
Susceptible to attack by
yeast fungi bacteria
Very susceptible in aerobic
conditions
242 Cross linkers used for profile modification jobs
Crosslinkers are the chemical compound which formed stable three dimensional structures
with high molecular weight polymers like polyacrylamide and xanthan gum
The cross-linkers used in cross-linking of the high molecular weight polymers are the
following
2421 Metallic crosslinkers
The most common metallic crosslinkers are Al+3 Cr+6 Cr+3 zirconium titanium boron etc
2422 Organic crosslinkers
Two classes of organic cross-linkers namely phenolic and aldehydes are used for profile
modification jobs The different cross-linkers in the phenolic group are phenol
hydroquinone resorcinol phenyl acetate salicylic alcohol furfuryl alcohol etc In the
Chapter 2 Literature Review
25
aldehyde group main crosslinkers are formaldehyde paraformaldehyde hexamethylene
tetra mine etc
243 Emerging developments of cross linked polymer gel systems
Polymer gel systems have emerged as one of the most effective conformance solution for
controlling of excessive water production worldwide The different cross-linked polymer
gel systems are the following (Moradi 2000 Mahto and Sharma 2010)
2431 Polyacrylamide-chromium (III) gel system
The short gelation time of Cr(III)-acetatepolymer composition at elevated temperature
limit their application to reservoirs that are at relatively at lower temperatures (Sydansk and
Southwell 2000) The existing gelation characteristics of these systems have limited
control over the gelation time of the polymer solutions at elevated temperature For the
delay in gelation time at elevated temperature chromium (IV) or formaldehyde are used but
their use in the field is complicated by significant health and environmental issues At
present many organic ligands are used for their delaying power with Cr(III)polymer and
Cr(OAc)3 polymer solutions and provides outstanding control over the gelation time over
60-135degC With the use of this gelation time spanning the range from several hours to one
month or more at temperature up to 120degC The most interesting features of the ligands like
glycolate malonate and salicylate are their gelation delaying power and cost which
provides gelation delays of 12 to 33 times longer than acetate The other ligands include
oxalate citrate maleate and EDTA which are characteristic by their extremely strong Cr
(III) binding capacity and are found to block gelation entirely (Lane 1998 Jain et al
2004)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
26
2432 Polyacrylamide-chromium (IV)-thiourea gel system
The chromium (VI)-Thiourea-polyacrylamide gels form as the result of two chemical
reactions First chromium (VI) is reduced to chromium (III) by thiourea Second the
produced chromium (III) reacts with carboxylate groups on the partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide to form a crosslinked gel The pH range for the reduction of chromium (VI)
to chromium (III) by thiourea is in the range of 40 to 50 Gel times on the order of days to
weeks can be achieved which is desirable to allow proper placement of the gel system in
the formation Another option is to use chromium (III) ligands like acetate lactate or
manolate
2433 Xanthan-Cr(III) gel system
The chromium (III)-xanthan gel systems have been widely recommended for matrix
treatment because they are shear thinning inject easily and have been claimed to reheal
after shearing (Chang et al 1985 1988 Kolnes et al 1991 Liang et al 1992 Nagra et
al 1996) The initial gelation rate of xanthan-chromium gel system is inversely
proportional to the hydrogen ion concentration and is strongly affected by pH in the porous
matrix (Storm et al 1991)
2434 Acrylamide-polymerchromium (III)-carboxylate gel system
The aqous acrylamide-polymercarboxylate gels are formed by crosslinking water soluble
acrylamide polymers with a Cr(III) carboxylate complex crosslinking agent (Sydansk
1990) The water soluble acrylamide polymer can be polyacrylamide partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide or tert-polymer containing acrylamide Acrylamide-polymerCr(III)
carboxylate gels can be used for near wellbore total shutoff treatments where matrix rock is
to be treated These are stable at elevated temperatures and they are stable and rigid at
225degF at elevated temperature These new matrix of gels are functional in the presence of
high salinity water at elevated temperatures (Sydansk 1988)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
27
2435 Polyacrylamide-aluminum citrate gel system
The aluminum citrate solution form gels with anionic polyacrylamide under certain
conditions Cationic polymers do not form gels with aluminum under similar conditions
The low pH aluminum system begins crosslinking with polymer solution immediately
even before it can be injected This prevents in depth penetration of the plugging solution
Because aluminum is known to be amphoteric in aqueous solution they can crosslink at
high pH environment
2436 Polyacrylamide-polyethyleneimine gel system
These gels are rigid and non-flowing at polyacrylamide concentration of 7 and 9 These
are thermally stable at 100degC and a permeability reduction of more than 94 was realized
indicating the possibility of using this system in profile modification jobs or water shutoff
2437 KUSP1-monoethylphthalate systemKUSP1-boric acid gel system
KUSP1 is a biopolymer that is extracted from a medium after the growth of the bacterium
cellumonasflavigena It is nontoxic and exhibit viscosities on the order of 2-3 cP at 25degC
KUSP1 is soluble in alkali but forms a gel with monoethylphthalate ester and permeability
reduction by treatment with the KUSP1-MEP system is stable to brine flow for periods of
up to six months Alkaline KUSP1 can also form gel with boric acid and the gelation time
of the KUSP1-boric acid system could be regulated up to several days by selection of pH
and boric acid concentrations (Vossoughi and Buller 1991)
2438 Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine gel
system
Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine system at acidic
conditions the gelation time was short and the gel did not last for a longer period of time
Chapter 2 Literature Review
28
High viscosity is obtained at high initial values This system can be used where formation
brine contains high concentration of divalent cations (ranges from 10000 to 15000 mgl)
Iron (III) can react with the polymer and accelerated the gelation process and produce a gel
that breaks over a short periods of time (Al-Muntasheri 2007) Hence it should not be used
after acid treatment jobs especially in sandstone reservoirs as the possibility of iron
concentration is high in the well bore area which can cause premature setting of gel This
system can be used at a temperature less than 140degC (Al-Muntasheri 2007 2006 2008)
2439 Polyacrylamide-phenol-formaldehyde gel systemspolyacrylamide-resorcinol
formaldehyde gel system
Phenol-Formaldehyde polymer gels system is an attractive tool fluid shutoff or profile
modification in high temperature formations By selecting between different polymer
compositions reasonable flexibility in the gelation time can be achieved over the
temperature range from 60degC to at least 140degC (Bryant et al 1997 Mahto et al 2009
2010) Choice of polymer composition permits the control of the gelation time and the
gelants display good injectivity even when the residence time approaches the gelation time
(Zhuang et al 2000 Banerjee et al 2006) Cross-linking occurs over a wide range of pH
and is insensitive to lithology (Seright and Martin 1993 Dovan et al 1997)
24310 Polyacrylamide-hydroquinone-hexamine gel system
Hexamethylenetetramine (HMTA) undergoes hydrolysis to produce methyldiol and
ammonia Methyldiol compound is very much unstable Hence it looses water molecules to
produce formaldehyde Thus formed formaldehyde is then reacting with hydroquinone
Hydroquinone undergoes electrophilic substitution reaction to produce 2356
tetramethylol hydroquinone (intermediate) Then intermediate react with partially
hydrolyzed polyacrylamide (PHPA) polymer Hence form a large viscous molecule Hence
OHmacr in methylol group of intermediate and H+ from amide group of polymer are leaving as
Chapter 2 Literature Review
29
a water molecule while producing N-C crosslinker (Dovan et al 1997 Gwaish et al 2008
Mahto and Sheikh 2009)
Table 22 Summary of thermally stable gels
Sl
No
Polymers Crosslinkers Comments
1 Polyacrylamide low mol wt
(Bryant et al 1996)
Cr(III) Acetate 5 or more polymer
needed
2 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Lockhart and Albonico 1994)
Cr(III) Molonate Slower gelation rate
than with Cr(III)
Acetate
3 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Bryant et al 1997 1997)
Phenol and
Formaldehyde
Ligands such as
citrate oxalate
lactate stabilized the
gel
4 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Gawish et al 2008)
Hydroquinone amp
Hexamethylenetetramine
2 sodium
carbonate needed
for softening and
stability
5 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Moradi 2000)
Terephthaladehyde
dihydroxynaphthalene
HMTA etc
Stable gel
6 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer (Moradi 2000)
Phenol formaldehyde Stable gel
7 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer
(Moradi 2000)
Phenyl acetate phenyl
salicylate etc with
HMTA
Stable gel lower
toxicity than phenol
amp formaldehyde gel
8 Acrylic esteracrylic acid Polyethyleneimine Stable gel required
Chapter 2 Literature Review
30
copolymer
(Moradi 2000)
larger concentration
amp cooling at below
93degC
9 Resorcinol
(Mahto et al 2009)
Formaldehyde Water like viscosity
of gelant is plus
toxicity is a problem
10 Scleroglucan
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Stable gel the
polymer is very
expensive
11 Lignosulfate
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Expensive gel due to
high chromium
required
12 Alcaligenes biopolymer PVA
(Moradi 2000)
Na+ phenol amp aldehyde Stable gel in pH
range of 7-8 higher
concentration of
polymer and
crosslinkers needed
13 PVA-polyvinylamide copolymer
(Hoskin and Shu 1989)
Dialdehydes or
polyaldehydes
Not widely used
14 Copolymer tert butyle acylate
(Al-Muntasheri et al 2006
2007)
Polyethyleneimine
15 Partially hydrolysed
polyacrylamide (Jia et al 2010
2011)
Polyethyleneimine
Chapter 2 Literature Review
31
25 SELECTION CRITERIA OF WELLS FOR GEL TREATMENT
Polymer gels can be applied to both injection and production wells (Al-Muntasheri et al
2010 Canbolat and Parlaktuna 2012) The objective of treating injection well is to
improve vertical injection profile resulting in more efficient distribution of injected water
(avery et al 1987) The production well treatment is to improve areal efficiency and to
reduce water oil ratio by reducing water channeling in the near wellbore region
(Giangiacomo 2001 Larson et al 1999 Ghafoori et al 2008) The following criterions
for candidate selection of injection and production wells are reported in the literature
(Maghsood and Bringham 1984 Sharma et al 2009)
251 Selection criteria for injection wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Low secondary oil recovery due to poor sweep efficiency that is high degree of
reservoir heterogeneity
(b) Pre-matured water breakthrough of producing wells
(c) Evidence of direct injector to producer channeling through fractures bugs or high
matrix permeability rock
(d) High injection rate associated with low well head pressure
252 Selection criteria for production wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Recovery calculations indicate that considerable mobile oil remains that could be
recovered most cost effectively if a blocking agent could be realistically placed in the
proper location
(b) High water oil ratio (WOR) values are observed
(c) The source of excess water production is identified (ie using profiles logs or
tracers)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
32
(d) The candidate well exhibits high productivity
26 DESIGNING GEL JOB FOR OIL FIELD APPLICATION
Gel volume is to be designed for both injection and production wells
261 Injection well
When cross flow occurs between thief zone and low permeability oil bearing zone a large
volume of gel is to be injected so that gel penetrates significant distance into the thief zone
(Romero et al 2003) In case where there is no cross flow ie thief zone is separated by an
impermeable barrierlayer from oil bearing zone a small volume of gel is placed near the
wellbore (Glenat et al 1996) Gel volume can be designed in two ways one is based on
filling a portion of channel volume from injector to producer and another is based on
distance from the injection well up to which the gel is to be placed (Parez et al 2001
Sarkissian et al 2005)
262 Production well
There are no definite design criteria available for bulk volume for producing well
treatment Gels with higher polymer concentrations are used in producing well (vs
injection well) treatment because the gel has to withstand high differential pressure in the
direction of producing wellbore (Glenat et al 1996 Giangiacomo 2001) Based on field
experience the following guidelines have been given
(a) Gel volume is equivalent to the volume of fluid that the well can produce in 24 hours
in a pumped-off condition
(b) Gel volume is based on 50 feet radius and thief zone thickness 0
(c) Gel volume is based on 50-200 barrels of gel per perforated foot
Chapter 2 Literature Review
33
26 CONCLUSIONS
The conclusion of the study provided strong evidence that stable gels can be produced
under harsh environmental conditions with organic and inorganic crosslinkers which may
be used for the profile modification jobs in the oil fields These crosslinkers typically
produced gels at temperature ranges from 40 degC to 140 degC and salinity up to 60000 ppm
They are generally less toxic then chromium acetate phenol and formaldehyde croslinkers
The majority of the crosslinkers are readily available at prices not much higher than the
toxic crosslinkers
Chapter 2 Literature Review
25
aldehyde group main crosslinkers are formaldehyde paraformaldehyde hexamethylene
tetra mine etc
243 Emerging developments of cross linked polymer gel systems
Polymer gel systems have emerged as one of the most effective conformance solution for
controlling of excessive water production worldwide The different cross-linked polymer
gel systems are the following (Moradi 2000 Mahto and Sharma 2010)
2431 Polyacrylamide-chromium (III) gel system
The short gelation time of Cr(III)-acetatepolymer composition at elevated temperature
limit their application to reservoirs that are at relatively at lower temperatures (Sydansk and
Southwell 2000) The existing gelation characteristics of these systems have limited
control over the gelation time of the polymer solutions at elevated temperature For the
delay in gelation time at elevated temperature chromium (IV) or formaldehyde are used but
their use in the field is complicated by significant health and environmental issues At
present many organic ligands are used for their delaying power with Cr(III)polymer and
Cr(OAc)3 polymer solutions and provides outstanding control over the gelation time over
60-135degC With the use of this gelation time spanning the range from several hours to one
month or more at temperature up to 120degC The most interesting features of the ligands like
glycolate malonate and salicylate are their gelation delaying power and cost which
provides gelation delays of 12 to 33 times longer than acetate The other ligands include
oxalate citrate maleate and EDTA which are characteristic by their extremely strong Cr
(III) binding capacity and are found to block gelation entirely (Lane 1998 Jain et al
2004)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
26
2432 Polyacrylamide-chromium (IV)-thiourea gel system
The chromium (VI)-Thiourea-polyacrylamide gels form as the result of two chemical
reactions First chromium (VI) is reduced to chromium (III) by thiourea Second the
produced chromium (III) reacts with carboxylate groups on the partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide to form a crosslinked gel The pH range for the reduction of chromium (VI)
to chromium (III) by thiourea is in the range of 40 to 50 Gel times on the order of days to
weeks can be achieved which is desirable to allow proper placement of the gel system in
the formation Another option is to use chromium (III) ligands like acetate lactate or
manolate
2433 Xanthan-Cr(III) gel system
The chromium (III)-xanthan gel systems have been widely recommended for matrix
treatment because they are shear thinning inject easily and have been claimed to reheal
after shearing (Chang et al 1985 1988 Kolnes et al 1991 Liang et al 1992 Nagra et
al 1996) The initial gelation rate of xanthan-chromium gel system is inversely
proportional to the hydrogen ion concentration and is strongly affected by pH in the porous
matrix (Storm et al 1991)
2434 Acrylamide-polymerchromium (III)-carboxylate gel system
The aqous acrylamide-polymercarboxylate gels are formed by crosslinking water soluble
acrylamide polymers with a Cr(III) carboxylate complex crosslinking agent (Sydansk
1990) The water soluble acrylamide polymer can be polyacrylamide partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide or tert-polymer containing acrylamide Acrylamide-polymerCr(III)
carboxylate gels can be used for near wellbore total shutoff treatments where matrix rock is
to be treated These are stable at elevated temperatures and they are stable and rigid at
225degF at elevated temperature These new matrix of gels are functional in the presence of
high salinity water at elevated temperatures (Sydansk 1988)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
27
2435 Polyacrylamide-aluminum citrate gel system
The aluminum citrate solution form gels with anionic polyacrylamide under certain
conditions Cationic polymers do not form gels with aluminum under similar conditions
The low pH aluminum system begins crosslinking with polymer solution immediately
even before it can be injected This prevents in depth penetration of the plugging solution
Because aluminum is known to be amphoteric in aqueous solution they can crosslink at
high pH environment
2436 Polyacrylamide-polyethyleneimine gel system
These gels are rigid and non-flowing at polyacrylamide concentration of 7 and 9 These
are thermally stable at 100degC and a permeability reduction of more than 94 was realized
indicating the possibility of using this system in profile modification jobs or water shutoff
2437 KUSP1-monoethylphthalate systemKUSP1-boric acid gel system
KUSP1 is a biopolymer that is extracted from a medium after the growth of the bacterium
cellumonasflavigena It is nontoxic and exhibit viscosities on the order of 2-3 cP at 25degC
KUSP1 is soluble in alkali but forms a gel with monoethylphthalate ester and permeability
reduction by treatment with the KUSP1-MEP system is stable to brine flow for periods of
up to six months Alkaline KUSP1 can also form gel with boric acid and the gelation time
of the KUSP1-boric acid system could be regulated up to several days by selection of pH
and boric acid concentrations (Vossoughi and Buller 1991)
2438 Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine gel
system
Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine system at acidic
conditions the gelation time was short and the gel did not last for a longer period of time
Chapter 2 Literature Review
28
High viscosity is obtained at high initial values This system can be used where formation
brine contains high concentration of divalent cations (ranges from 10000 to 15000 mgl)
Iron (III) can react with the polymer and accelerated the gelation process and produce a gel
that breaks over a short periods of time (Al-Muntasheri 2007) Hence it should not be used
after acid treatment jobs especially in sandstone reservoirs as the possibility of iron
concentration is high in the well bore area which can cause premature setting of gel This
system can be used at a temperature less than 140degC (Al-Muntasheri 2007 2006 2008)
2439 Polyacrylamide-phenol-formaldehyde gel systemspolyacrylamide-resorcinol
formaldehyde gel system
Phenol-Formaldehyde polymer gels system is an attractive tool fluid shutoff or profile
modification in high temperature formations By selecting between different polymer
compositions reasonable flexibility in the gelation time can be achieved over the
temperature range from 60degC to at least 140degC (Bryant et al 1997 Mahto et al 2009
2010) Choice of polymer composition permits the control of the gelation time and the
gelants display good injectivity even when the residence time approaches the gelation time
(Zhuang et al 2000 Banerjee et al 2006) Cross-linking occurs over a wide range of pH
and is insensitive to lithology (Seright and Martin 1993 Dovan et al 1997)
24310 Polyacrylamide-hydroquinone-hexamine gel system
Hexamethylenetetramine (HMTA) undergoes hydrolysis to produce methyldiol and
ammonia Methyldiol compound is very much unstable Hence it looses water molecules to
produce formaldehyde Thus formed formaldehyde is then reacting with hydroquinone
Hydroquinone undergoes electrophilic substitution reaction to produce 2356
tetramethylol hydroquinone (intermediate) Then intermediate react with partially
hydrolyzed polyacrylamide (PHPA) polymer Hence form a large viscous molecule Hence
OHmacr in methylol group of intermediate and H+ from amide group of polymer are leaving as
Chapter 2 Literature Review
29
a water molecule while producing N-C crosslinker (Dovan et al 1997 Gwaish et al 2008
Mahto and Sheikh 2009)
Table 22 Summary of thermally stable gels
Sl
No
Polymers Crosslinkers Comments
1 Polyacrylamide low mol wt
(Bryant et al 1996)
Cr(III) Acetate 5 or more polymer
needed
2 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Lockhart and Albonico 1994)
Cr(III) Molonate Slower gelation rate
than with Cr(III)
Acetate
3 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Bryant et al 1997 1997)
Phenol and
Formaldehyde
Ligands such as
citrate oxalate
lactate stabilized the
gel
4 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Gawish et al 2008)
Hydroquinone amp
Hexamethylenetetramine
2 sodium
carbonate needed
for softening and
stability
5 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Moradi 2000)
Terephthaladehyde
dihydroxynaphthalene
HMTA etc
Stable gel
6 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer (Moradi 2000)
Phenol formaldehyde Stable gel
7 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer
(Moradi 2000)
Phenyl acetate phenyl
salicylate etc with
HMTA
Stable gel lower
toxicity than phenol
amp formaldehyde gel
8 Acrylic esteracrylic acid Polyethyleneimine Stable gel required
Chapter 2 Literature Review
30
copolymer
(Moradi 2000)
larger concentration
amp cooling at below
93degC
9 Resorcinol
(Mahto et al 2009)
Formaldehyde Water like viscosity
of gelant is plus
toxicity is a problem
10 Scleroglucan
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Stable gel the
polymer is very
expensive
11 Lignosulfate
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Expensive gel due to
high chromium
required
12 Alcaligenes biopolymer PVA
(Moradi 2000)
Na+ phenol amp aldehyde Stable gel in pH
range of 7-8 higher
concentration of
polymer and
crosslinkers needed
13 PVA-polyvinylamide copolymer
(Hoskin and Shu 1989)
Dialdehydes or
polyaldehydes
Not widely used
14 Copolymer tert butyle acylate
(Al-Muntasheri et al 2006
2007)
Polyethyleneimine
15 Partially hydrolysed
polyacrylamide (Jia et al 2010
2011)
Polyethyleneimine
Chapter 2 Literature Review
31
25 SELECTION CRITERIA OF WELLS FOR GEL TREATMENT
Polymer gels can be applied to both injection and production wells (Al-Muntasheri et al
2010 Canbolat and Parlaktuna 2012) The objective of treating injection well is to
improve vertical injection profile resulting in more efficient distribution of injected water
(avery et al 1987) The production well treatment is to improve areal efficiency and to
reduce water oil ratio by reducing water channeling in the near wellbore region
(Giangiacomo 2001 Larson et al 1999 Ghafoori et al 2008) The following criterions
for candidate selection of injection and production wells are reported in the literature
(Maghsood and Bringham 1984 Sharma et al 2009)
251 Selection criteria for injection wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Low secondary oil recovery due to poor sweep efficiency that is high degree of
reservoir heterogeneity
(b) Pre-matured water breakthrough of producing wells
(c) Evidence of direct injector to producer channeling through fractures bugs or high
matrix permeability rock
(d) High injection rate associated with low well head pressure
252 Selection criteria for production wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Recovery calculations indicate that considerable mobile oil remains that could be
recovered most cost effectively if a blocking agent could be realistically placed in the
proper location
(b) High water oil ratio (WOR) values are observed
(c) The source of excess water production is identified (ie using profiles logs or
tracers)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
32
(d) The candidate well exhibits high productivity
26 DESIGNING GEL JOB FOR OIL FIELD APPLICATION
Gel volume is to be designed for both injection and production wells
261 Injection well
When cross flow occurs between thief zone and low permeability oil bearing zone a large
volume of gel is to be injected so that gel penetrates significant distance into the thief zone
(Romero et al 2003) In case where there is no cross flow ie thief zone is separated by an
impermeable barrierlayer from oil bearing zone a small volume of gel is placed near the
wellbore (Glenat et al 1996) Gel volume can be designed in two ways one is based on
filling a portion of channel volume from injector to producer and another is based on
distance from the injection well up to which the gel is to be placed (Parez et al 2001
Sarkissian et al 2005)
262 Production well
There are no definite design criteria available for bulk volume for producing well
treatment Gels with higher polymer concentrations are used in producing well (vs
injection well) treatment because the gel has to withstand high differential pressure in the
direction of producing wellbore (Glenat et al 1996 Giangiacomo 2001) Based on field
experience the following guidelines have been given
(a) Gel volume is equivalent to the volume of fluid that the well can produce in 24 hours
in a pumped-off condition
(b) Gel volume is based on 50 feet radius and thief zone thickness 0
(c) Gel volume is based on 50-200 barrels of gel per perforated foot
Chapter 2 Literature Review
33
26 CONCLUSIONS
The conclusion of the study provided strong evidence that stable gels can be produced
under harsh environmental conditions with organic and inorganic crosslinkers which may
be used for the profile modification jobs in the oil fields These crosslinkers typically
produced gels at temperature ranges from 40 degC to 140 degC and salinity up to 60000 ppm
They are generally less toxic then chromium acetate phenol and formaldehyde croslinkers
The majority of the crosslinkers are readily available at prices not much higher than the
toxic crosslinkers
Chapter 2 Literature Review
26
2432 Polyacrylamide-chromium (IV)-thiourea gel system
The chromium (VI)-Thiourea-polyacrylamide gels form as the result of two chemical
reactions First chromium (VI) is reduced to chromium (III) by thiourea Second the
produced chromium (III) reacts with carboxylate groups on the partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide to form a crosslinked gel The pH range for the reduction of chromium (VI)
to chromium (III) by thiourea is in the range of 40 to 50 Gel times on the order of days to
weeks can be achieved which is desirable to allow proper placement of the gel system in
the formation Another option is to use chromium (III) ligands like acetate lactate or
manolate
2433 Xanthan-Cr(III) gel system
The chromium (III)-xanthan gel systems have been widely recommended for matrix
treatment because they are shear thinning inject easily and have been claimed to reheal
after shearing (Chang et al 1985 1988 Kolnes et al 1991 Liang et al 1992 Nagra et
al 1996) The initial gelation rate of xanthan-chromium gel system is inversely
proportional to the hydrogen ion concentration and is strongly affected by pH in the porous
matrix (Storm et al 1991)
2434 Acrylamide-polymerchromium (III)-carboxylate gel system
The aqous acrylamide-polymercarboxylate gels are formed by crosslinking water soluble
acrylamide polymers with a Cr(III) carboxylate complex crosslinking agent (Sydansk
1990) The water soluble acrylamide polymer can be polyacrylamide partially hydrolyzed
polyacrylamide or tert-polymer containing acrylamide Acrylamide-polymerCr(III)
carboxylate gels can be used for near wellbore total shutoff treatments where matrix rock is
to be treated These are stable at elevated temperatures and they are stable and rigid at
225degF at elevated temperature These new matrix of gels are functional in the presence of
high salinity water at elevated temperatures (Sydansk 1988)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
27
2435 Polyacrylamide-aluminum citrate gel system
The aluminum citrate solution form gels with anionic polyacrylamide under certain
conditions Cationic polymers do not form gels with aluminum under similar conditions
The low pH aluminum system begins crosslinking with polymer solution immediately
even before it can be injected This prevents in depth penetration of the plugging solution
Because aluminum is known to be amphoteric in aqueous solution they can crosslink at
high pH environment
2436 Polyacrylamide-polyethyleneimine gel system
These gels are rigid and non-flowing at polyacrylamide concentration of 7 and 9 These
are thermally stable at 100degC and a permeability reduction of more than 94 was realized
indicating the possibility of using this system in profile modification jobs or water shutoff
2437 KUSP1-monoethylphthalate systemKUSP1-boric acid gel system
KUSP1 is a biopolymer that is extracted from a medium after the growth of the bacterium
cellumonasflavigena It is nontoxic and exhibit viscosities on the order of 2-3 cP at 25degC
KUSP1 is soluble in alkali but forms a gel with monoethylphthalate ester and permeability
reduction by treatment with the KUSP1-MEP system is stable to brine flow for periods of
up to six months Alkaline KUSP1 can also form gel with boric acid and the gelation time
of the KUSP1-boric acid system could be regulated up to several days by selection of pH
and boric acid concentrations (Vossoughi and Buller 1991)
2438 Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine gel
system
Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine system at acidic
conditions the gelation time was short and the gel did not last for a longer period of time
Chapter 2 Literature Review
28
High viscosity is obtained at high initial values This system can be used where formation
brine contains high concentration of divalent cations (ranges from 10000 to 15000 mgl)
Iron (III) can react with the polymer and accelerated the gelation process and produce a gel
that breaks over a short periods of time (Al-Muntasheri 2007) Hence it should not be used
after acid treatment jobs especially in sandstone reservoirs as the possibility of iron
concentration is high in the well bore area which can cause premature setting of gel This
system can be used at a temperature less than 140degC (Al-Muntasheri 2007 2006 2008)
2439 Polyacrylamide-phenol-formaldehyde gel systemspolyacrylamide-resorcinol
formaldehyde gel system
Phenol-Formaldehyde polymer gels system is an attractive tool fluid shutoff or profile
modification in high temperature formations By selecting between different polymer
compositions reasonable flexibility in the gelation time can be achieved over the
temperature range from 60degC to at least 140degC (Bryant et al 1997 Mahto et al 2009
2010) Choice of polymer composition permits the control of the gelation time and the
gelants display good injectivity even when the residence time approaches the gelation time
(Zhuang et al 2000 Banerjee et al 2006) Cross-linking occurs over a wide range of pH
and is insensitive to lithology (Seright and Martin 1993 Dovan et al 1997)
24310 Polyacrylamide-hydroquinone-hexamine gel system
Hexamethylenetetramine (HMTA) undergoes hydrolysis to produce methyldiol and
ammonia Methyldiol compound is very much unstable Hence it looses water molecules to
produce formaldehyde Thus formed formaldehyde is then reacting with hydroquinone
Hydroquinone undergoes electrophilic substitution reaction to produce 2356
tetramethylol hydroquinone (intermediate) Then intermediate react with partially
hydrolyzed polyacrylamide (PHPA) polymer Hence form a large viscous molecule Hence
OHmacr in methylol group of intermediate and H+ from amide group of polymer are leaving as
Chapter 2 Literature Review
29
a water molecule while producing N-C crosslinker (Dovan et al 1997 Gwaish et al 2008
Mahto and Sheikh 2009)
Table 22 Summary of thermally stable gels
Sl
No
Polymers Crosslinkers Comments
1 Polyacrylamide low mol wt
(Bryant et al 1996)
Cr(III) Acetate 5 or more polymer
needed
2 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Lockhart and Albonico 1994)
Cr(III) Molonate Slower gelation rate
than with Cr(III)
Acetate
3 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Bryant et al 1997 1997)
Phenol and
Formaldehyde
Ligands such as
citrate oxalate
lactate stabilized the
gel
4 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Gawish et al 2008)
Hydroquinone amp
Hexamethylenetetramine
2 sodium
carbonate needed
for softening and
stability
5 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Moradi 2000)
Terephthaladehyde
dihydroxynaphthalene
HMTA etc
Stable gel
6 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer (Moradi 2000)
Phenol formaldehyde Stable gel
7 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer
(Moradi 2000)
Phenyl acetate phenyl
salicylate etc with
HMTA
Stable gel lower
toxicity than phenol
amp formaldehyde gel
8 Acrylic esteracrylic acid Polyethyleneimine Stable gel required
Chapter 2 Literature Review
30
copolymer
(Moradi 2000)
larger concentration
amp cooling at below
93degC
9 Resorcinol
(Mahto et al 2009)
Formaldehyde Water like viscosity
of gelant is plus
toxicity is a problem
10 Scleroglucan
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Stable gel the
polymer is very
expensive
11 Lignosulfate
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Expensive gel due to
high chromium
required
12 Alcaligenes biopolymer PVA
(Moradi 2000)
Na+ phenol amp aldehyde Stable gel in pH
range of 7-8 higher
concentration of
polymer and
crosslinkers needed
13 PVA-polyvinylamide copolymer
(Hoskin and Shu 1989)
Dialdehydes or
polyaldehydes
Not widely used
14 Copolymer tert butyle acylate
(Al-Muntasheri et al 2006
2007)
Polyethyleneimine
15 Partially hydrolysed
polyacrylamide (Jia et al 2010
2011)
Polyethyleneimine
Chapter 2 Literature Review
31
25 SELECTION CRITERIA OF WELLS FOR GEL TREATMENT
Polymer gels can be applied to both injection and production wells (Al-Muntasheri et al
2010 Canbolat and Parlaktuna 2012) The objective of treating injection well is to
improve vertical injection profile resulting in more efficient distribution of injected water
(avery et al 1987) The production well treatment is to improve areal efficiency and to
reduce water oil ratio by reducing water channeling in the near wellbore region
(Giangiacomo 2001 Larson et al 1999 Ghafoori et al 2008) The following criterions
for candidate selection of injection and production wells are reported in the literature
(Maghsood and Bringham 1984 Sharma et al 2009)
251 Selection criteria for injection wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Low secondary oil recovery due to poor sweep efficiency that is high degree of
reservoir heterogeneity
(b) Pre-matured water breakthrough of producing wells
(c) Evidence of direct injector to producer channeling through fractures bugs or high
matrix permeability rock
(d) High injection rate associated with low well head pressure
252 Selection criteria for production wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Recovery calculations indicate that considerable mobile oil remains that could be
recovered most cost effectively if a blocking agent could be realistically placed in the
proper location
(b) High water oil ratio (WOR) values are observed
(c) The source of excess water production is identified (ie using profiles logs or
tracers)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
32
(d) The candidate well exhibits high productivity
26 DESIGNING GEL JOB FOR OIL FIELD APPLICATION
Gel volume is to be designed for both injection and production wells
261 Injection well
When cross flow occurs between thief zone and low permeability oil bearing zone a large
volume of gel is to be injected so that gel penetrates significant distance into the thief zone
(Romero et al 2003) In case where there is no cross flow ie thief zone is separated by an
impermeable barrierlayer from oil bearing zone a small volume of gel is placed near the
wellbore (Glenat et al 1996) Gel volume can be designed in two ways one is based on
filling a portion of channel volume from injector to producer and another is based on
distance from the injection well up to which the gel is to be placed (Parez et al 2001
Sarkissian et al 2005)
262 Production well
There are no definite design criteria available for bulk volume for producing well
treatment Gels with higher polymer concentrations are used in producing well (vs
injection well) treatment because the gel has to withstand high differential pressure in the
direction of producing wellbore (Glenat et al 1996 Giangiacomo 2001) Based on field
experience the following guidelines have been given
(a) Gel volume is equivalent to the volume of fluid that the well can produce in 24 hours
in a pumped-off condition
(b) Gel volume is based on 50 feet radius and thief zone thickness 0
(c) Gel volume is based on 50-200 barrels of gel per perforated foot
Chapter 2 Literature Review
33
26 CONCLUSIONS
The conclusion of the study provided strong evidence that stable gels can be produced
under harsh environmental conditions with organic and inorganic crosslinkers which may
be used for the profile modification jobs in the oil fields These crosslinkers typically
produced gels at temperature ranges from 40 degC to 140 degC and salinity up to 60000 ppm
They are generally less toxic then chromium acetate phenol and formaldehyde croslinkers
The majority of the crosslinkers are readily available at prices not much higher than the
toxic crosslinkers
Chapter 2 Literature Review
27
2435 Polyacrylamide-aluminum citrate gel system
The aluminum citrate solution form gels with anionic polyacrylamide under certain
conditions Cationic polymers do not form gels with aluminum under similar conditions
The low pH aluminum system begins crosslinking with polymer solution immediately
even before it can be injected This prevents in depth penetration of the plugging solution
Because aluminum is known to be amphoteric in aqueous solution they can crosslink at
high pH environment
2436 Polyacrylamide-polyethyleneimine gel system
These gels are rigid and non-flowing at polyacrylamide concentration of 7 and 9 These
are thermally stable at 100degC and a permeability reduction of more than 94 was realized
indicating the possibility of using this system in profile modification jobs or water shutoff
2437 KUSP1-monoethylphthalate systemKUSP1-boric acid gel system
KUSP1 is a biopolymer that is extracted from a medium after the growth of the bacterium
cellumonasflavigena It is nontoxic and exhibit viscosities on the order of 2-3 cP at 25degC
KUSP1 is soluble in alkali but forms a gel with monoethylphthalate ester and permeability
reduction by treatment with the KUSP1-MEP system is stable to brine flow for periods of
up to six months Alkaline KUSP1 can also form gel with boric acid and the gelation time
of the KUSP1-boric acid system could be regulated up to several days by selection of pH
and boric acid concentrations (Vossoughi and Buller 1991)
2438 Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine gel
system
Polyacrylamide and tert-butyl acrylate copolymer-polyethylene-imine system at acidic
conditions the gelation time was short and the gel did not last for a longer period of time
Chapter 2 Literature Review
28
High viscosity is obtained at high initial values This system can be used where formation
brine contains high concentration of divalent cations (ranges from 10000 to 15000 mgl)
Iron (III) can react with the polymer and accelerated the gelation process and produce a gel
that breaks over a short periods of time (Al-Muntasheri 2007) Hence it should not be used
after acid treatment jobs especially in sandstone reservoirs as the possibility of iron
concentration is high in the well bore area which can cause premature setting of gel This
system can be used at a temperature less than 140degC (Al-Muntasheri 2007 2006 2008)
2439 Polyacrylamide-phenol-formaldehyde gel systemspolyacrylamide-resorcinol
formaldehyde gel system
Phenol-Formaldehyde polymer gels system is an attractive tool fluid shutoff or profile
modification in high temperature formations By selecting between different polymer
compositions reasonable flexibility in the gelation time can be achieved over the
temperature range from 60degC to at least 140degC (Bryant et al 1997 Mahto et al 2009
2010) Choice of polymer composition permits the control of the gelation time and the
gelants display good injectivity even when the residence time approaches the gelation time
(Zhuang et al 2000 Banerjee et al 2006) Cross-linking occurs over a wide range of pH
and is insensitive to lithology (Seright and Martin 1993 Dovan et al 1997)
24310 Polyacrylamide-hydroquinone-hexamine gel system
Hexamethylenetetramine (HMTA) undergoes hydrolysis to produce methyldiol and
ammonia Methyldiol compound is very much unstable Hence it looses water molecules to
produce formaldehyde Thus formed formaldehyde is then reacting with hydroquinone
Hydroquinone undergoes electrophilic substitution reaction to produce 2356
tetramethylol hydroquinone (intermediate) Then intermediate react with partially
hydrolyzed polyacrylamide (PHPA) polymer Hence form a large viscous molecule Hence
OHmacr in methylol group of intermediate and H+ from amide group of polymer are leaving as
Chapter 2 Literature Review
29
a water molecule while producing N-C crosslinker (Dovan et al 1997 Gwaish et al 2008
Mahto and Sheikh 2009)
Table 22 Summary of thermally stable gels
Sl
No
Polymers Crosslinkers Comments
1 Polyacrylamide low mol wt
(Bryant et al 1996)
Cr(III) Acetate 5 or more polymer
needed
2 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Lockhart and Albonico 1994)
Cr(III) Molonate Slower gelation rate
than with Cr(III)
Acetate
3 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Bryant et al 1997 1997)
Phenol and
Formaldehyde
Ligands such as
citrate oxalate
lactate stabilized the
gel
4 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Gawish et al 2008)
Hydroquinone amp
Hexamethylenetetramine
2 sodium
carbonate needed
for softening and
stability
5 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Moradi 2000)
Terephthaladehyde
dihydroxynaphthalene
HMTA etc
Stable gel
6 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer (Moradi 2000)
Phenol formaldehyde Stable gel
7 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer
(Moradi 2000)
Phenyl acetate phenyl
salicylate etc with
HMTA
Stable gel lower
toxicity than phenol
amp formaldehyde gel
8 Acrylic esteracrylic acid Polyethyleneimine Stable gel required
Chapter 2 Literature Review
30
copolymer
(Moradi 2000)
larger concentration
amp cooling at below
93degC
9 Resorcinol
(Mahto et al 2009)
Formaldehyde Water like viscosity
of gelant is plus
toxicity is a problem
10 Scleroglucan
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Stable gel the
polymer is very
expensive
11 Lignosulfate
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Expensive gel due to
high chromium
required
12 Alcaligenes biopolymer PVA
(Moradi 2000)
Na+ phenol amp aldehyde Stable gel in pH
range of 7-8 higher
concentration of
polymer and
crosslinkers needed
13 PVA-polyvinylamide copolymer
(Hoskin and Shu 1989)
Dialdehydes or
polyaldehydes
Not widely used
14 Copolymer tert butyle acylate
(Al-Muntasheri et al 2006
2007)
Polyethyleneimine
15 Partially hydrolysed
polyacrylamide (Jia et al 2010
2011)
Polyethyleneimine
Chapter 2 Literature Review
31
25 SELECTION CRITERIA OF WELLS FOR GEL TREATMENT
Polymer gels can be applied to both injection and production wells (Al-Muntasheri et al
2010 Canbolat and Parlaktuna 2012) The objective of treating injection well is to
improve vertical injection profile resulting in more efficient distribution of injected water
(avery et al 1987) The production well treatment is to improve areal efficiency and to
reduce water oil ratio by reducing water channeling in the near wellbore region
(Giangiacomo 2001 Larson et al 1999 Ghafoori et al 2008) The following criterions
for candidate selection of injection and production wells are reported in the literature
(Maghsood and Bringham 1984 Sharma et al 2009)
251 Selection criteria for injection wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Low secondary oil recovery due to poor sweep efficiency that is high degree of
reservoir heterogeneity
(b) Pre-matured water breakthrough of producing wells
(c) Evidence of direct injector to producer channeling through fractures bugs or high
matrix permeability rock
(d) High injection rate associated with low well head pressure
252 Selection criteria for production wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Recovery calculations indicate that considerable mobile oil remains that could be
recovered most cost effectively if a blocking agent could be realistically placed in the
proper location
(b) High water oil ratio (WOR) values are observed
(c) The source of excess water production is identified (ie using profiles logs or
tracers)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
32
(d) The candidate well exhibits high productivity
26 DESIGNING GEL JOB FOR OIL FIELD APPLICATION
Gel volume is to be designed for both injection and production wells
261 Injection well
When cross flow occurs between thief zone and low permeability oil bearing zone a large
volume of gel is to be injected so that gel penetrates significant distance into the thief zone
(Romero et al 2003) In case where there is no cross flow ie thief zone is separated by an
impermeable barrierlayer from oil bearing zone a small volume of gel is placed near the
wellbore (Glenat et al 1996) Gel volume can be designed in two ways one is based on
filling a portion of channel volume from injector to producer and another is based on
distance from the injection well up to which the gel is to be placed (Parez et al 2001
Sarkissian et al 2005)
262 Production well
There are no definite design criteria available for bulk volume for producing well
treatment Gels with higher polymer concentrations are used in producing well (vs
injection well) treatment because the gel has to withstand high differential pressure in the
direction of producing wellbore (Glenat et al 1996 Giangiacomo 2001) Based on field
experience the following guidelines have been given
(a) Gel volume is equivalent to the volume of fluid that the well can produce in 24 hours
in a pumped-off condition
(b) Gel volume is based on 50 feet radius and thief zone thickness 0
(c) Gel volume is based on 50-200 barrels of gel per perforated foot
Chapter 2 Literature Review
33
26 CONCLUSIONS
The conclusion of the study provided strong evidence that stable gels can be produced
under harsh environmental conditions with organic and inorganic crosslinkers which may
be used for the profile modification jobs in the oil fields These crosslinkers typically
produced gels at temperature ranges from 40 degC to 140 degC and salinity up to 60000 ppm
They are generally less toxic then chromium acetate phenol and formaldehyde croslinkers
The majority of the crosslinkers are readily available at prices not much higher than the
toxic crosslinkers
Chapter 2 Literature Review
28
High viscosity is obtained at high initial values This system can be used where formation
brine contains high concentration of divalent cations (ranges from 10000 to 15000 mgl)
Iron (III) can react with the polymer and accelerated the gelation process and produce a gel
that breaks over a short periods of time (Al-Muntasheri 2007) Hence it should not be used
after acid treatment jobs especially in sandstone reservoirs as the possibility of iron
concentration is high in the well bore area which can cause premature setting of gel This
system can be used at a temperature less than 140degC (Al-Muntasheri 2007 2006 2008)
2439 Polyacrylamide-phenol-formaldehyde gel systemspolyacrylamide-resorcinol
formaldehyde gel system
Phenol-Formaldehyde polymer gels system is an attractive tool fluid shutoff or profile
modification in high temperature formations By selecting between different polymer
compositions reasonable flexibility in the gelation time can be achieved over the
temperature range from 60degC to at least 140degC (Bryant et al 1997 Mahto et al 2009
2010) Choice of polymer composition permits the control of the gelation time and the
gelants display good injectivity even when the residence time approaches the gelation time
(Zhuang et al 2000 Banerjee et al 2006) Cross-linking occurs over a wide range of pH
and is insensitive to lithology (Seright and Martin 1993 Dovan et al 1997)
24310 Polyacrylamide-hydroquinone-hexamine gel system
Hexamethylenetetramine (HMTA) undergoes hydrolysis to produce methyldiol and
ammonia Methyldiol compound is very much unstable Hence it looses water molecules to
produce formaldehyde Thus formed formaldehyde is then reacting with hydroquinone
Hydroquinone undergoes electrophilic substitution reaction to produce 2356
tetramethylol hydroquinone (intermediate) Then intermediate react with partially
hydrolyzed polyacrylamide (PHPA) polymer Hence form a large viscous molecule Hence
OHmacr in methylol group of intermediate and H+ from amide group of polymer are leaving as
Chapter 2 Literature Review
29
a water molecule while producing N-C crosslinker (Dovan et al 1997 Gwaish et al 2008
Mahto and Sheikh 2009)
Table 22 Summary of thermally stable gels
Sl
No
Polymers Crosslinkers Comments
1 Polyacrylamide low mol wt
(Bryant et al 1996)
Cr(III) Acetate 5 or more polymer
needed
2 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Lockhart and Albonico 1994)
Cr(III) Molonate Slower gelation rate
than with Cr(III)
Acetate
3 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Bryant et al 1997 1997)
Phenol and
Formaldehyde
Ligands such as
citrate oxalate
lactate stabilized the
gel
4 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Gawish et al 2008)
Hydroquinone amp
Hexamethylenetetramine
2 sodium
carbonate needed
for softening and
stability
5 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Moradi 2000)
Terephthaladehyde
dihydroxynaphthalene
HMTA etc
Stable gel
6 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer (Moradi 2000)
Phenol formaldehyde Stable gel
7 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer
(Moradi 2000)
Phenyl acetate phenyl
salicylate etc with
HMTA
Stable gel lower
toxicity than phenol
amp formaldehyde gel
8 Acrylic esteracrylic acid Polyethyleneimine Stable gel required
Chapter 2 Literature Review
30
copolymer
(Moradi 2000)
larger concentration
amp cooling at below
93degC
9 Resorcinol
(Mahto et al 2009)
Formaldehyde Water like viscosity
of gelant is plus
toxicity is a problem
10 Scleroglucan
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Stable gel the
polymer is very
expensive
11 Lignosulfate
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Expensive gel due to
high chromium
required
12 Alcaligenes biopolymer PVA
(Moradi 2000)
Na+ phenol amp aldehyde Stable gel in pH
range of 7-8 higher
concentration of
polymer and
crosslinkers needed
13 PVA-polyvinylamide copolymer
(Hoskin and Shu 1989)
Dialdehydes or
polyaldehydes
Not widely used
14 Copolymer tert butyle acylate
(Al-Muntasheri et al 2006
2007)
Polyethyleneimine
15 Partially hydrolysed
polyacrylamide (Jia et al 2010
2011)
Polyethyleneimine
Chapter 2 Literature Review
31
25 SELECTION CRITERIA OF WELLS FOR GEL TREATMENT
Polymer gels can be applied to both injection and production wells (Al-Muntasheri et al
2010 Canbolat and Parlaktuna 2012) The objective of treating injection well is to
improve vertical injection profile resulting in more efficient distribution of injected water
(avery et al 1987) The production well treatment is to improve areal efficiency and to
reduce water oil ratio by reducing water channeling in the near wellbore region
(Giangiacomo 2001 Larson et al 1999 Ghafoori et al 2008) The following criterions
for candidate selection of injection and production wells are reported in the literature
(Maghsood and Bringham 1984 Sharma et al 2009)
251 Selection criteria for injection wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Low secondary oil recovery due to poor sweep efficiency that is high degree of
reservoir heterogeneity
(b) Pre-matured water breakthrough of producing wells
(c) Evidence of direct injector to producer channeling through fractures bugs or high
matrix permeability rock
(d) High injection rate associated with low well head pressure
252 Selection criteria for production wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Recovery calculations indicate that considerable mobile oil remains that could be
recovered most cost effectively if a blocking agent could be realistically placed in the
proper location
(b) High water oil ratio (WOR) values are observed
(c) The source of excess water production is identified (ie using profiles logs or
tracers)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
32
(d) The candidate well exhibits high productivity
26 DESIGNING GEL JOB FOR OIL FIELD APPLICATION
Gel volume is to be designed for both injection and production wells
261 Injection well
When cross flow occurs between thief zone and low permeability oil bearing zone a large
volume of gel is to be injected so that gel penetrates significant distance into the thief zone
(Romero et al 2003) In case where there is no cross flow ie thief zone is separated by an
impermeable barrierlayer from oil bearing zone a small volume of gel is placed near the
wellbore (Glenat et al 1996) Gel volume can be designed in two ways one is based on
filling a portion of channel volume from injector to producer and another is based on
distance from the injection well up to which the gel is to be placed (Parez et al 2001
Sarkissian et al 2005)
262 Production well
There are no definite design criteria available for bulk volume for producing well
treatment Gels with higher polymer concentrations are used in producing well (vs
injection well) treatment because the gel has to withstand high differential pressure in the
direction of producing wellbore (Glenat et al 1996 Giangiacomo 2001) Based on field
experience the following guidelines have been given
(a) Gel volume is equivalent to the volume of fluid that the well can produce in 24 hours
in a pumped-off condition
(b) Gel volume is based on 50 feet radius and thief zone thickness 0
(c) Gel volume is based on 50-200 barrels of gel per perforated foot
Chapter 2 Literature Review
33
26 CONCLUSIONS
The conclusion of the study provided strong evidence that stable gels can be produced
under harsh environmental conditions with organic and inorganic crosslinkers which may
be used for the profile modification jobs in the oil fields These crosslinkers typically
produced gels at temperature ranges from 40 degC to 140 degC and salinity up to 60000 ppm
They are generally less toxic then chromium acetate phenol and formaldehyde croslinkers
The majority of the crosslinkers are readily available at prices not much higher than the
toxic crosslinkers
Chapter 2 Literature Review
29
a water molecule while producing N-C crosslinker (Dovan et al 1997 Gwaish et al 2008
Mahto and Sheikh 2009)
Table 22 Summary of thermally stable gels
Sl
No
Polymers Crosslinkers Comments
1 Polyacrylamide low mol wt
(Bryant et al 1996)
Cr(III) Acetate 5 or more polymer
needed
2 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Lockhart and Albonico 1994)
Cr(III) Molonate Slower gelation rate
than with Cr(III)
Acetate
3 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Bryant et al 1997 1997)
Phenol and
Formaldehyde
Ligands such as
citrate oxalate
lactate stabilized the
gel
4 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Gawish et al 2008)
Hydroquinone amp
Hexamethylenetetramine
2 sodium
carbonate needed
for softening and
stability
5 Polyacrylamide high mol wt
(Moradi 2000)
Terephthaladehyde
dihydroxynaphthalene
HMTA etc
Stable gel
6 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer (Moradi 2000)
Phenol formaldehyde Stable gel
7 Acrylamide based thermally
stable polymer
(Moradi 2000)
Phenyl acetate phenyl
salicylate etc with
HMTA
Stable gel lower
toxicity than phenol
amp formaldehyde gel
8 Acrylic esteracrylic acid Polyethyleneimine Stable gel required
Chapter 2 Literature Review
30
copolymer
(Moradi 2000)
larger concentration
amp cooling at below
93degC
9 Resorcinol
(Mahto et al 2009)
Formaldehyde Water like viscosity
of gelant is plus
toxicity is a problem
10 Scleroglucan
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Stable gel the
polymer is very
expensive
11 Lignosulfate
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Expensive gel due to
high chromium
required
12 Alcaligenes biopolymer PVA
(Moradi 2000)
Na+ phenol amp aldehyde Stable gel in pH
range of 7-8 higher
concentration of
polymer and
crosslinkers needed
13 PVA-polyvinylamide copolymer
(Hoskin and Shu 1989)
Dialdehydes or
polyaldehydes
Not widely used
14 Copolymer tert butyle acylate
(Al-Muntasheri et al 2006
2007)
Polyethyleneimine
15 Partially hydrolysed
polyacrylamide (Jia et al 2010
2011)
Polyethyleneimine
Chapter 2 Literature Review
31
25 SELECTION CRITERIA OF WELLS FOR GEL TREATMENT
Polymer gels can be applied to both injection and production wells (Al-Muntasheri et al
2010 Canbolat and Parlaktuna 2012) The objective of treating injection well is to
improve vertical injection profile resulting in more efficient distribution of injected water
(avery et al 1987) The production well treatment is to improve areal efficiency and to
reduce water oil ratio by reducing water channeling in the near wellbore region
(Giangiacomo 2001 Larson et al 1999 Ghafoori et al 2008) The following criterions
for candidate selection of injection and production wells are reported in the literature
(Maghsood and Bringham 1984 Sharma et al 2009)
251 Selection criteria for injection wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Low secondary oil recovery due to poor sweep efficiency that is high degree of
reservoir heterogeneity
(b) Pre-matured water breakthrough of producing wells
(c) Evidence of direct injector to producer channeling through fractures bugs or high
matrix permeability rock
(d) High injection rate associated with low well head pressure
252 Selection criteria for production wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Recovery calculations indicate that considerable mobile oil remains that could be
recovered most cost effectively if a blocking agent could be realistically placed in the
proper location
(b) High water oil ratio (WOR) values are observed
(c) The source of excess water production is identified (ie using profiles logs or
tracers)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
32
(d) The candidate well exhibits high productivity
26 DESIGNING GEL JOB FOR OIL FIELD APPLICATION
Gel volume is to be designed for both injection and production wells
261 Injection well
When cross flow occurs between thief zone and low permeability oil bearing zone a large
volume of gel is to be injected so that gel penetrates significant distance into the thief zone
(Romero et al 2003) In case where there is no cross flow ie thief zone is separated by an
impermeable barrierlayer from oil bearing zone a small volume of gel is placed near the
wellbore (Glenat et al 1996) Gel volume can be designed in two ways one is based on
filling a portion of channel volume from injector to producer and another is based on
distance from the injection well up to which the gel is to be placed (Parez et al 2001
Sarkissian et al 2005)
262 Production well
There are no definite design criteria available for bulk volume for producing well
treatment Gels with higher polymer concentrations are used in producing well (vs
injection well) treatment because the gel has to withstand high differential pressure in the
direction of producing wellbore (Glenat et al 1996 Giangiacomo 2001) Based on field
experience the following guidelines have been given
(a) Gel volume is equivalent to the volume of fluid that the well can produce in 24 hours
in a pumped-off condition
(b) Gel volume is based on 50 feet radius and thief zone thickness 0
(c) Gel volume is based on 50-200 barrels of gel per perforated foot
Chapter 2 Literature Review
33
26 CONCLUSIONS
The conclusion of the study provided strong evidence that stable gels can be produced
under harsh environmental conditions with organic and inorganic crosslinkers which may
be used for the profile modification jobs in the oil fields These crosslinkers typically
produced gels at temperature ranges from 40 degC to 140 degC and salinity up to 60000 ppm
They are generally less toxic then chromium acetate phenol and formaldehyde croslinkers
The majority of the crosslinkers are readily available at prices not much higher than the
toxic crosslinkers
Chapter 2 Literature Review
30
copolymer
(Moradi 2000)
larger concentration
amp cooling at below
93degC
9 Resorcinol
(Mahto et al 2009)
Formaldehyde Water like viscosity
of gelant is plus
toxicity is a problem
10 Scleroglucan
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Stable gel the
polymer is very
expensive
11 Lignosulfate
(Moradi 2000)
Cr(III) Expensive gel due to
high chromium
required
12 Alcaligenes biopolymer PVA
(Moradi 2000)
Na+ phenol amp aldehyde Stable gel in pH
range of 7-8 higher
concentration of
polymer and
crosslinkers needed
13 PVA-polyvinylamide copolymer
(Hoskin and Shu 1989)
Dialdehydes or
polyaldehydes
Not widely used
14 Copolymer tert butyle acylate
(Al-Muntasheri et al 2006
2007)
Polyethyleneimine
15 Partially hydrolysed
polyacrylamide (Jia et al 2010
2011)
Polyethyleneimine
Chapter 2 Literature Review
31
25 SELECTION CRITERIA OF WELLS FOR GEL TREATMENT
Polymer gels can be applied to both injection and production wells (Al-Muntasheri et al
2010 Canbolat and Parlaktuna 2012) The objective of treating injection well is to
improve vertical injection profile resulting in more efficient distribution of injected water
(avery et al 1987) The production well treatment is to improve areal efficiency and to
reduce water oil ratio by reducing water channeling in the near wellbore region
(Giangiacomo 2001 Larson et al 1999 Ghafoori et al 2008) The following criterions
for candidate selection of injection and production wells are reported in the literature
(Maghsood and Bringham 1984 Sharma et al 2009)
251 Selection criteria for injection wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Low secondary oil recovery due to poor sweep efficiency that is high degree of
reservoir heterogeneity
(b) Pre-matured water breakthrough of producing wells
(c) Evidence of direct injector to producer channeling through fractures bugs or high
matrix permeability rock
(d) High injection rate associated with low well head pressure
252 Selection criteria for production wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Recovery calculations indicate that considerable mobile oil remains that could be
recovered most cost effectively if a blocking agent could be realistically placed in the
proper location
(b) High water oil ratio (WOR) values are observed
(c) The source of excess water production is identified (ie using profiles logs or
tracers)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
32
(d) The candidate well exhibits high productivity
26 DESIGNING GEL JOB FOR OIL FIELD APPLICATION
Gel volume is to be designed for both injection and production wells
261 Injection well
When cross flow occurs between thief zone and low permeability oil bearing zone a large
volume of gel is to be injected so that gel penetrates significant distance into the thief zone
(Romero et al 2003) In case where there is no cross flow ie thief zone is separated by an
impermeable barrierlayer from oil bearing zone a small volume of gel is placed near the
wellbore (Glenat et al 1996) Gel volume can be designed in two ways one is based on
filling a portion of channel volume from injector to producer and another is based on
distance from the injection well up to which the gel is to be placed (Parez et al 2001
Sarkissian et al 2005)
262 Production well
There are no definite design criteria available for bulk volume for producing well
treatment Gels with higher polymer concentrations are used in producing well (vs
injection well) treatment because the gel has to withstand high differential pressure in the
direction of producing wellbore (Glenat et al 1996 Giangiacomo 2001) Based on field
experience the following guidelines have been given
(a) Gel volume is equivalent to the volume of fluid that the well can produce in 24 hours
in a pumped-off condition
(b) Gel volume is based on 50 feet radius and thief zone thickness 0
(c) Gel volume is based on 50-200 barrels of gel per perforated foot
Chapter 2 Literature Review
33
26 CONCLUSIONS
The conclusion of the study provided strong evidence that stable gels can be produced
under harsh environmental conditions with organic and inorganic crosslinkers which may
be used for the profile modification jobs in the oil fields These crosslinkers typically
produced gels at temperature ranges from 40 degC to 140 degC and salinity up to 60000 ppm
They are generally less toxic then chromium acetate phenol and formaldehyde croslinkers
The majority of the crosslinkers are readily available at prices not much higher than the
toxic crosslinkers
Chapter 2 Literature Review
31
25 SELECTION CRITERIA OF WELLS FOR GEL TREATMENT
Polymer gels can be applied to both injection and production wells (Al-Muntasheri et al
2010 Canbolat and Parlaktuna 2012) The objective of treating injection well is to
improve vertical injection profile resulting in more efficient distribution of injected water
(avery et al 1987) The production well treatment is to improve areal efficiency and to
reduce water oil ratio by reducing water channeling in the near wellbore region
(Giangiacomo 2001 Larson et al 1999 Ghafoori et al 2008) The following criterions
for candidate selection of injection and production wells are reported in the literature
(Maghsood and Bringham 1984 Sharma et al 2009)
251 Selection criteria for injection wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Low secondary oil recovery due to poor sweep efficiency that is high degree of
reservoir heterogeneity
(b) Pre-matured water breakthrough of producing wells
(c) Evidence of direct injector to producer channeling through fractures bugs or high
matrix permeability rock
(d) High injection rate associated with low well head pressure
252 Selection criteria for production wells
The selection criteria for the injection wells candidates are the following
(a) Recovery calculations indicate that considerable mobile oil remains that could be
recovered most cost effectively if a blocking agent could be realistically placed in the
proper location
(b) High water oil ratio (WOR) values are observed
(c) The source of excess water production is identified (ie using profiles logs or
tracers)
Chapter 2 Literature Review
32
(d) The candidate well exhibits high productivity
26 DESIGNING GEL JOB FOR OIL FIELD APPLICATION
Gel volume is to be designed for both injection and production wells
261 Injection well
When cross flow occurs between thief zone and low permeability oil bearing zone a large
volume of gel is to be injected so that gel penetrates significant distance into the thief zone
(Romero et al 2003) In case where there is no cross flow ie thief zone is separated by an
impermeable barrierlayer from oil bearing zone a small volume of gel is placed near the
wellbore (Glenat et al 1996) Gel volume can be designed in two ways one is based on
filling a portion of channel volume from injector to producer and another is based on
distance from the injection well up to which the gel is to be placed (Parez et al 2001
Sarkissian et al 2005)
262 Production well
There are no definite design criteria available for bulk volume for producing well
treatment Gels with higher polymer concentrations are used in producing well (vs
injection well) treatment because the gel has to withstand high differential pressure in the
direction of producing wellbore (Glenat et al 1996 Giangiacomo 2001) Based on field
experience the following guidelines have been given
(a) Gel volume is equivalent to the volume of fluid that the well can produce in 24 hours
in a pumped-off condition
(b) Gel volume is based on 50 feet radius and thief zone thickness 0
(c) Gel volume is based on 50-200 barrels of gel per perforated foot
Chapter 2 Literature Review
33
26 CONCLUSIONS
The conclusion of the study provided strong evidence that stable gels can be produced
under harsh environmental conditions with organic and inorganic crosslinkers which may
be used for the profile modification jobs in the oil fields These crosslinkers typically
produced gels at temperature ranges from 40 degC to 140 degC and salinity up to 60000 ppm
They are generally less toxic then chromium acetate phenol and formaldehyde croslinkers
The majority of the crosslinkers are readily available at prices not much higher than the
toxic crosslinkers
Chapter 2 Literature Review
32
(d) The candidate well exhibits high productivity
26 DESIGNING GEL JOB FOR OIL FIELD APPLICATION
Gel volume is to be designed for both injection and production wells
261 Injection well
When cross flow occurs between thief zone and low permeability oil bearing zone a large
volume of gel is to be injected so that gel penetrates significant distance into the thief zone
(Romero et al 2003) In case where there is no cross flow ie thief zone is separated by an
impermeable barrierlayer from oil bearing zone a small volume of gel is placed near the
wellbore (Glenat et al 1996) Gel volume can be designed in two ways one is based on
filling a portion of channel volume from injector to producer and another is based on
distance from the injection well up to which the gel is to be placed (Parez et al 2001
Sarkissian et al 2005)
262 Production well
There are no definite design criteria available for bulk volume for producing well
treatment Gels with higher polymer concentrations are used in producing well (vs
injection well) treatment because the gel has to withstand high differential pressure in the
direction of producing wellbore (Glenat et al 1996 Giangiacomo 2001) Based on field
experience the following guidelines have been given
(a) Gel volume is equivalent to the volume of fluid that the well can produce in 24 hours
in a pumped-off condition
(b) Gel volume is based on 50 feet radius and thief zone thickness 0
(c) Gel volume is based on 50-200 barrels of gel per perforated foot
Chapter 2 Literature Review
33
26 CONCLUSIONS
The conclusion of the study provided strong evidence that stable gels can be produced
under harsh environmental conditions with organic and inorganic crosslinkers which may
be used for the profile modification jobs in the oil fields These crosslinkers typically
produced gels at temperature ranges from 40 degC to 140 degC and salinity up to 60000 ppm
They are generally less toxic then chromium acetate phenol and formaldehyde croslinkers
The majority of the crosslinkers are readily available at prices not much higher than the
toxic crosslinkers
Chapter 2 Literature Review
33
26 CONCLUSIONS
The conclusion of the study provided strong evidence that stable gels can be produced
under harsh environmental conditions with organic and inorganic crosslinkers which may
be used for the profile modification jobs in the oil fields These crosslinkers typically
produced gels at temperature ranges from 40 degC to 140 degC and salinity up to 60000 ppm
They are generally less toxic then chromium acetate phenol and formaldehyde croslinkers
The majority of the crosslinkers are readily available at prices not much higher than the
toxic crosslinkers